七年级英语冀教版教案模板（精选多篇）

推荐第1篇：冀教版七年级英语下册教案

冀教版七年级英语下册教学工作计划

本学期的教学重点是围绕教学大纲，努力调动学生的学习积极性，引导他们热爱学习，表现为他们自觉学习的行为，认真完成教学工作。现将本学期担任的初一英语课教学工作计划如下：

一、指导思想：

在本学期的英语教学中，坚持以下理念的应用：

1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神；

2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础；

3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异；

4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功；

5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。

总之，让学生在使用英语中学习英语，让学生成为Good User而不仅仅是Learner。让英语成为学生学习生活中最实用的工具而非累赘，让他们在使用和学习英语的过程中，体味到轻松和成功的快乐，而不是无尽的担忧和恐惧。

二、学生基本情况分析：

本届七年级新生和以往初一学生相比在英语基础方面很薄弱，由于在小学英语课并未受到足够的重视，他们在写的技能方面基本上没有得到过训练，连音标和字母的拼读都没有掌握好。经过上学期努力，年段学生的基础知识得到了加强，学习态度也有所好转。但是学生整体的惰性还是很强，自觉性很差。 另外，学生在情感态度,学习策略方面还存在诸多需要进一步解决的问题。例如：很多学生不能明确学习英语的目的，没有真正认识到学习英语的目的在于交流；有些同学在学习中缺乏小组合作意识；大多数同学没有养成良好的学习习惯，不能做好课前预习课后复习，学习没有计划性和策略性；不善于发现和总结语言规律，不注意知识的巩固和积累。

三、奋斗目标：

钻研新课标，提高教学水平，真正做到教学相长，努力达到学校规定的教学指标。

四、具体措施：

1、抓好英语的常规教学，加强基础知识训练：①归纳学过的词组，方便学生记忆；②用词组造句和中译英训练；③组织学生结对子，一有空就你问我答，营造学习氛围，同时加强笔头的练习，使学生能熟能生巧；④把课文分段，按学习组为单位，进行朗读比赛，对学过的课文尽量做到人人会背，有些课文还要求学生会默写。

2、抓好语法学习：①掌握形容词、副词的比较级和最高级的构成和用法。区分单音节词和多音节词的构成，规则和不规则变化。②学习一般过去时态，重点突破不规则动词。③学习过去进行时与现在进行时的区别。④学习联系词的用法。

3、培养学生综合运用知识的能力：每个单元围绕着知识点反复训练，层层渗透。每个单元结束都进行测验，找出存在问题，及时补漏补缺。

4、抓好阅读能力培养：每周规定学生阅读三篇短文，带着问题阅读，阅读之后要回答问题。

5、培养学生写作能力：逐步创作一些简笔画要学生写出他们的动作编成故事，逐步培养他们看图写话的能力。

6、努力做好后进生转化工作，促进全体学生共同进步。多关心后进生的思想和学习，平时要检查和督促他们的作业及时给予他们帮助

7、关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

8、实施\"任务型\"的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力

9、在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

10、加强对学生学习策略的指导，为他们终身学习奠定基础。

五、教学进度：

第一周：准备周（开学思想教育） 第二周—第三周：Unit 1 A Trip to Beijing 第四周—第五周：Unit 2 On the Train 第六周—第七周：Unit 1—Unit 2 阶段检测

Unit 3 Having Fun in Beijing 第八周—第九周：Unit

4Did You Have a Nice Trip?

期中复习考试（Unit 1—Unit 4） 第十一周—第十二周：Unit 5 Li Ming Goes to Canada 第十三周—第十四周：Unit 6 Winter in Canada 第十五周—第十六周：Unit 5—Unit 6 阶段检测 Unit 7 Sports and Good Health 第十七周—第十八周：Unit 8 Li Ming Goes Home 第十九周—第二十周：期末复习、考试

2011-3-7

二单元教案

Leon 9: Getting on the Train

Teaching Aims：

1． words: get, get on, very, stop, onto, ready, stand, where, see, first, man, excuse, pardon, move, problem

2．sentences: Jenny and Mrs.Li are getting on the train. Don’t jump onto the train! You are in my seat. What did that man say? You have to move.Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Language Points: get on, jump onto, in my seat, have to You have to move.Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Revise Unit 1 How far is it from China to Canada? It is about eight thousand five hundred kilometers.May I go on a trip to Beijing? Yes, you may./No, you may not.I want to go to the Great Wall.Let us take a train. Step 3 Presentation 1.Ask the students to discu the questions: Do you argue with your friends? Why? Do you have a friend who gets very excited? Who? Why? 2.Play the tape and get the students to answer the question: Why is Jenny angry with Danny? 3.Teach the new words and expreions: get on, jump onto, ready, beside, run onto, in the first/my seat, pardon, have to, move Write them on the blackboard.4.Explain the language points.Step 4 Play the tape again and get the students to read after the tape.Step 5 Work in pairs.Ask the students to practice the dialogue.Step 6 present the dialogue.Step 7 Homework.

1 Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 10.

Leon 10 What are they looking at ? Cla opening 1.Greeting.2.Duty report.3.Ask several volunteers to act out the dialogue in Leon 9.4.Sing “The trip song.” 5.Sing “I walked to zoo.” Look out of , point to.There is/are--- Can you see ---? Step1: Presentation Demonstrate there be with real objects.Teacher: (holding a book) There is a book.(Holding two books) There are two books.Step2: Drill Teacher Three books.Students: There are three books.Teacher: Many people.Students: There are many people.Teacher: I see a woman with a sheep.Can you see them? Step3:Practice

1.Books closed! Ask this question: What do Danny and Jenny see outside? Play the audiotape.2.Check the answers.3.Play the audiotape again as the students follow in their student books.4.Ask volunteers to read the dialogue.5.Ask volunteers to present the dialogue.Cla closing 1.Finish off the activity book.2.Sing the song “Who’s drawing.” 3.Practice the dialogue in this leon.4.Preview Leon11.

Leon 11: Danny’s New Friend Teaching Aims： 1．words: farm, suddenly, hear, voice, ah, scare, meet, course, of course, lot, a lot of, interest, hope, enjoy, well 2．sentences: He hears a voice. There are a lot of places of interest in Beijing. I hope you will enjoy your trip. We are going on a trip to Beijing with Li Ming and his mother.Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Language Points: Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Revise Leon 9 语法： there be 结构 词汇： here and there

look out of

something/anything

far away

at the top of--- Step 3 Presentation 1.Discu the question

Do you like to make new friends? Why or why not?

Who is your newest friend? How do you meet? Explain “make friends with”and “newest” 2.Play the tape and ask the students to answer the following questions: What does Danny want to buy in Beijing? Where is Wu Li from? Where does he live? Are there many places of interest in Beijing? Step 4 check the answer.

Step 5 Teach the new words and Explain the language points

farm, suddenly, hear, voice, ah, scare, meet, course, of course, lot, a lot of, interest, hope, enjoy, well Step 6 Play the tape again and get the students to read after the tape.Step 7 Practise the dialogue in pairs.Step 8 Present the dialogue Step 9 Homework.

1 Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 12. Leon 12: Lunch on the Train Teaching Aims：

1．words: wait, finally, cart, waitre, drink, fruit, some, grape, any, mi, snack, thirsty, bottle, nothing, own, bowl, anything, else, maybe 2．sentences: It’s time for lunch.

Everyone is waiting for the food to come. What would you like? I would like a bottle of tea. May I have some donuts, please? We don’t have any grapes. Anything else? Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Language Points: It’s time for--- be waiting for—

What would you like? I would like--- We don’t have any---. Anything else? Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Revise Leon 11

hear/listen to

places of interest Step 3 Presentation 1.Discu the question

Do you like to eat lunch on the train or bus?

What do you like to eat when you travel? 2.Play the tape and ask the students to answer the following questions: What do Danny, Jenny and Li Ming want to eat? Step 4 check the answer.

Step 5 Teach the new words and Explain the language points

wait, finally, cart, waitre, drink, fruit, some, grape, any, mi, snack, thirsty, bottle, nothing, own, bowl, anything, else, maybe Step 6 Play the tape again and get the students to read after the tape.Step 7 Practise the dialogue in a small group.Make a menu for the train.Write the menu on a piece of paper.Practice using the menu with others.

Step 8 Present the dialogue Step 9 Homework.

1 Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 13.

Leon 13 What are you doing ?

Cla opening 1.Greeting.2.Duty report.3.Play “Draw and gue”.4.Watch and Gue.The teacher does some actions (singing, talking, eating, drinking, crying ) and asks the students to gue what am I doing? Quiet , play with, join Step1: Presentation Show a picture in which some children are playing games.Teacher: What are the children doing now? Students: They are playing games.Teacher: Who are they playing with? Students: With their friends.Teacher: Do you want to join them? Students: Yes, I do.Step2: Practice 1.Drill Teacher: Can I join you? Students: Can I join you? Teacher: Do you want to join the game? Students: Do you want to join the game? 2.Books closed! Ask some questions : What is Danny doing? What is the baby doing? Listen to the audiotape.3.Check the answers.4.Play the audiotape again as the students follow in their books.5.Practice the dialogue.6.Make up a similar dialogue.Cla closing 1.Finish off the activity book.2.Practice the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 14.Leon 14

What’s happening on the train ?

Cla opening 1.Greeting.2.Duty report.3.Act out the dialogue in Leon 13.4.Play “Who AM I? 5.Play “Whisper”.Loud, loudly.Step1: Presentation Talk about the pictures in this leon.What is Danny doing? What is the man doing? What is the baby doing? Step2: practice 1.Drill Teacher: He is very loud.Students: He is very loud.Teacher: He is snoring loudly.Students: He snoring loudly.Teacher: The salesman is too loud.Students: The salesman is too loud.2.Play the audiotape as the students follow in their books.3.Practice in groups.4.Ask several groups to act out the dialogue.5.Make u a similar dialogue.Divide the cla into small groups .Ask each group to make up a dialogue about buying and selling things.Cla closing 1.Finish off the activity book.2.Practice the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon15.

Leon 15 Arriving in Beijing

Cla opening 1.greeting Teacher: Hello, cla.How are you doing today? It’s a lovely day, isn’t it? Are you ready for the cla? 2.Ask this question: Who’s on duty? Then listen to the student’s report.Make sure the next student for “ Who’s on duty?” Knows who he or she is for next time.From today on, you can arrange a student to give a duty report every day.3.Ask volunteers to act out the dialogue in Leon 4 4.Sing a song “A plane Is Fast.”

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.Make a plan.What do you think of it? Step1: Presentation 1.Play “What Day is it?’

2.discu: Do you like to make plans for your life? Step2: Drill T: (Holding a book) What do you think of the book? S: It’s OK.

T: (Holding a pencil case) What do you think of the pencil case? S: it’s nice.

T: How about the picture? Step3: Practice 1.Books closed! Ask this question: What does Li Ming change in the plan? Play the audiotape.2.Check the answer.3.Play the audiotape as the students follow along in their student books.4.Students listen and repeat.5.Get the students to make up new dialogues in pairs.6.Explain “ write home”.It means write a letter to family members.Plan of our trip Step4: Presentation Show the students a calendar to review the words: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday.Step5: Practice 1.Play the audiotape as the students follow along in their student books.2.Ask and answer.Students A: What do they on Monday? Student B: They leave Shijiazhuang and arrive in Beijing.Student A: What do they do on Tuesday? 3.Explain that Danny and Jenny shop in Shijiazhuang means Danny and Jenny go shopping in Shjiazhuang.Cla closing Read the story “Li Ming Goes to the Airport” the reader in the activity book and audiotape.

Leon16 Unit Review Teaching Aims：

1.复习本单元词汇、句型。归纳总结本单元单元重点语法项目。检查掌握情况。 2.提高语言综合运用能力和归纳总结能力。

3.注音及时消化和理解各种英语知识，能做到及时记忆、不断积累。Teaching guide:

1.复习名词复数和现在进行时的用法。2．复习用餐的语言。 3．复习元音和辅音及拼读规则。

4．学习策略：每一阶段都有明确的学习目标。学以致用。

7．课前准备：布置学生自行归纳总结本单元重点语法项目和功能项目，重要词汇、句型。Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Presentation

1．使用音讯卡片复习检查本单元单词。 2．复习元音和辅音及拼读规则。 3．复习名词复数和现在进行时的用法。 4．请学生归纳总结本单元主要内容。 Step 4 Homework.

1.Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon17

Leon 17 A Taxi to the Hotel

Teaching content: 1.Mastery words: driver, drive, quickly, slowly 2.The usage of adj.and adv. 3.A dialogue about how to take a taxi Teaching goals: 1: Remember the mastery words 2.Learn the difference between slow and slowly; quick and quickly 3.Understand the meaning of the text Key points: The usage of slow and slowly; quick and quickly Difficult points: The usage of adj.and adv.Teaching aids: word cards, audiotape, flashcard, slide projector Type: dialogue Teaching procedure 1.Cla Opening 1) Greet the students in everyday English.Make sure they can response correctly.2) Duty report: They can say anything they like to say.3) Check the homework of last leon.Explain if neceary.2.Key Concepts Step 1 Presentation Discu the questions in “THINK ABOUT IT”:

Do you like to take taxi? Why or why not? Have you ever stayed in a hotel? When? Where?

Maybe they have many different answers.Gather them and then say “Today, Li Ming and his friends get to Beijing.They want to go to a hotel by taxi.Danny has a dialogue with the driver.Let’s look at what he says to the driver.”

Step 2 Listening Listen to tape with the following questions: Why is Danny scared? Can Danny speak Chinese? Can the driver speak English?

Step 3 Answer and analyze After listening to the text, discu the questions with the students.Go through the dialogue at the same time.Deal with the language points.You can use the blackboard or the slide projector.Pay attention to the different usages between slow and slowly, quick and quickly.

Step 4 Listen, read and act Listen to the audiotape again and let the students read after it.Then have them read the text for a few minutes and ask them to act out the dialogue in roles.Correct their pronunciation if any. Step 5 Demonstration Demonstrate quickly and slowly by performing an action quickly and slowly as you say the words.Point out the difference between “I am quick/slow.” and “I am ___ing quickly/slowly.”

Ask for volunteers to perform actions quickly and slowly.Describe the volunteers’ actions to the cla.Then ask the cla to describe the actions.

Step 6 Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make a dialogue about taking a walk on a busy street in Beijing.Let them use slow and slowly, quick and quickly.

Step 7 Deal with “LET’S DO IT”

Work in a small group.Imagine you are a tour guide.Your group members are on a trip to Beijing.Where do they want to go? Where do you take them?

Step 8 Consolidation Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the given words.1) They eat a lot of _____ .(noodle) 2) Look! They are ________ over there.(help) 3) Be ________ , or we will be late.(quickly) 4) The train is _________ tonight.(come) 5) Thank you for _______ me.(help) 6) They found that lost sheep ________.(quickly) 7) The bike is going _________ .(fast) 8) That old man is walking ________ .(slow) 9) That car is _______ (slowly), but this bus is _______ .(fast) 10) _________ , I can’t go down.(help)

Answers: 1) noodles 2) helping 3) quick 4) coming 5) helping 6) quickly 7) fast 8) slowly 9) slow, fast 10) Help

3.Homework 1) Understand the meaning of the text 2) Remember the mastery words 3) Finish the exercise of the workbook 4) Preview the next leon in the student book

Leon 18 Tian’anmen Square

Teaching content : 1.Mastery words: laugh, fly, hard, quietly, worry, put 2.Learn a dialogue about flying a kite 3.Some words such as quiet and quietly, loud and loudly Teaching goals: 1.Understand the meaning of the text 2.Remember the mastery words 3.Learn some words of adj.and adv.Key points: 1.there be…

2.the usage of adj.and adv. 3.some useful words and phrases Difficult points: the usage of adj.and adv.Teaching aids: audiotape, word cards, slide projector, a picture of Tian’anmen Square, a kite Type: text Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in everyday English.Make sure they can response in correct way.2) Duty report.3) Check the homework.

2.Key Concepts Step 1 Presentation Ask the students some questions : Have you ever visited Tian’anmen Square? If yes, when? If no, why not? Do you want to visit Tian’anmen Square? Why or why not?

You may give them some words to help them.

Step 2 Listen, answer and analyze Listen to the tape with the following questions: What happens to Danny？

Can Jenny fly a kite? Can Danny fly a kite?

Answer the questions together with the students and then discu the text again.If they have any question, explain to them.Deal with the language points at the same time.Pay attention to the usage of loud and loudly, quiet and quietly.

Step 3 Listen, read and act Listen to the audiotape again and let the students read after it.Give them a few minutes to practice the text.Correct the pronunciation when neceary.Then have them act out the text in roles.

Step 4 Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about walking on Tian’anmen Square.Encourage the students to use as much vocabulary as poible from this unit (easy, hard, loudly, quietly, many, men, women, children, people).Encourage the students to be active and praise them for talking risks with English! The more they experiment, the more they learn.

Step 5 Deal with “LET’S DO IT”

Work with a partner.Draw a map of Tian’anmen Square.Describe your maps to each other.What are the people doing? Try to use loudly, quietly, slowly and quickly.

Step 6 Consolidation 1.Translation 1) 放风筝 _____________ 2) 玩得痛快 __________ 3) ** __________ 4) 看见某人放风筝 _________ 4) hurt one’s arm _________ 5) Let’s do sth.___________ 6) laugh at _________

2.Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words given.1）We often see boys ________ football.(play) 2) Tom is a ____ boy.He doesn’t like to talk with others.(quietly) 3) The street is so busy, but the people walk ______ (happy) 4) I can’t hear your words, will you please speak ________ (loud)? 5) Let’s _______ the basket on the table.(put)

Step 7 If there is enough time, do the exercises in activity book.

Step 8 Summary Today we learn a text about Li Ming and his friends.They are flying kites.There are so many people on Tian’anmen Square.Some people are loud and some are quiet.After cla you should understand the meaning of the text and try to use loud, loudly, quiet, quietly correctly.

3.Homework 1) Understand the meaning of the text 2) Remember the mastery words 3) Finish the activity book in leon 18

Leon 19 The Palace Museum

Teaching content: 1.mastery words: sky, film, camera, picture, smile, break, tail 2.a dialogue about taking pictures 3.some useful words Teaching goals: 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.remember the mastery words 3.master the usage of some words and phrases Key points: 1.expre taking a picture 2.ask permiion to do sth.: May I …? Difficult points: 1.expre what you see 2.expre taking a picture Preparations: a picture of the Palace Museum, a camera Teaching aids: audiotape, pictures, a camera, flashcards and slide projector Type: dialogue Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in everyday English and make sure they can response correctly.2) Everyday report in English.3) Check the homework and explain if neceary.2.New leon Step 1 Lead in Discu the questions in “THINK ABOUT IT”

Have you ever been to the Palace Museum? If yes, when? What do you know about the Palace Museum? Do you want to live there? Why or why not? Today Li Ming and his friends go to the Palace Museum.The weather is fine.The palace is red and yellow.It’s beautiful.They take some pictures there.Now let’s join them.Step 2 Listen to the tape of the text with the following questions: What happens to Jenny? What’s wrong with Danny’s nose? What do they do for Danny’s nose? What’s wrong with Danny’s tail?

After listening, discu the questions with the students.Make sure they understand the whole text.Deal with any language point at the same time.Pay attention to the usage of the following words: sunny, help sb.(to) do sth., careful, fall, break Step 3 Listen to the audiotape again and let them read after it.Step 4.Have them read the text for a few minutes and then ask some students to act out the dialogue in roles.Pay attention to their pronunciation.Step 5 Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask them to make up a dialogue about visiting the Palace Museum.Encourage the students to use much new vocabulary as they can.Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about taking pictures.Encourage the students to use as much vocabulary from this unit as poible (camera, picture, easy, hard, help, hurt, loudly, quietly, many, everyone, men, women, children, people, quickly, slowly) As the students work on this dialogue, take real pictures of each group with your camera.Later make a poster of these photos to put up in cla.Do this as a cla project! Help the students write English sentences under each photograph to describe the action.Step 6 Deal with “LET’S DO IT”

In a small group, write a dialogue about taking pictures.Where are you taking pictures? What funny things happen? Step 7 A test 根据首字母完成下列单词

1）Can you sing? Yes, it’s e_______ .(容易) 2）Working out the problem is h______ .(难) 3）He b_______ that gla , look! He is crying.(打坏) 4）Don’t w________ , the clamates all help you.(着急) 5）Bad luck! He f________ off his bike.(掉下来) 6）Now Tom is putting the f______ in his c________ .(装胶卷) Step 8 exercise

If time permits, do some exercises in activity book.3.Homework 1) understand the meaning of the text 2) remember the mastery words 3) finish the activity book of leon 19 read the next reading in leon 20

Leon 20 Let’s Write Home

Teaching content: 1.mastery words: letter, dear, dad, soon, bottom, addre,

stamp 2.a text about writing a letter 3.some useful expreions Teaching goals: 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.remember the mastery words Key points: learn how to write a postcard Learn how to write an envelope Difficult points: write a letter Preparations: postcards, letters, envelopes Teaching aids: audiotape, postcards, envelopes, letters Type: text Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in English and make sure they can response correctly.2) Everyday report in English 3) Check the homework and explain something when neceary.

2.Key Concepts Step 1 Presentation Ask the following questions: Have you ever write a letter in Chinese? Do you know how to write a letter in English? Where do you put the addre? Where do you put the stamp?

Today we will learn how to write an English letter. Step 2 Listen and think Listen to the tape of a letter.Then look through the text together with the students.Show the students some letters and envelopes and let them know how to write a letter.Learn the words: top, bottom, left and right.Show a letter to the students when explaining.

Step 4 Demonstration Use objects in the claroom—such as the blackboard, a door or a window—to demonstrate top, left, right, bottom and corner.Ask the volunteers to show you the top, left, right and corner of objects in the claroom.

Step 5 practice

Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about buying postcards.

Why are they buying postcards? Who do they buy them for？What pictures do the postcards have？

Step 6 Play a game Play “Opposites” with the new words and the words they know.

Step 7 Deal with “LET’S DO IT” Make a postcard.Draw a picture on it including a place for writing a note, a place for the addre and a place for the stamp.Write to a clamate.Do you know his or her addre? Ask！

Step 8 If time permits, do some exercises in the activity book.

3.Homework 1) Finish the remaining exercises in the activity book 2) Preview the next leon in the student book

Leon 21: Sending an E-mail

Teaching Aims：

1．words: send(sent, sent), e-mail, waiter, show, straight, ball, per, hour, welcome, paper, again, all, meage, why 2．sentences: Go straight down this ball. I send my friend an e-mail. It is five yuan per hour. How is the weather in Canada? 通过本课文的教学使学生学习运用本课词汇、句型、理解课文内容。学习英文电子邮件的写法，提高英语运用能力。复习问路指示方向的语言，提高交际能力。 Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Language Guide:1.重点词汇 Send, e-mail, show, straight, welcome, go straight down this ball, show sb sth, send sb.Sth. 2.目标标语言

I can show you. Go straight down this ball. Here it is! You are welcome. I am coming home to Canada on February 6th. 3．学习策略

能初步利用网络上的学习资源。

4．课前准备

布置学生了解发送E-MAIL的相关知识。 Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Revise Leon 20 1．复习有关英文信件和明信片的写法，特别注意时间和地址的写法。 2．请一些学生展示、朗读自己写给亲友的明信片。 Step 3 Presentation Task 1.Danny’s e-mail.

1.Ask the students how to send an e-mail.2.Play the tape and get the students to answer the questions: (1)Can Danny send an e-mail to his friend in the hotel? (2) Who’s the e-mail to? (3) How’s the weather in Beijing?

(4) When is Danny coming to Canada? Task 2.Let’s sing a song! 1． 了解歌词大意。 2． 放录音让学生跟着唱。 3． 进行歌唱竞赛。 Step 5 Homework.

1 Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 22

Leon 22: The Great Wall

Teaching Aims：

1．学习运用本课词汇，理解课文内容。

2．学习有关指路的语言，提高语言综合运用能力。 3．能看懂地图，从中获得帮助。 4．了解世界文化遗产，自觉珍惜、保护。 Teaching guide: 1.重点词汇 today, turn, traffic , light, a map of---, go down this street, turn left, at the bus station, get on, arrive at, stop doing sth, start doing sth, more than 2.目标语言

We can take Bus 919 to the Great Wall.We will go down this street and turn left at the traffic lights.How long is the Great Wall? It’s more than 6500 kilometres long.

Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.

Step 2 Revise Leon 20 and Leon 21 Step 3 Presentation

Task 1 How can we go to the Great Wall?

1.在黑板上写：A man who has not climbed the Great Wall is not a true man.叫学生猜是哪个中国谚语。

2．看北京地图，假设从不同地点（如北京西路，王府井或**广场等），怎样到达长城？ 3．导入以下对话：

A: Excuse me.How can I go to the Great Wall? B: Go down this street and turn left at the traffic lights.There is a bus station.You can take a bus to the Great Wall.A: Which number do I need? B: You can take Bus 919.A: Thank you very much.B: You are welcome.练习对话，熟悉问路、指路语言。 Task 2.Listen ,read and act

1.Books closed! Play the audiotape and ask the students to answer the questions: (1) How do they go to the Great Wall? (2) Which bus do they take? (3) How long is the Great Wall? 2.Books open! Get the students to read the text and find the answers.3．Explain the main and difficult points (1) We will go down this street and turn left at the traffic lights. Go/down/on/along this street. Turn left/right.(2) Stop talking and start walking. stop doing sth. stop to do sth. (3) A man who has not climbed the Great Wall is not a true man.1． Read after the tape.2． Practise the dialogue in pairs and then act it out. Task 3 Let’s do it!

1．唱一首有关长城的歌或朗诵有关长城的诗。 2．制作一份有关长城的海报。 Step 4 Homework.

1. Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 23

Leon 23: Shopping in Beijing

Teaching Aims：

1．学习运用本课词汇，理解课文内容。

2．复习时间表达法，学习与购物相关的语言，提高口语交际能力。 3．倡导理性消费，感受生活乐趣。 Teaching guide: 1.重点词汇

chopsticks, gift, want to do sth, buy sth for sb.2.目标语言

What time is it? It’s 2:30.

Who wants to go shopping today? I don’t want to walk.

She buys chopsticks for her mother.You can’t walk to the hotel with that!

Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Revise Leon 22 Step 3 Presentation Task 1 Listen, read and act

1.问学生，去旅游有没有给家人朋友买什么纪念品。2．问学生，到北京旅游，可以去哪里购物。 3．Books closed! 放课文录音，回答问题： (1) Who wants to go shopping? (2) What does Jenny buy? (3) What does Danny buy? 4.Books open! 阅读课文，找出答案。 5．讨论思考题。 6．重难点：

(1) My tail and feet hurt.(2) buy sth.for sb.=buy sb.Sth.(3) You can’t walk to the hotel with that! 7.Read after the tape.8.Practise the dialogue in pairs and then act it out.Task 2.Let’s do it!

(1) 写一段关于在北京购物的短文。 (2) 朗读短文。 Step 4 Homework.

1. Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 23

Leon 24: Unit Review

Teaching Aims：

1.复习本单元词汇、句型。归纳总结本单元单元重点语法项目。检查掌握情况。 2.提高语言综合运用能力和归纳总结能力。

3.注音及时消化和理解各种英语知识，能做到及时记忆、不断积累。Teaching guide:

1．复习英文明信片、信件和电子邮件的写法。 2．复习形容词和副词的用法。 3．复习问路与指示方向的语言。 4．复习There be句型。 5．复习元音和辅音及拼读规则。

6．学习策略：每一阶段都有明确的学习目标。学以致用。

7．课前准备：布置学生自行归纳总结本单元重点语法项目和功能项目，重要词汇、句型。准备本单元单词卡片和音标卡片。

Teaching Resources: audiotape, cards, pictures Teaching Procedures： Step 1: Greeting.Step 2 Presentation

1．使用音讯卡片复习检查本单元单词。 2．复习元音和辅音及拼读规则。

3．复习英语明信片、信件和电子邮件的写法。 4．请学生归纳总结本单元主要内容。 5．Go through Page 30 Do you know? Step 4 Homework.

1.Finish off the activity book.2.Recite the dialogue in this leon.3.Preview Leon 25

Leon 25 Good-bye, Beijing

Teaching content: 1.mastery words: begin, never, every 2.a dialogue about leaving Beijing 3.It’s time for sb.to do sth.

4.What about…?

Teaching goals: 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.remember the mastery words 3.learn the usage of some phrases Key points: 1.how to say good-bye to sb. 2.the usage of useful patterns Important points: 1.It’s time for sb.to do sth. 2.Thank you for doing sth. 3.What about…?

Teaching aids: a picture of airport, a picture of Beijing, audiotape, flash cards, slide projector Type: dialogue Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in English and make sure they can response correctly.2) Do the duty report: a student on duty can say whatever he/she likes to say.3) Mainly revision about last unit.2.New leon Step 1 Lead in The teacher can ask some questions as following: Have you ever said good-bye to a good friend? Where? When ? How did you feel? Today we will learn a dialogue about saying good-bye.Li Ming and his friends had a good time in Beijing and they will go home today.So they have to say good-bye to each other at the airport.Step 2 Listen to the dialogue with the following questions: What makes Danny sad? What makes him happy? What can you say if you want to say good-bye to a friend? After listening answer the questions together.Discu the dialogue again and make sure they can understand the meaning of the text.Deal with the language points at the same time.Pay attention to the usage of the following phrases: It’s time for sb.to do sth./Thank sb.for doing sth./ What about doing sth../ You can use the slide projector during this period.Step 3 Listen to audiotape again.Have them repeat the dialogue after it.Step 4 Give them some time to read the text themselves.Then let them act out the dialogue in groups.Correct their pronunciation when neceary.Step 5 Practice Review the story so far.Li Ming, his mother, Danny and Jenny are in Beijing.Look at the pictures.What did they do in Beijing these days? Where did they do? What did they buy? How will they go home? Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to review the story.Then ask some students to retell the story in cla.Step 6 Let’s do it!

In a small group, make up a dialogue.You are at the train station or airport.One friend is leaving.The others are saying good-bye.Step 7 A test 用所给单词适当形式填空 1) Jenny ______ (want) to visit her friends.2) Did you _____ (go) there by train or by airplane? 3) She has to _____( walk) to the park.4) Thank you for ______(help) me.5) The boys ran out of the claroom_______(quick).6) My mother _____(buy) some vegetables from the shop.7) What did you ______(have) for breakfast? 8) What about _______(eat) donuts every day at home? 9) It’s time for us_____(meet) our teacher.10) Do you often go _______(shop) on weekends? Step 7 Do some exercises in activity book.3.Homework 1) the remaining activities in the activity book.2) Understand the meaning of the text 3) Remember the words The next reading in the student book.

Leon 26 Li Ming Comes Home

Teaching content: 1: mastery words: store, T-shirt 2.a dialogue between Li Ming and his father The usage of the Past Indefinite Teaching goals: 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.remember the mastery words 3.learn the usage of the Past Indefinite Key points: 1.expre the past experience 2.Did you have fun in Beijing? Important points: the Past Indefinite Teaching aids: two T-shirts or a picture of T-shirts, a picture of Wangfujing in Beijing Teaching procedure 1.Cla opening 1) greet the students in everyday English and make sure they can response correctly 2) duty report 3) review last leon 2.New leon Step 1 Talk about the questions in “THINK ABOUT IN” When you do on a trip, who mies you? When you go home, who do you bring gifts for? They must have different answers.Gather them and discu them with the cla.Today Li Ming comes back home.He bought a gift for his father.Let’s look at what it is.Step 2 Listen to the tape with the following questions: What did Li Ming buy for his father? Why? Did Li Ming have a good time in Beijing? Discu the questions with the cla.Deal with the language points at the same time.Make sure they understand the meaning of the text.Step 3 Listen to audiotape again and let them repeat the text after it.Step 4 Have the students read the text for a few minutes and then have them act out the dialogue in roles.Step 5 Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about something that happened yesterday.Ask each group to use the phrase “What happened?” in their dialogues. Step 6 Activity book In Number 1, the students circle the correct match to review the past-tense verbs.In Number 2, the students may practice the structure: “What happened?” “I…” Step 7 A test 句型转换

1.They went to Beijjing by plane.(用usually改写) ________________________________ 2.Jim walks to school every day.(用yesterday作时间状语) __________________________________.3.She often looks at the map.(用last week替换often) ____________________________________________.Step 8 Summary Today we learn a dialogue between Li Ming and his father.Li Ming went to Beijing for a few days.He came back from Beijing and bought some gift for his father and his friends.We learned the Past Indefinite in this leon.So after cla you must use some words to expre your past experience.3.Homework 1) understand the meaning of the text 2) remember the mastery words 4) finish your activity book

Leon 27 Jenny Comes Home

Teaching content: 1.mastery words: second, third, homework 2.a dialogue between Jenny and her mother 3.Ordinal Numerals 4.see sb do sth.and see sb.doing sth.Teaching goals: 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.master the mastery words 3.the ordinal numerals Key points: 1.the ordinal numerals 2.the Past Indefinite Tense 3.the usage of every Important points: the Ordinal Numerals Teaching aids: chopsticks, audiotape, flash cards, slide projector Type : dialogue Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in English 2) Duty report 3) Review last leon and deal with some exercises in activity book.2.New leon Step 1 Talk about the questions in “THINK ABOUT IT” What things do you do every day? What did you do last week? What things would you like to do differently? Step 2 Listen to the tape of the text with the following questions: Why did Jenny like Beijing? What did Jenny buy for her mother? Deal with any language points at the same time.Make sure they understand the meaning of the text.Pay attention to the word: every, first, second, third Step 3 Listen to the audiotape again and let the students repeat the text after it.Step 4 Give them some time to read the dialogue themselves.Then have them act out the dialogue in roles.Step 5 Deal with the second part of leon 27.Pay attention to the difference of the Present Indefinite and the Past Indefinite.Master the usage of every and last.You can make some other sentences using the word last.For example, last month, last year and so on.Step 6 Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about coming home from a trip.Encourage the students to talk about what they did on the trio.Step 7 Deal with “LET’S DO IT”

Work with a partner and write a dialogue.Talk about what you do every day and what you did last week.Was last week the same or different? 3.Cla closing 1) understand the meaning of the text 2) remember the mastery words 3) finish the activity book of leon 27 the next reading of student book

Leon 28 Danny Comes Home

Teaching content: 1.mastery words: happen 2.a dialogue between Danny and Mr Wood 3.the Past Indefinite 4.the usage of fun and fall Teaching goals 1.understand the meaning of the text 2.remember the mastery words 3.master past forms of some verbs Key points 1.some past forms of verbs 2.the usage of word happen and fun Difficult points: 1.the past forms of some verbs 2.I was taking a picture with Jenny’s camera.Type : dialogue Teaching aids: some photos, audiotape Teaching procedure 1.Opening cla 1) Greet the students in everyday English and make sure they can response correctly.2) Duty report 3) Review leon 27 2.New leon Step 1 lead in Discu the following questions: Do you have a favourite teacher? Why is he or she your favourite? Did you ever hurt yourself? How? Gather different answers from the students.Step 2 Listen to the tape of the text with the following questions: Did Danny like his trip to China? What happened to Danny’s nose?

Deal with the language points at the same time.Pay attention to the word happen and have fun.Make some sentences to make the students understand the words.Step 3 Listen to audiotape again and let the students read after it.Step 4 Have them read the text for a few minutes.Then let them act out the dialogue in roles.Step 5 Practice : Ask the students to pretend they have just visited a restaurant.Ask them to write some sentences about where they went, what they ate and what they saw.Ask for volunteers to read their sentences to the cla.Step 6 a test 用所给单词的适当形式填空。

1.Danny fell off the bike and ______ (break ) his arm yesterday.2.Mary was sorry.What ______(happen) to her? 3.Jenny ______(take) a picture when I saw her.4.The boys planned _______(fly) kites in the park.5.Did you have _____(funny) in Dalian? Step 7 Deal with “LET’S DO IT” Work in a small group.Talk about funny stories from your life.What happened to you? Choose the best story and tell it to the whole cla.3.Cla closing 1) understand the meaning of the text 2) remember the mastery words 3) finish the activity book of leon 28 the next reading of student book

Leon 29 Pictures and Gifts

Teaching content: 1.a dialogue about what they did in Beijing 2.the Past Indefinite 3.some past forms of verb Teaching goals:

1.understand the meaning of the whole text 2.master some words: near, fly, buy, welcome, put on 3.learn the Past Indefinite Tense Key points: 1.some past forms of some verbs 2.the usage of some phrases Difficult points: some past forms Teaching aids: some pictures, a hat, a kite, audiotape Type: dialogue

推荐第2篇：冀教版英语七年级第六单元教案

Unit6 Leon 41 Go to School

Target language 1.Words and phrases

walk, car, bicycle, doctor, by, far, near, drive, ride, busineman, store, by bus, by car 2.Key sentences How do you / they go to …?

By bus / car.

How does she / he go to …?

She / He goes to work on foot.Learning ability goals

Help students talk about their family members using the target language.Teaching important points

Learn to expre different means of transportation. Teaching difficult points

The meanings and usage of different ways of transportation.Teaching methods Listening and speaking.Teaching aids

Pictures, tape recorder Teaching period 1 Teaching procedures & ways Step I Warming up Ss sing a song: This is the way we brush our hair, on a Sunday morning. Step II Lead-in Show the pictures of a bus, a car, a bicycle and a picture of walking.T: (Picture 1) How do I go to work? S1: I go to work by bus.I take a bus to work.T: (Picture 2) How do you go to school? S2: I go to school by bicycle.I ride a bicycle to school.T: (Picture 3) How does my friend go to work? S3: My friend goes to work by car.My friend drives a car to work.T: (Picture 4) How does my sister go to work? S4: She goes to work on foot.She walks to work.Teach the phrases: by bus / car / bicycle, on foot.

Introduce the phrases: in the / one’s car, on the / one’s bike, take a bus / car, ride a bicycle.

Language points: How do you go to school? Step III Game Tell Ss to find partners to play the game with the pictures used in Step II.Tell Ss to place the pictures face down in a pile.Player 1 picks up a picture and puts it on his or her forehead with the picture facing toward the other player.Player 1 tries to gue the picture according to Player 2’s action.

When Player 1 guees the picture, the turn paes to the next player.Step IV Presentation (1) Free talk.Ss have a free talk in pairs.Say something about their family members using the target language.A sample dialogue:

S1: How do you go to school? S2: I walk to school.S1: How does your father go to work? S2: He goes to work by bus.

(2) Deal with Part 2 on Page 52: How does she / he go to work? Show the pictures on the screen.Ss ask and answer about them.(They stand in front of the whole cla.)

A sample dialogue: S1: Look at this picture.This is my uncle.S2: What’s your uncle? / What does your uncle do? S1: He is a clerk in a store.S2: How does he go to work? S1: He goes to work on foot./ He walks to work.S3: Look at this picture.This is my aunt.S4: …

Ask more Ss to practise it.Step V Listening T: Now you will hear a short dialogue with the target language.You’ll listen to It twice.Please listen carefully and then answer my Qs: 1.How does Jenny go to school? 2.How does Kim go to school? 3.How does Steven go to school? 4.How does Danny go to school? Play the audiotape.After listening, check Ss’ answers.Suggested answers: 1.She goes to school by bus./ She takes a bus to school.2.She goes to school on foot./ She walks to school.3.He goes to school by car./ He takes a car to school.

4.He goes to school by bicycle./ He rides his bicycle to school.Step VI Homework Exercises: Form the sentences.1.how, Li Ming, to, work, go, does

__________________________ 2.father, to, us, drives, my, the, school

_____________________________ 3.Linda’s home, school, from, far, is

___________________________ 4.brother, his, in, school, a, works

__________________________ 5.ride a bicycle, the factory, to, I

_________________________ 6.go to school, you, by bus, or, do, by bicycle

板书设计

Leon 41 Go to School

How do you / they go to …?

walk, car, bicycle, doctor, By bus / car.

by, far, near, drive, ride How does she / he go to …?

busineman, store, by bus, She / He goes to work on foot.

by car

Unit 6 Leon 42 Let’s Go to the City

Target language 1.Words and phrases

hotel, park, street, help, can, city, apartment, building, stop, wait, office, just, stair, show, follow, lost, man, map, turn, down, apartment building, traffic light, Excuse me, turn left / right 2.Key sentences

Excuse me! Where is …? Is the … far from here?

It’s just up the stairs! Let me show you.I’m lost.Can you help me?

Go down this street and turn left / right.Learning ability goals

Help students learn to ask and show the way. Teaching important and difficult points How to ask and show the way.Teaching methods Listening and speaking.Teaching aids

Pictures and tape recorder.Teaching periods 1 Teaching procedures & ways Step I Game: Sentence dragon T: We will play a game named sentence dragon.First I will give every one of you three cards.On each card, write one of the following:

1.Who ;

2.Verb or phrases of help, have, want, go to school and fly a kite (write only one of them); 3.Where.Then collect the cards into three groups.Let each student choose one card from each group to make new sentences.For example, a student gets the following: Danny, eat donuts, on the bus The sentence will be: Danny eats donuts on the bus.Ss will review the Simple Present Tense (II) by playing the game.Step II Lead-in

T: Several months ago I came to another city (Write “city” on the Bb.) and took some pictures there.Maybe you can name some places that you are familiar with.Let me show you.Look here, please.Show some pictures of our city, street, park, hotel, apartment buildings, traffic lights and so on.Write them on the Bb while introducing them one by one.Ask the cla say the words and phrases a few times.Make sure Ss can pronounce them correctly.Have Ss chant together while showing the picture of traffic lights.T: I’m new in that city.I’m lost.Can you help me? (Write them on the Bb and explain to the whole cla.) Ss: Sure.T: Thank you.This is my map of that city.(Explain “map” and show it on the screen.) Excuse me! Where is the park? Who can help me? S1: Here it is.(Point at the map.) T: Excuse me! Where is the hotel? S2: Here it is.(Point at the map.) Step III Game — What’s miing? Where is it?

Put up the pictures used in Step I in the front of the claroom.Tell Ss to look at the pictures for one minute and then close their eyes.Remove a picture.Ask Ss to open their eyes and try to figure out which picture you have removed.Call on individual Ss to answer with the name of the picture until one answers correctly.T: Excuse me! Where is the ....? (Name the removed picture.) S: Here it is! (The student who answered correctly goes to finds the picture, holds it up and says the word of the picture loudly.) Then the student who answered correctly hides a picture and leads the gueing.Step IV Presentation You’d better ask several good Ss to make up dialogues with you as examples.(1) T: Can you help me? I’m lost.Where is the street? S1: Here it is! (Point at the map.) T: Is that far from here? (Write it on the Bb and explain it.) S1: No, it isn’t.T: Thanks! S1: You’re welcome.

(2) S2: Excuse me! Where is the park? T: There it is! S2: Is that far from here? T: No, it isn’t.Let me show you.Go down this street and turn left.(Write it on the Bb and

explain it.) You can walk there.

S2: Thank you.T: You’re welcome.

Write down the key sentences in the dialogues on the Bb or show them on the screen when they are used.Then have Ss repeat them.Step V Pair work Let Ss do some practice in pairs using the target language.T: Now make up a short conversation with your partner.You may make one like examples above.Ss practise making up their own short conversations in pairs for five minutes.At last ask some pairs to present their conversations to the whole cla.Step VI Listening

Let Ss do some listening practice with the target language.T: Now you will hear a short dialogue between Ms.Liu and Li Ming.Please listen carefully and then answer my Qs.1.Where does Li Ming want to go? 2.Where is the library? 3.Is the library far or near? 4.Does the woman help Li Ming? 5.What does she do to help Li Ming? Ss can listen to the dialogue twice.They can write the key words according to the Qs while listening.Play the audiotape.After listening, check Ss’ answers.Suggested answers: 1.The library./ He wants to go to the library.2.Near the office./ It’s near the office./ It’s just up the stairs.3.It’s near.

4.Yes, she does.5.She shows Li Ming and asks him to follow her.Step VII Discuion Play the audiotape.Read Part 3 on Page 53.Then discu the following questions in groups: 1.Where is Danny? 2.What is Danny looking for? 3.What is a map? 4.What does the man say? As Ss work, move around the claroom to join Ss.Suggested answers: 1.He is in the street, but he is lost.2.He is looking for the school.3.It shows where you are and where you should go.

4.He says, “Go down this street and turn left.It’s not far.You can walk there.”

Step VIII Summary and Homework T: In this cla we’ve learnt sentence patterns of asking and showing the way.After cla have more exercises.

板书设计

Leon 42 Let’s Go to the City

Excuse me! Where is …?

hotel, park, street, Is the … far from here?

can, city, apartment It’s just up the stairs! Let me show you.

follow, lost, man,

I’m lost.Can you help me?

map, turn, down, Go down this street and turn left / right.

traffic light,

推荐第3篇：冀教版七年级英语下册unit5教案

2014-2015学年冀教版七年级英语下册 《Unit 5 I Love Learning English 》教案

Leon 25:A Phone Friend

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.New words and phrases:foreign,could,understand,cartoon,Canadian,have a good talk,by oneself.2.Important sentences:I love learning English.Can I speak to........? This is.......3.The meaning of text:making phone calls.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the new words and phrases,important sentences.2.understand the meaning of text.3.master the grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.

三、Key points:（重点）

Master the new words and phrases,important sentences.How to make phone calls.

四、Difficult points:（难点）

the grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.1)Greet the students in everyday English 2)Do the everyday duty report 3)Review last unit and deal with some questions they have.Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

In this unit,what will we learn?ask the Ss read the book on page of 65,make the Ss understand the functions and grammar.Then introduce some ways to learn English,and how does Li Jing practice her English? Step 3.New leon.（新课） No.1 text: 1.What meaning is the title?ask some Ss explain it.2.learn the new words and phrases,then ask the Ss learn the text by theirselves first.3.picture one:who are these?what are they doing? Picture two:who is this?what is she doing? 4.teacher:read the text first,make sure the Ss can read text correctly.explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.Important sentences,must explain clearly,make the Ss can master these.5.how to use the phrases,make the Ss can finish the practice.No.2 grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.(一)情态动词can的用法: can的意思，一是：能，二是：许可

肯定句：主语 + can + 动词原形 + 其他成分 疑问句：can + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他成分 肯定回答：Yes，主语（必须人称代词） + can.否定回答：No，主语（必须人称代词） + can not （can’t）.

1、______ I feed the monkey？ Yes，______ can.

2、Can I take a photo？ No，______ can’t.

3、I can feed the monkey？（变疑问句）

___________________________________________

4、You can take a photo.（变疑问句）

___________________________________________

5、Can I go to the bathroom？（变陈述句）

___________________________________________

6、Can we take a photo？（变陈述句）

____________________________________________

7、You can eat pizza.（变否定句）

__________________________________________ (二)下面这些为反身代词(Reflexive Pronouns) 单数：myself，yourself，himself，herself，itself 复数：ourselves，yourselves，themselves Phrases:by oneself.No.3:Let\'s Do It! Ask the Ss do the practice by theirselves.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,and the new words,phrases,sentences.Sum up the grammar.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.How do you practice your English? How do you practice by yourself? The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

Leon 26 :Online Phone Calls

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.new words and phrases:Ruia,reply,competition,proud,such,good for you,be proud of,gue what,win first prize.2.Sentences:I am here.I can\'t wait to see you.3.The text:how to make phone calls.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the new words and phrases,important sentences.2.understand the meaning of text.3.grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.

三、Key points:（重点） how to make phone calls.

四、Difficult points:（难点）

grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.Remember to greet your students with phrases they have learned.Review last leon,what did we learn? Ask some Ss answer.Make sure the Ss can master the grammar---can myself yourself Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

Check up homework,make sure the Ss finish it by theirselves.Teach the new words,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.Step 3.New leon.（新课）

No.1 prepare leons before cla.Read the leon and answer the following questions: 1.what is Alicia\'s good news? 2.How does Ms.Bell help Alicia with her English？ 3.What did Alicia win? 4.How long will Alicia stay in Canada？ No.2 text：

Picture 1: who is this?what is she doing? Picture 2:who is this ?where is she from? Teacher:read the text first,make sure the Ss can read text correctly.explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.Important sentences,must explain clearly,make the Ss can master these.No.3grammar:Modal Verb---can,Reflexive Pronouns---myself,yourself.1.review:can 肯定句：主语 + can + 动词原形 + 其他成分 疑问句：can + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他成分 肯定回答：Yes，主语（必须人称代词） + can.否定回答：No，主语（必须人称代词） + can not （can’t） 2.by oneself----myself yourself No.4Let\'s Do It! Ask the Ss do the practice by theirselves.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,and the new words,phrases,sentences.Sum up the grammar.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

Leon 27 :Amazing English

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.New words and phrases:letter,exactly.fact,sentence,quick,lazy,even,dig.dig in,in fact.some useful expreions such as:here is.....there is......here are.....there are.....2.understand the meaning of text.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the words ,phrases and the meaning of text.2.learn interesting facts about English.3.review the grammar:情态动词can的用法.

三、Key points:（重点）

learn interesting facts about English.--text

四、Difficult points:（难点）

the grammar:情态动词can的用法.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.(学生分析) About English,we learned a lot,and we knew a lot of interesting facts .Now this leon,we will learn more interesting facts about English.Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

interesting facts about English.1.What letter is a question?--- It’s the letter Y!

2.When do people have two mouth?--- When there’s two of them 有两个人时! 3.Why do lions eat raw meat？--- They don’t know how to cook

4.How many sides does a circle have? ---Two.The inside and the outside.5.Two little boats without sails,with ten paengers on board.They do not go to the river or the sea .In the daytime , the boats are full, but at night they are boat empty.-----shoes Step 3.New leon.（新课）

No.1 prepare leons before cla.Check up homework,make sure the Ss finish it by theirselves.Teach the new words,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.No.2 text:Amazing English There are only 26 letters in English.So English is an easy language to learn,right?Well,not exactly.Yes,English only 26 letters,but those 26 letters can make a lot of words.In fact,there are about 800 000words in the English language.Only letter like \"a\",can be an English word.And just one word,like \"Go\"can be a sentence.There is an English word with about 1900 letters in it.Wow! That\'s a long word.This sentence uses all 26 letters:The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.Look at this word:level.You can read it forwards or backwards--it\'s the same word! The word \"therein\"has ten words in it.You don\'t even need to move any letters around.How many words can you find? Dig in and enjoy! Teachers:read the text first,make sure the Ss can read text correctly.explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.Important sentences,must explain clearly,make the Ss can master these.No.3grammar:情态动词can的用法.can的意思，一是：能，二是：许可

肯定句：主语 + can + 动词原形 + 其他成分 疑问句：can + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他成分 肯定回答：Yes，主语（必须人称代词） + can.否定回答：No，主语（必须人称代词） + can not （can’t） No.4:practice:finish the practice after the cla.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,the new words,phrases,and sentences.Sum up the grammar.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思） Leon 28:How Do I Learn English?

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.New words:magazine,newspaper,mistake,silly.2.Phrases:look up,enjoy oneself, at the same time,in/after cla,make mistakes, laugh at,right now.Attention the forms of phrases.3.the meaning of text.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the words and phrases,the meaning of text.2.how to learn English?talking about poibilities.3.grammar and important sentences.

三、Key points:（重点）

how to learn English?talking about poibilities.

四、Difficult points:（难点）

grammar and important sentences.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.(学生分析) In this unit,we learned how to practice English from Li Jing and Alicia,at the same time,we learned some interesting facts about English.Now we knew that English is not an easy language to learn,so what do we need to learn English?How do you learn English? Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

同学们学习英语时应注意以下几个要点：记单词，记短语句子，读课文，做题（在于练习语法），练习写作。除此之外，我们还有那些方法可以用来学习英语，请学习这篇课文，看看课文中的Teresa，她是如何学习英语？ Step 3.New leon.（新课）

No.1 prepare leons before cla.Greet the students in everyday English.Do the everyday duty report.Review last leon and deal with some questions they have.Check up homework,make sure the Ss finish it by theirselves.Teach the new words,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.No.2 text: Teachers:Teach the new words,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.read the text first,make sure the Ss can read text correctly.Then ask the Ss read the leon and answer the questions: 1.What grade is Teresa in? 2.What language does she speak at home? 3.What does she often read? 4.When does she watch english movies? 5.Where can you find the words for many English songs? At last explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.No.3some useful expreions such as: I love to....I like to.....Don\'t be afraid......No.4grammar: How to use \"can/can\'t\" Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,the new words,phrases,and sentences.Sum up the grammar.Sum up how to learn English,make the Ss understand that English is not easy language to learn.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

Leon 29:A Door to the World

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.New words and phrases:article,opportunity,knowledge,communicate,connect, Adoorto.......communicate with........ask for,help......(to)do,connect ......with.....2.talk about poibilities,use \"can\".3.The meaning of text.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the new words and phrases,the meaning of text.2.how to talk about poibilities.3.how to use the phrases to finish the practice.

三、Key points:（重点）

Master the new words and phrases,the meaning of text.

四、Difficult points:（难点） how to talk about poibilities.how to use the phrases to finish the practice.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.(学生分析) Review last leon,what did we learn?and how do you learn English now? Ask some Ss talk about that.Then the teacher talk about,how do we learn English?and what should we do? Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

Greet the students in everyday English.Do the everyday duty report.Review last leon and deal with some questions they have.Check up homework,make sure the Ss finish it by theirselves.Step 3.New leon.（新课）

No.1 prepare leons before cla.Teach the new words,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.Teachers:English is important to us,learn English well can open the door to the world.And making a big difference in your life,so ,we must work hard.No.2 text: Open the Door to the world All over the world,students are learning English.It takes time,but the new language can give them new opportunities.With a good knowledge of English,Ss can have bright futures.Many people from different countries speak English.English opens the door to the world.English helps you communicate with people from all over the world.You can travel almost anywhere and you will never be by yourself.You can meet new people,learn new things,order food and drinks at restaurants,and ask for directions.Learning a new language can be a challenge.But it can help you understand culture differences around the world.It connects you with the world.Teachers: First:read the text,then ask some Ss read the text,make sure the Ss can read it all.At last explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.No.3 talking about poibilities.Such as:I can talk with my clamates in English.I can write a paage in English.I can read English storybooks.I can sing songs in English.I can make phone calls.Ask the Ss talk about their poibilities and make a list: What can you do with a good knowledge of English? Finish the practice on page of 75.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,the new words,phrases,and sentences.Sum up the grammar--\"can\" Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

Leon 30:Writing an E-mail in English

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.New words and phrases:introduce,play che,try to do....look forward to....2.Learn the meaning of text,make the Ss can write.3.Important sentences:I like to.....I want to......I can......I will......

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标）

1.Master the new words and sentences.2.understand the meaning of text.3.how to introduce yourself in English?

三、Key points:（重点）

understand the meaning of text.

四、Difficult points:（难点）

How to introduce yourself in English?

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） New leon.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Analysis of the student.(学生分析) In this unit,we learned how to make phone calls,we learned how to practice your English,and we knew some interesting facts about English,now ,we know English is not easy to learn,English is very important .With a good knowledge of English,Ss can have bright futures.Many people from different countries speak English.English opens the door to the world.Step 2.Lead in.（引入）

We can use English to do a lot of things.and in this leon,we will learn how to introduce yourself in English? Check up homework,make sure the Ss finish it by theirselves.Step 3.New leon.（新课）

No.1 prepare leons before cla.Teach the words and phrases,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.No.2 Text: Teacher:ask some Ss read the text ,make sure the Ss can read it correctly.Then the teacher read the leon and ask the Ss answer the questions: 1.How tall is Wang Mei? 2.What game does Wang Mei like to play? 3.What is Wang Mei trying to do in her e-mail? 4.What Chinese words does Wang Mei teach Jeica? 5.What is Wang Mei looking forward to? At last explain the text in Chinese,make the Ss can understand the meaning of text.No.3 Writing: How to introduce yourself in English? First,you should introduce your name,how old are you?how tall are you? Then,talking about your personal interests.At last,talk about your plans about future.Though those steps,you can write a paage in English,introduce yourself.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,the new words,phrases,and sentences.Sum up the grammar.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

Unit Review

一、Teaching content:（教学内容）

1.Master the words and phrases in this unit.2.Master the grammar:can myself yourself.3.Master the important sentences.

二、Teaching goals：（教学目标） 1.How to make phone calls.2.How to talk about poibilities.3.learn some interesting facts about English,English is very important.

三、Key points:（重点） Words,phrases,sentences.

四、Difficult points:（难点） Grammar:can,myself,yourself.

五、Teaching aids:（教学辅助） Recorder, pictures or cards.

六、Type of the leon:（课程类型） Review.

七、Teaching procedure：（教学过程） Step 1.Review: Words and phrases.important sentences.Then finish the practice about words,on page of 78,No.1 Step 2.Review the grammar: 1.情态动词can的用法: can的意思，一是：能，二是：许可

肯定句：主语 + can + 动词原形 + 其他成分 疑问句：can + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他成分 肯定回答：Yes，主语（必须人称代词） + can.否定回答：No，主语（必须人称代词） + can not （can’t）.2.下面这些为反身代词(Reflexive Pronouns) 单数：myself，yourself，himself，herself，itself 复数：ourselves，yourselves，themselves Phrases:by oneself.3.finish the practice.Step 3.Writing: Do you have any helpful tips for learning English?Write a short paage.Step 4.Play the tape for the Ss to follow.Make the Ss listen the text,then let them read follow the tape.Finish the practice on page of 79.Step 5.Summary.（小结）

Sum up the text what we learned,the new words,phrases,and sentences.Sum up the grammar.Step 6.Homework.（作业）

Finish the activity book and the practice.Copy the new words and phrases twice.Step 7.Blackboard-writing:（板书）

The new words,the master phrases,important sentences.The grammar and practice.八.Teaching reflection:（教后反思）

推荐第4篇：七年级冀教版英语课件

七年级冀教版英语课件应该怎么设计？课件是根据教学大纲的要求，经过教学目标确定，教学内容和任务分析，教学活动结构及界面设计等环节，而加以制作的课程软件。下面小编给大家带来七年级冀教版英语课件，欢迎大家阅读。

七年级冀教版英语课件

1一、教学设计思路

Unit 1 是该教材的第一单元，又是为初学者准备的入门单元，总体内容不多，也不是很难，关键是做好一个衔接工作，根据学生的认知特点和心理特点，通过多样化的、趣味性的学习活动，让没基础的同学克服心里的畏难情绪，感觉到英语不难又很有趣;让有基础的同学更进一步培养起对英语学习的兴趣和自信。

教学重点：

Aa — Hh 的字母教学。

Hello! Good morning.Good afternoon.Good evening.—How are you? —I\'m fine, thanks.How are you? —I\'m OK.

教学难点：课本中英语人名的学习和大、小写字母的学习及书写。整个单元的内容，可分配在五个课时中完成。

第一课时：完成 Section A 1a, 1b

第二课时;完成Section A 2a, 2b,2c, 2d, 3, 4a

第三课时：完成 Section A 4b, 4c, Section B 1, 2a, 2b

第四课时：完成 Section B 3a, 3b, 4,

5第五课时：完成 Self Check and Just for Fun

二、教学目标

A.语言知识目标

1.词汇: Letters Aa — Hh

八个人名 Alice, Bob, Cindy, Dale, Eric, Frank, Grace, Helen

2.句型：Good morning.Good afternoon.Good evening.—How are you? —I\'m fine, thanks.How are you? —I\'m OK.

B.情感目标

1.激发学生学习英语的兴趣，发挥学生学习英语的积极性和主动性。

2.通过小组活动，培养学生的合作意识和团队精神。

3.在活动中培养学生的思维能力和创新能力。

三、教学策略

1.以趣激学：采用做游戏和猜谜等学生所喜闻乐见的学习形式激发学生的参与热情。

2.以放促学：开放地处理教材，插入大量有趣的图片、增加多种趣味活动，充分利用学生自主搜集的图文信息，拓宽学生的视野，实现知识的整合。

3.以任务导学：以话题为纲，以任务为主线，以合作交际为方式，培养学生用英语交流信息，获取信息和处理信息的能力。

四、学习策略

1.交际策略：学会与他人合作交流，并能把语言材料用到真实的生活中去。

2.资源策略：学会利用多种学习资源来获取更多的学习信息。

3.认知策略：主动思考(观察力、注意力、想象力、逻辑推理能力等)，大胆实践，及时反馈。

4.调控策略：通过课堂反馈和 self-check，明确自己的学习状况，不断调整自己的学习策略。

七年级冀教版英语课件

2Leon

11.May I go on a trip to Beijing?我可以去北京旅行吗?

1) 句中may是情态动词。表示允许或征询对方的许可，其否定形式可以是may not ，也可以是must not /mustn’t;但表示禁止时常用must not/mustn’t。例如：

May I help you?要我帮忙吗?

May I come in，please ?请问， 我可以进来吗?

---May I go to the cinema?我可以去看电影吗?

---Yes，you may。/Not，you mustn’t.是的，你可以去。/不，你不可以去。

注意：表示客气请求或征询意见时，也可用Can I/Could I /Could you…?句型来表达。例如：

Can I help you?要我帮忙吗?

Could you help me，please? 你能帮我一下吗?

2)句中trip是名词，意为“旅行”。a trip to Shanghai 上海之行，go on a trip to …到… 的旅行。例如：

May we go on a trip to Canada?我们可以去加拿大旅行吗?

My father will go on a trip to Wuhan.我爸爸要去武汉旅行。

I wish you a good trip.祝你旅行愉快。

2.But it’s the capital city of our country.但是它是我国的首都。

1)句中but 是连词，意为“但是”。它是个表示转折意义的并列连词。例如：

I like apples but my mother doesn’t.我爱吃苹果，但我妈妈不爱吃。

The box is large but light.这个盒子大，但很轻。

Playing basketball is difficult but interesting.打篮球很难，但很有趣。

2)句中city是名词，意思是“城市”。“the city of+表示地点的名词”相当于“表示地点的名词+city”。例如：

Beijing city=the city of Beijing 北京市

Tianjin city=the city of Tianjin 天津市

3.1)You’re too young to go.你太小还不能去。

句中too是副词，意思是“太”。too…to…表示否定的含义，意为“太…而不能…”,其中too之后接形容词或副词，to 之后接动词原形，构成不定式短语。例如：

It’s too hot today.今天太热了。

This shirt is too small for me.这件衬衫我穿太小了。

The boy is too young to go to school.这个男孩太小还不能去上学。

Ann speaks too fast to understand.安讲得太快，(别人)听不懂。

2)You can go，too.你也去。

着句话中的too也是副词，意思是“也”。用于肯定句，置于句尾。例如：

I’m fine，too.我也很好。

You can go on a trip to Beijing，too.你也可以去北京旅行。

4.But Beijing is far from our city.但是北京离我们市太远了。

句中far from 意为“离…远“。例如：

The school is far from here.学校离这儿很远。

5.It’s only two hundred seventy-eight kilometers from Shijiazhuang to Beijing.从石家庄到北京只有二百七十八公里。

1) 句中only 是副词，意为“仅;只”。only 在句中的位置不同，它所修饰的成分就不同，句意也就不同。例如：

Only I go to school with Tom on Monday.星期一，只有我和汤姆一起去上学。(没有别人和汤姆一起)

I only go to school with Tom on Monday.星期一，我只是和汤姆一起去上学。(“我们”没有一起做其他的事)

I go to school with Tom only on Monday.我只有星期一和汤姆一起去上学。(其他时候“我”不和汤姆一起去上学)

2)句中from…to…意为“从…到…”, 既可以加表示时间概念的词，又可以加表示空间概念的词。例如：

from ten to eleven 从十点到十一点

This letter is from Jenny to her teacher.这封信是詹妮寄给她的老师的。

It’s very far from Shijiazhuang to Shenzhen.从石家庄到深圳很远。

6.go shopping 去购物。同意短语：do some/the shopping 或buy sth in a shop。例如：

go shopping everyday 每天去店铺买东西。

I often go shopping on Sunday.我经常在周日去购物。

拓展：go+v.-ing 意为“去做某事”例如;go swimming 去游泳，go skating 去滑冰，go boating 去划船，go fishing 去钓鱼。

7.You are a good boy，and you work hard in school.你是个好孩子，并且你在学校学习很用功。

句中hard 是副词，意为“努力地”。另外hard 也可以作形容词意为“硬的， 坚固的”、“困难的，费力的”、“辛苦的，艰难的”。例如：

work hard 努力工作

hard work 很累人的工作

The ice is not hard enough to skate on.这块冰不够结实，不能在上面划。

These questions are too hard.这些问题太难了。

Thank you for your hard work.感谢诸位的辛苦工作。

8.Great!太好了!great 是形容词(用于口语)好极了;非常愉快的。表示赞同、赞扬或兴奋的感情。例如：

That’s great!太好了!

great 还有“巨大的;伟大的”之意。例如：a great man 伟人;the Great Wall 长城

9.May I eat in restaurant? 我可以在饭店吃饭吗?

eat 是动词“吃”。可作及物动词，表示具体吃某东西。例如：

eat bread 吃面包

They eat much chicken.他们吃很多鸡肉。

推荐第5篇：冀教版七年级英语教学计划

冀教版七年级英语教学计划

洪家中学

王 文

本学期我任七（3）班英语课，今年的新生有其历史的特殊性：并校后的第一届，学生来自七所小学，各校英语课的重视程度不同，学生达到的水平不一样，刚进校门就层次分明。这对我来说是新的挑战，另外，这套七年级教材我又是第一次任教，为此，我制定了如下教学计划：

一、以课标为依据，整体分析教材，把握好教材，备好、上好每一节课，向45分钟要质量

二、坚持课前才艺展示，调动学生的积极性，培养学生学英语、用英语的能力。

三、鼓励学生闯过单词关，举行两次较为正规的年级单词竞赛。在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

四、充分利用现代教学技术，利用计算机和多媒体教学软件，探索新的教学模式，开发英语教学资源，拓宽学生学习渠道，改进学生学习方式，提高教学效果。

五、关注后进生，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信心，尽快成长、进步。

六、课程安排及教学进度：

第1周：音标教学

第2－3周：Unit 1 School and Numbers

第4－5周：Unit 2 Colours and Clothes

第6－7周：Unit 3 Body and Feelings

第8－9周：Unit 4 Food and Restaurants

第10周：期中复习

第11－12周：Unit 5 Family and Home

第13－14周：Unit 6 Let\'s Go!

第15－16周：Unit 7 Days and Months

第17－18周：Unit 8 My Country and English-speaking Countries

第19－期末：期末复习及期末测试总结。

推荐第6篇：英语：教案(冀教版七年级下Unit_2_On_the_Train复习)

Unit 2 On the Train

一、

1．掌握现在进行时态的各种句型。

2．识别可数名词和不可数名词，掌握可数名词的复数变法。 3．学会使用就餐用语。

二、重难点提示

（一）重点句子

1．I see a big brown cow.我看见一只大的棕色奶牛。

a big brown cow 大的棕色奶牛

当有几个形容词修饰一个名词时，其排列顺序应该是：

限定词→性质特征→大小长短→颜色→中心词

e.g.My sister is in a big yellow skirt today.

今天我妹妹穿着一件大的黄色裙子。

Do you see that tall black boy?

你看到了那个黑黑的高个男生了吗？

He wears a very beautiful big gray cotton jacket.

他穿一件非常好看的大的灰色的棉外套。

This is the very clever small 10-year-old Chinese girl.

这就是那个非常聪明的10岁中国小女孩。 2．What are you doing ? 你在干什么？

Who is sitting behind you ? 谁正坐在你的后面？

以上两句都是现在进行时的特殊疑问句。特殊疑问句一般由how, what, who, why, where等特殊疑问词引导。因为是特殊疑问句，故一般不能直接由yes或no来回答。

e.g.How is it going?

事情进展的怎么样啊？

What is Li Ming doing now?

李明现在在干什么呢？

Who is listening to the music now?

- 1

※注意 would 的用法：

（3）would 是情态动词will的过去式。

e.g.He said he would come.

他说他将会来的。（表在过去某个时刻所说的将来）

（4）表示“喜欢，愿意；肯，要，会”。

e.g.What would you like? = What do you want?

你想要点什么？

Even if I know, I would not tell.

即使我知道，我也不愿说。

If any friend should call, I would see him.

如果任何友人来访，我都愿意见他。

（5）表示婉转的请求：

e.g.Would you do this for me?

你帮我做这个行吗？

Would you help me?

帮帮我行吗？

（二）重点单词与短语

1．look out of„ 朝„„外面看

e.g.Don’t look out of the claroom when you are having cla.

上课时不要朝窗外看。

look还可以构成很多词组：

（1）look after照料，照顾或照看某人（或某物）

e.g.He needs to look after her mother after school.

他放学后要照顾他母亲。

Please look after my little dog when I am out.

当我不在的时候请照顾我的小狗。

（2）look for something 寻找某物，期望或期待某事物

e.g.What are you looking for?

你在找什么？

- 3

Please don’t play with fire.

请不要玩火。

My mother plays with me in the park every Sunday afternoon.

我妈妈每个周日下午都会陪我在公园玩。

三、语法小结

（一）现在进行时态

1．现在进行时态的主要用法： （1）表示说话时正在进行的动作。

e.g.I’m reading, while he’s writing.

我在读书而他在写字。

（2）表示现阶段正在进行的动作，但此刻不一定在进行。

e.g.He is writing a novel.

他正在写一本小说。（但说话时不一定在写小说） 2．现在进行时态的构成：

*肯定结构：主语+系动词（be）+动词-ing

e.g.We are having English cla.

我们正在上英语课。

*现在进行时态的否定形式：

结构：主语+系动词的否定形式（be+ not）+动词-ing.

e.g.I am not waiting for my mother.

我不是在等我妈妈。

It is not raining heavily outside.

外面现在没有下雨了。

*现在进行时态的一般疑问句形式：

结构：系动词+主语+动词-ing+？

e.g.Are you waiting for an important call from your bo in Shanghai？

你是在等你上海老板的一个重要电话吗？

Is it raining heavily outside？

- 5

2．不规则名词复数：

英语里有些名词的复数形式是不规则的，现归纳如下：

- 7

推荐第7篇：冀教版英语七年级下册Unit4 19课 教案

冀教版英语七年级下册Unit4 教案

Leon19:A Dinner Date

Step1：复习巩固、激情导入

导入：Did you invite someone for dinner?How can you invite someone for dinner?Today let’s learn Jim how to invite Steven for dinner.Step2：出示目标、明确任务

1.牢记本课黑体词汇：

activity/volleyball/practice/che/club/both/ nothing等；

2.熟读对话，把握其意；

3.背诵重点句子1-7，并灵活运用相关知识点。

Step3：自主学习、合作探究

任务一：限时5分钟，熟读所有词汇，牢记黑体词汇

任务二：熟读对话，把握其意，画出不理解处，同桌之间交流

任务三：背诵重点句子，并自学知识点，画出不理解处，同桌之间交流

1.What day is it today? 2.Would you like to come over for dinner today?

3.I have volleyball practice tomorrow.

4.How about Wednesday? 5.I usually volunteer at Old Age Home on Thursdays.6.We’re both busy all week.7.Nothing!

Step4：师生互动、展示提升

互动一：单词记忆比赛

互动二：对话熟读接力赛

互动三：知识点展示大比拼

知识点一：What day is it today? 【固定句型】询问星期几：“What day is it today?”或“What day is today?” 答语：“It is „today.”或“Today is „”

Eg: --What day is it today?

--It\'s Monday. --What day is today? --Today is Sunday.注意：星期的名称是专有名词，第一个字母必须大写。

知识点二： Would you like to come over for dinner today? come over意为“顺便来访；过来”。 Eg:Come over for dinner on Friday.星期五晚上过来吃晚饭。

Would you come over here,please? 请你过来这边好吗? 知识点三：3.I have volleyball practice tomorrow.Practice名词，意为“练习”，指经常性或系统性的重复练习。在美式英语中，practice也可用作动词，相当于英式英语中的practise.Eg:Piano-playing needs a lot of practice.弹奏钢琴需要多加练习。

Why don’t you join a language club to practice speaking English? 你为什么不参加语言俱乐部练习口语呢? 知识点四：4.How about Wednesday? How about„?意为“„„怎么样?”与What about„?同义。常用于询问消息，征求意见或建议，其后可以跟名词，代词或动名词。

Eg:I want to walk to school.How/What about you? 我想步行去学校，你呢? How/What about going home now? 现在回家怎么样?

知识点五：5.I usually volunteer at Old Age Home on Thursdays.在星期四我通常在老年之家自愿帮助老人。 Volunteer动词，意为“自愿帮助”。

They volunteer to repair the house for the old man.他们主动帮助老人修缮房子。 Volunteer名词，意为“志愿者”。 My sister is an Olympic volunteer.我妹妹是奥运会志愿者。

知识点六：6.We’re both busy all week.both 代词，意为“二者”。放在连系动词，情态动词，助动词后或行为动词前。 We can both swim.我们俩都会游泳。

both形容词，意为“二者的”。 Both answers are right.两个答案都对。

知识点七：Nothing! nothing代词，意为“无事；无物”。询问“打算做什么”时，如果没有安排，可用“Nothing.”作答。当询问“有什么东西”时，如果没有，也可用“Nothing.”作答。

be going to 是一种固定结构，后接动词原形，表示计划动作，或安排将要发生的动作，有时也可以表示推测或肯定会发生的动作，有“准备”，“打算”的意思，与表示将来的时间状语连用。

Eg：

She is going to talk about her favourite season.They are going to write the best report! be going to结构中的助动词be随主语的人称和数而变化，其否定结构是在助动词be后加not,疑问句是把be置于句首，句末用问号。

I am going to swim tomorrow.He is not going to swim tomorrow.Are you going to swim tomorrow? (Yes,I am./No,I am not.)

Step5：巩固练习、检测验收

教学反思：

推荐第8篇：七年级英语Book2 Unit6 Leon47 教案 冀教版

初一Leon 47 教案

Cla opening: Greetings.(5 minutes)

First , listen to the duty report..

Next, try to read the words of this leon.Write the important words on the blackboard.

Step 1: Interview(5 minutes)In unit 6 we are learning something about “Winter in Canada”.It’s about the weather in

Canada.Okay, First let’s talk about months,weather and seasons.Who knows, please hands

up.

1.How many months are there in a year? What are they?

2.How many seasons are there in a year? What are they?

3.What’s the weather like in spring (summer/ autumn…)?

4.What do you like to do in spring (summer, autumn, winter)

(Write the answers on the blackboard.)

Step 2.Listen and Answer.(12minutes)

A.Okay, next open your books at page 58, listen to the tape quickly, try to answer the

following questions.

1.How many seasons are there in Canada?(Four seasons.)

2.How is the weather in Shijiazhuang in summer? (Much too cold)

B.Ask the students to translate the dialogue .Explain the word :farther, much too.

Step 3: Free talk.(10minutes)

1.Ok, now I’d like you to answer my questions.

1) What’s your favourite season?---My favourite season is spring.

2) Why do you like spring?---Because I like to fly a kite.

2.Now you can talk about your favourite seasons and favourite things in groups.

3.Ask some of the students to ask and answer questions one by one.

eg.What’s your favourite season? My favourite season is spring.Why?

Because I like to fly a kite (the weather/see green trees/ plant trees…)

Summer: I like to swim.(eat icecream…)

Autumn:I like to pick apples(eat fruit,

Winter: I like to skate(ski, make snowmen,play snow balls…)

4.Ask some of the students to act out their dialogues in the front.

Step 4: What do we learn in this leon.(3minutes)

Step 5: Let’s sing a song:(5 minutes)

You are great.Are you tired? Let’s listen to a song.

Ask the students to look at the books and try to follow the tape in low voice.

Step 6:Homework for today:

1.Try to learn the words by heart.

2.Try to make a composition.The subject is “Favourite seasons and sports”.

用心爱心专心

推荐第9篇：冀教版七年级上册英语教学计划

两河口初级中学七年级上册英语教学计划

本学期我任七（2）班及七年级（3）班英语课，我校七年级新生有其特殊性：学生来自农村，基础较薄弱，各校英语课的重视程度不同，学生达到的水平不一样。虽然，这两个班的学生都在各自的小学接触过英语，但是，对于这本链接三年级起点的教科书还是存在一定的接收困难。这对我来说是新的挑战，另外，这套七年级教材我又是第一次任教，为此，我制定了如下教学计划：

一、以课标为依据，整体分析教材，把握好教材，备好、上好每一节课，向40分钟要质量。

二、坚持课前（role-play），并对其进行奖励，调动学生的积极性，培养学生学英语、用英语的能力。

三、鼓励学生闯过单词关，举行较为正规的班级单词竞赛。在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

四、充分利用现代教学技术，利用计算机和多媒体教学软件，探索新的教学模式，开发英语教学资源，拓宽学生学习渠道，改进学生学习方式，提高教学效果。

五、关注后进生，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信心，尽快成长、进步。

六、课程安排及教学进度：

第1周：音标教学

第2－3周：Unit 1 School and Friends 第4－5周：Unit 2 Colours and Clothes 第6－7周：Unit 3 Body P arts and Feelings 第8－9周：Unit 4 Food and Restaurants 第10周：期中复习及期中考试与总结

第11－12周：Unit 5 Family and Home 第13－14周：Unit 6 Let\'s Go! 第15－16周：Unit 7 Days and Months 第17－18周：Unit 8 Countries around the Wrold 第19－20周：期末复习及期末考试与总结

推荐第10篇：冀教版七年级英语下短语

冀教版七年级英语下短语大全 (中学英语教学论文)

中学英语教学资源网 → 教学文摘 → 冀教版七年级英语下短语大全 (中学英语教学论文) 2012-02-26 手机用户请点此切换到大字体页面

1.go on a trip to 到……去旅行(游) 2.the capital city of ……首都 3.too … to … 太……而不能…… 4.(be) far (away) from 离……远 5.from … to … 从……到…… 6.work hard 努力工作(学习) 7.in school = at school 在学校 8.go shopping (去)买东西 9.in restaurants 在餐馆 10.live in/on 住在……

11.come on one\'s trip to 来参加去…的旅游 12.talk to/with sb.跟某人交谈

13.This is …(打电话时).我是……。 14.be going (to) 打算；准备；计划 15.That\'s great/wonderful.太好了。 16.leave for + 地点 动身去…… 17.on February first 在二月一日 18.arrive in + 大地方 抵达某地 19.arrive at + 小地点 到达某地

20.in the morning/afternoon 在上/下午 21.how far (某处)多远

22.how long (某物)多长；(时间)多久 23.take catch a bus 坐车；乘车 24.take a train 坐火车

25.stay with 和……呆在一起

26.have a week for 有一周(做某事) 27.want sth.想要某物

28.want to do sth.想要做某事

29.want sb.to do sth.想要某人做某事 30.one/a pair of 一双/对/副…… 31.need more sth.需要更多某物 32.All done! 全部做完! 33.at the train station 在火车站 34.Have a good trip! 旅途愉快! 35.walk to … 走路去……

36.there is/are … (在某处)有…… 37.run to … 向……跑去 38.jump on 跳上去 39.be ready 准备好

40.be excited 很兴奋/激动 41.love doing sth.喜爱做某事 42.Don\'t do sth.! 别做某事! 43.sit down 坐下 44.stand up 站起来 45.pack sth.打包某物 46.write home 给家人写信

47.say sth.about … 说说有关……的情况 48.before a trip 旅行前

49.have fun (in) doing sth.做某事很有趣 50.on February first in the morning = in the morning on February first = on the morning of February first 在二月一日的早上 Unit 2 1.look out of 往……外面看

2.a big brown cow 一头棕色的大奶牛 3.a tall green tree 一棵绿色大树

4.a little red school 一所红色的小学校 5.point at + 较近处 指着…… 6.point to + 较远处 指向…… 7.look at … 看…… 8.be quiet 安静

9.draw a picture 画画 10.read a book 看(读)书

11.sing a song (to sb.) (向着某人)唱歌 12.a bottle of 一瓶…… 13.on the train 在火车上

14.sit behind … 坐在……后面

15.Here is/are ….这儿有(是)……。 16.the baby\'s mother 这个婴儿的妈妈 17.Li Ming\'s father 李明的父亲

18.the woman behind me 我后面的那位女士 19.be tired 很累 20.be thirsty 口渴

21.Me, too.我也是(做)。 22.would like sth.想要某物

23.would like to do sth.想要做某事 24.would like sb.to do sth.想要某人做某事 25.in one\'s stomach 在某人的肚子里 26.too hot to drink 太热而不能喝

27.a little food to eat 可吃的一点食物 28.a snack 快餐

= fast food = take-away food 29.have some soup 喝(些)汤 30.read the newspaper 看报 31.play cards 打扑克

32.with his friends 和他的朋友一起 33.have fun 玩得开心

= have a good/great/nice/wonderful time = enjoy oneself (某人自己) 34.play with sb.和某人一起玩 35.play with sth.玩弄某物 36.arrive in Beijing 到达北京 = get to Beijing 37.many men/women 许多男/女人

38.people in the train station 火车站里的人 39.the Beijing Train Station 北京火车站 40.find sb.doing sth.发现某人在做某事 41.buy tickets 买票

42.Good work! = Well done! 干得好! Unit 3 1.a walk in Beijing 在北京散步 2.take a taxi to 打的/坐出租车去… 3.there are many people 有很多人 4.on/in the street 在街上

5.walk quickly/slowly 走路很快/慢 6.too many + 复数名词 太多的…… 7.feel scared 觉得害怕 8.Here I come! 我来了! 9.see sb.playing 看见某人在玩 10.laugh loudly 大声笑

11.fly kites quietly 静悄悄地放风筝 12.fly a kite 放风筝

13.hurt one\'s arm 伤着胳膊 14.Don\'t worry.别着急(担心)。

15.put a bandage on 在……上绑绷带 16.put film in 把胶卷放进…… 17.take a picture 照相

18.help sb.do sth.帮助某人做某事 19.Are you okay? 你还好吗？ = Are you all right? 20.sit down 坐下

21.in front of 在……(外部)前面 22.in the front of 在……(内部)前面 23.Be careful! 当心!/注意! = Look out! = Take care! 24.Jenny\'s and Danny\'s postcards/pictures 珍妮和丹尼(分别所有)的贺卡/ 照片

25.a shop in the hotel 酒店里的一个商店 26.send … to … 把……寄给…… 27.a picture of … ……的照片 28.on the left/right 在左/右边 29.put the addre 写地址 30.put the stamp 贴邮票 31.in the corner 在角落 32.write to sb.给某人写信 = write a letter to sb.33.be bigger than 比……大 34.put sth.in 把某物放进…… 35.at the post office 在邮局 36.how much 多少(钱) 37.a friend in Canada 在加拿大的朋友 38.send an e-mail 发电子邮件

39.go straight down 沿着……一直走 40.Here it is! 就在这儿! 41.How\'s the weather … ？ ……天气怎样? = What\'s the weather like …?

42.go/come home to 回到……的家中 43.be ready for sth.为某事做好准备 44.forget sth.忘记某物

45.at the top/bottom 在顶/底部 Unit 4 1.shopping in Beijing 在北京购物 2.buy sth.for sb.给某人买某物 = buy sb.sth.3.walk there 走路到那里

4.sit and sit 坐呀坐呀(一直坐) 5.What time is it? (现在)几点了？ = What\'s the time? 6.Here is Danny! 丹尼来了! 7.What happened (to …)？ (……)怎么啦？ 8.every day (everyday) 每天 (每天的 adj.) 9.arrive home from 从……回到家 10.have a nice trip 旅途愉快 = have a good/great/wonderful trip 11.last week/month 上周(星期) / 月 12.the first/second day 第一 / 二天 13.show sth.to sb.给某人看某物 14.gifts for everyone 给大家的礼物 15.put (it, them) on 穿上 (它，它们) 16.too + adj.+ for sb.对某人太…… 17.sth.from China 来自中国的某物 18.like sth.喜欢某物

19.like to do sth.喜欢做某事(偶然) 20.like doing sth.喜欢做某事(习惯) Unit 5 1.making breakfast 做早饭

2.It\'s time for sth.该做某事了。 = It\'s time to do sth.3.It\'s time for sb.to do sth.该某人做某事了。 4.on the school bus 在校车上 5.forget sth.忘记某物

6.forget to do sth.忘记去做某事(没未做) 7.forget doing sth.忘记做过某事(已经做了) 8.the bus stop 公共汽车站 9.bus driver 公共汽车司机

10.go to school by bus 坐公交车上学 = go to school on a / the bus = take a / the bus to school 11.live too far from … 住得离……太远 12.This is sb.这位是……。

13.be (am, is, are) from 来自…… = come from 是……人

14.the name of the city 城市名字(称) 15.speak English / Chinese 讲英语/汉语 16.how old 几岁了

17.… years old ……岁了 18.be the same 一个样，相同

19.What\'s for + 三餐? 三餐吃什么？ 20.watch TV / a game 看电视/比赛 21.sit in a / the chair 坐在(扶手)椅子上 22.sit on the couch 坐在沙发上 23.read the newspaper 看报 24.in the corner 在角落

25.in the living room 在客厅 26.teach a leon 上课 27.get to work 开始工作

28.What\'s the temperature …? ……气温多少度？ 29.get bigger 变得更大 30.with an s 加有 s 31.at the end (of) 在(……的)末尾 32.make a chart 绘制图表

33.do one\'s homework 做家庭作业 34.help sb.帮助某人

35.help sb.to do sth.帮助某人做某事 = help sb.do sth.= help sb.with sth.36.put a circle for 画个圆代替…… 37.never do sth.从来不做某事 38.brush one\'s teeth 刷牙

39.have lunch / supper 吃午饭/晚饭 40.What else …? ……其他东西/事情？ = What other things …? 41.be gone 消失了

42.say good-bye to 向……道别 43.say hello to 向……问候/好 Unit 6 1.a cold, snowy day 一个寒冷的雪天 2.get ready for sth.准备做某事 3.winter jacket 棉夹克

4.What a cold, snowy day! 多冷的一个雪天啊!(感叹句) 5.in winter / fall 在冬天/秋天 6.on the ice / snow 在冰/雪上 7.teach sb.教某人

8.teach sb.sth.教某人某事

9.teach sb.to do sth.教某人做某事 10.winter fun 冬天的游戏/娱乐 11.make a snowman 堆雪人

12.another snowman (任意)另一个雪人 13.some little rocks 一些小石子 14.go inside 进去

15.… be coming! ……来了! 16.a Western holiday 一个西方的节日 17.on a / the holiday 在节日/ 假期 18.Santa Claus 圣诞老人

= Father Claus = Father Christmas 19.in red ( clothes ) 穿着红色衣服 20.on / at Christmas 在圣诞节

21.invite sb.to … 邀请某人到…… 22.come for Christmas 来过圣诞节 23.bring sth.for sb.为某人带来某物 24.Merry Christmas! 圣诞快乐! 25.do sth.together 一起做某事 26.Christmas cards 圣诞贺卡

27.the bus stop (station) 公共汽车站

28.the card with sb.(sth.) (印)有某人(某物)的卡片 29.Jenny\'s family 珍妮的家庭(家人) 30.put up 举起; 挂起; 装点… 31.something special 特别的东西 32.ask quietly 悄悄地问

33.whisper to sb.对某人耳语 = say in a low voice 34.something Chinese 中国的物品 35.There is + 单数名词 + 介词短语 .There are + 复数名词 + 介词短语 .在某地 / 某时有某物 / 人。 36.warm and rainy 温暖而多雨

37.What a hot, sunny day! 多么酷热的艳阳天啊! 38.blow sth.off … 把某物从……吹落 39.ski on the snow 在雪上滑雪 40.walk in the rain 在雨中行走 41.swim in the sea 在海里游泳 42.play in the wind 在风中玩耍

43.one\'s favourite season 某人最喜爱的季节 Unit 7 1.at the (sports) store 在(体育用品)商店 2.a ping-pong ball 一个乒乓球

3.this one (pron.) 这一个(只；……) 4.How much is + 单数名词 (代词) ？ How much are + 复数名词 (代词) ？ ……多少钱？(问价钱) 5.… dollar(s) for sth.买某物……元 6.at the gym 在体育馆

7.like … very much 非常喜欢…… like … better 较喜欢…… like … best 最喜欢……

8.my favourite (n.) 我最喜欢的人/物 9.throw /catch the basketball 扔/接篮球 10.throw the basketball at the net 投篮 = put the basketball in the net 11.hit the ping-pong ball with the paddle 用乒乓球拍拍球 12.hit the ball to sb.将球拍向某人

13.teach each other sth.(两人)互教做某事

14.a good basketball player 一位优秀篮球运动员 15.play basketball with a ping-pong ball 用乒乓球当作篮球来打 16.a basketball game 一场篮球赛 17.the other team (两队中的) 另一队 18.A play B A与B比赛

= A play against B = A VS B 19.have fun doing sth.做某事很有乐趣 20.yell for sb.为某人加油/助威 21.be good for sb.对某人有好处/益 be bad for sb.对某人有害处 22.make a chart 做个图表

23.how often 多长时间……一次…… 24.once a day 每天一次 twice a week 每周两次

three times a month 每月三次 several times 几次 many times 许多次

25.wake up 醒来；叫醒 26.more (le) than 多(少)于 27.never do sth.从来不做某事

28.for strong bones / muscles 为了结实的骨骼/肌肉 29.make one\'s body healthy and strong 使某人的身体健康和强壮

30.Sixty minutes makes an hour.六十分钟组成一小时。 31.need to get more exercise 需要得到更多的锻炼 32.on TV 从(通过)电视上

33.have to = must 得；不得不；必须 34.listen to sb.听某人讲(话) 35.from Monday to Friday 从周一到周五 Unit 8 1.enjoy sth.喜爱某物 (事) enjoy oneself 玩得开心; 过得愉快 enjoy doing sth.喜爱做某事

2.at the swimming pool 在游泳池(整个范围) in the swimming pool 在游泳池里(水里) 3.swim to … 向……游去

4.run with the kite 牵着风筝跑 5.make it fly 让它飞起来 6.run into a tree 撞上树

7.(lie) on the gra (躺)在草地上 8.look like 看起来像

9.drive one\'s car to … 开车去…… = drive to …

10.pick the flowers 摘花 11.on the beach 在沙滩上 12.in the ocean 在海洋里 13.the summer holiday 暑假 14.the winter holiday 寒假 15.visit sb.看望某人

16.next week / year 下周 / 明年

17.some books about 一些关于……的书 18.a souvenir of China 中国的纪念品 19.at the door 在门口

20.how long (时间, 物体)多长

第11篇：冀教版七年级英语下册课文

Leon 1: A Trip to China .........................................................................................................3 Leon 2: You in Beijing ...........................................................................................................4 Leon 3: A visit to Xi‟an ..........................................................................................................5 Leon 4: A Visit to Lanzhou ....................................................................................................7 Leon 5: Another Stop along the Silk Road .............................................................................8 Leon 6: Jenny‟s Diary ............................................................................................................9 Leon 7: What‟s Your Project about? ....................................................................................10 Leon 8: Marco Polo and the Silk Road ................................................................................11 Leon 9: Danny‟s School Project ...........................................................................................12 Leon 10: Music and Dance ..................................................................................................13 Leon 11: Food in China........................................................................................................14 Leon 12: A Blog about the Silk Road ..................................................................................15 Leon 13: how is School Going? ...........................................................................................16 Leon 14: Jenny‟s School life ................................................................................................17 Leon 15: Making a Difference .............................................................................................18 Leon 16: We Are with You! ..................................................................................................19 Leon 17: School Science Fair ..............................................................................................20 Leon 18: teaching in China ..................................................................................................21 Leon 19: A Dinner Date .......................................................................................................22 Leon 20: Join Our Club! ......................................................................................................23 Leon 21: What is your club type? ........................................................................................24 Leon 22: Big Plans for the Weekend ....................................................................................26 Leon 23: A Weekend with Grandma ....................................................................................27 Leon 24: how Was Your Weekend? ......................................................................................28 Leon 25: A Phone Friend .....................................................................................................29 Leon 26: Online Phone Calls ...............................................................................................30 Leon 27: Amazing English ...................................................................................................31 Leon 28: how do I learn English? ........................................................................................32 Leon 29: A Door to the world ..............................................................................................33 Leon 30: writing an E-mail English .....................................................................................34 Leon 31: What Strange Weather! .........................................................................................35 Leon 32: I Can‟t Wait for Winter! ........................................................................................36 Leon 33: Kim‟s Favorite Season ..........................................................................................37 Leon 34: Steven‟s Report .....................................................................................................38 Leon 36: Spring in China .....................................................................................................40 Leon 37: You Are What You Eat! .........................................................................................41 Leon 38: Stay Healthy ..........................................................................................................42 Leon: 39 Danny‟s Report .....................................................................................................43 Leon 40: Move Your Body ...................................................................................................44 Leon 41: Were People Healthy Then? ..................................................................................45 Leon 42: Know Yourself ......................................................................................................46 Leon 43: Have a Good Summer! .........................................................................................48 Leon 44: Volunteering in Summer .......................................................................................49 Leon 45: Baseball Season ....................................................................................................50 Leon 46: Get Ready for Summer Holiday! ..........................................................................51 Leon 47: Summer Plans .......................................................................................................52 Leon 48: Li Ming‟s Summer Holiday ..................................................................................54

Leon 1: A Trip to China Hi, mum! Hi, dad! Gue what we‟re learning about the silk road this month in school.The Silk Road? That‟s in China.Yes, it is! Mum and dad, may I ask you a question? Sure, Jenny! What is it? My school is planning a trip around China with Li Ming‟s school.Some student from my cla will go to China and travel on the Silk Road.May I go with them? Who will lead the trip? Ms.Martin! Here is the note from my school.(Jenny‟s father and mother read the note.) Yes, you may go.This is a good chance for you.You will learn about China.Really? Great! Thanks, Mum and Dad! I „m so excited! I will send Li Ming an e-mail and tell him the good news. 3

Leon 2: You in Beijing Hi Jenny, How exciting! You and Danny will come to China and see the Silk Road with us! We will travel along the Silk Road together.Wang Mei and I will meet you in Beijing.Our first stop will be Xi‟an.How far is it from Beijing to Xi‟an? It‟s about 1114 kilometers.This trip will be very special.The Silk Road is about 6500 kilometers long! But we don‟t have enough time to see it all.We can only see part of it.We„ll learn about the history and cultures of china along the way.I will send you the school‟s plan for our trip.Your friend, Li Ming

Arrive in Beijing and take a train to Xi‟an.Visit Xi‟an and the terra Cotta Warriors See Lanzhou and the yellow river Visit Dunhuang..Come back to Beijing and leave Beijing.

Leon 3: A visit to Xi’an Welcome to Xi‟an – the walled city.You can walk along the wall in the walled city.It is about 12 kilometers long and over 600 years old.You can climb up the big wild goose pagoda.It is over 1300 years old.You can hit the ancient drum in the drum tower.You can also ring the ancient bell in the Bell tower.You can visit the famous Terra Contra Warriors.They are over 2000 years old! Eat delicious Chinese food and enjoy the special dishes of Xi‟an.Xi‟an has a long history.You will have a lot of fun here in this ancient city.

The terra cotta warriors Welcome to the terra Corra Warriors.We call them Bing ma Yong in Chinese.This is an ancient place.Let‟s go to the first pit! Can you see the terra cotta warriors? They are standing beside their horses.Wow! I want to sit on one of the horse! No, no! You cannot to that.Please stand here with me and move with me.Ok? Ok.But I am really excited!

5 This is wonderful! May I take photos here? No.Look at the sign, No photos!” Oh, I see, thank you. 6 Leon 4: A Visit to Lanzhou The group takes a train to Lanzhou.Then they go to the hotel.Later, they go for a walk along the Yellow River.All right.Let‟s go down this street and turn left at the traffic light.This road will lead us to the Yellow River.Look! A bridge! This is the Lanzhou Zhongshan Bridge.It was the first bridge over the Yellow River.The Silk Road croed the yellow river in Lanzhou.Wow, the Yellow River is so wide! Yes it‟s wide and long.The Yellow River is about 5400 kilometers long.We call it the mother river.Look! A statue beside the Yellow River! A mother with a baby! Oh, that‟s the mother river statue.It‟s beautiful! Can we take a picture in front of the statue, Ms.Martin? Sure! 7 Leon 5: Another Stop along the Silk Road The group arrives in dunhuang.They take a tour around the city.This is an amazing city.It‟s one of the maim stops on the silk road.It‟s famous as the ciy of sands.Many people come here to see the ancient paintings in the Marco polo.Yes, Marco polo waked here.But did he ride a camel here? Yes Danny, Of course he did! Well, then I want to ride a camel, too! ( they find a camel man on their way to Mingsha Mountain) HELLO, SIR, MAY I RIDE A CAMEL? Sure.Is it safe? Yes, you will not fall off.Are you sure? That camel is really tall.Yes , he is tall, but you will be all right.Come on, Danny.It will be fun! I will ride a camel, too.Ok.( The man helps Danny and jenny onto the camels ) The Yellow River! This is fun! Look at me.I‟m Marco polo! 8

Leon 6: Jenny’s Diary Dear Diary, This is our last night in China.We will fay home tomorrow.We did so much on this trip.This afternoon, we went to see the Beijing Opera.Wow! I loved the music and the colorful clothing.Yesterday was a great day.In the afternoon, we went to the Great Wall.It is amazing! It is about 6300 kilometres long and over 2000 years old.Then, in the evening, we went to the Bird‟s Nest, It is only a few years old, but is it a very famous and beautiful building.It held the 2008 Olympics.Danny looked for birds there.But of course he didn‟t find any.China is a great country.Where else can you travel thousands of years backing time? We saw the Terra Cotta Warriors, the Walled City and the Yellow River.I learned so much about Chinese history and culture on this trip.I learned about a new instrument – the erhu.And I ate some delicious food.I can‟t believe our trip is over.I well mi China.I well come back someday.Jenny.

9 Leon 7: What’s Your Project about? Jenny and Danny talk about the trip and their projects.Hi, Danny.Did you have a good rest after our trip? Yes, I slept for two full days! I feel good now.We had a great trip.We learned so much.And we saw our friend Li Ming again.Yes.Are you ready for your project? Yes, I am.I will talk about Marco Polo we heard a lot about him on the Silk Road.What‟s your project about? My project o sabot some places of interest in China.I will talk about the places and things on the trip.I still can‟t believe it – they don‟t have donuts on the Silk Road.Danny! You can find donuts anywhere in Canada.The Silk Road is about history and culture, not donuts.Yes, I know.I‟m making a joke.Let‟s go to the library and work on our projects.Good idea. 10 Leon 8: Marco Polo and the Silk Road Hello, everyone! My project is about Marco Polo and the Silk Road.Marco Polo was a man from Italy.At the age of 17, he went to China.He travelled along the Silk Road with his father and uncle.Together, they moved goods between Europe and Asia on the Silk Road.Later, Marco Polo travelled with his brother.They travelled on boats, horses and camels.Their journey lasted about twenty years! In 1275, Marco Polo Travelled to Beijing.He met the king and worked for him for 17 years.During those years, Marco Polo learned about coal and paper.The Chinese discovered coal and invented paper.These things were new to Marco Polo.He brought some coal and paper back to Italy with him.He also brought back a lot of silk, tea and other goods.Marco Polo Wrote a famous book about his travels to China.I hoped to write a book like that someday.Thank you.By: jenny Date: march 25

11 Leon 9: Danny’s School Project For my project, will describe some places and things from China.You gue their names.Just try your best.Are y9ou ready? Let‟s begin! These things are very old.People built them a long time age.They look like an ancient army.What are they? Are they the clay soldiers and horses from China? Yes, you are right.They are the Terra Cotta Warriors in Xi‟an.Here are some pictures.Wow! Cool pictures, Danny.The next one is an animal.It‟s big and tall.It‟s an important tool on the Silk Road.It it a horse? Sorry! It lives in the desert.Oh, it‟s a camel! Well done.Look at this picture.I‟m riding a camel.Here is the last one.It is very soft.It comes in many colors.Many things are soft and colorful.Can you tell us a little bit more, please? Ok.We can make clothes from it.Is it silk? Yes.You gueed it, lily! Look at me.I‟m wearing a silk shirt.

12 Leon 10: Music and Dance I‟m still thinking about our trip to the Silk Road.I realized many things.China has so much history.And our culture is so rich and colorful.Yes, I know.I feel the same way.The trip gave me an idea.I want to learn to play the erhu! It is a part of ancient Chinese culture.Many Western people call it the “Chinese violin” That‟s a great idea, Li Ming.! I can‟t wait to play music for all my friends.You will be a great erhu player, Li Ming.I hope so.Wang Mei, you are a good dance.Wy don‟t you learn a traditional Chinese dance? Then we can take part in spring Festival show together.I will play music and you can dance! I like that idea! Maybe I can wear some traditional clothes, too! 13

Leon 11: Food in China Jenny goes on line to tell others about the food in China.Hello, everyone! I just got back from a trip to the Silk Road in China.Everything was great – especially the food! My favorite dishes were Beijing Duck and Lanzhou noodles.What„s so special about these two dishes? Well, they have a lot of history behind them.Beijing Duck is really a Chinese treasure.It takes a lot of work, but the end product is worth it.Lanzhou noodles are long hand-make noodles.They look good and taste great! Do you want to taste these wonderful foods from China?

Your story is very interesting.I saw a show about Lanzhou noodles on TV.The man makes the noodles so fast.It was like magic! I heard that, in China, some people eat noodles for breakfast.Is this true? Yes, it‟s true.Many people eat noodles for breakfast.Sometimes they eat them for lunch or supper or supper, too,.And I know why – they taste REALLY good! I once had Beijing Duck in our city.Can I find Lanzhou noodles here? I will try. 14 Leon 12: A Blog about the Silk Road Li Ming had a good time on his trip to the Silk Road.He wants to trite about his trip.I just got back from a great trip to the Silk Road.My friends from Canada went with me, on our trip.I realized many things about China.Our country has a very long history and a rich culture.I saw and experienced a lot on the trip.We went to see the Terra Cotta Warriors and the ancient city of Xi‟an.The history of China is so alive in these places.I learned so much! This trip opened my eyes.I saw my own history and culture in a new way.I hope to travel more around my country someday.Where should I go nest? Does anyone have any suggestions? Here are some photos from my trip Enjoy!

This is me with a terra Cotta Warrior I took this picture in Xi‟an.Jenny and Danny are in the drum tower..This is Danny in Dunhuang.He is riding a camel.Here ia am in Lanzhou.I love Lanzhou noodles.Yum!

15 Leon 13: how is School Going? Hi, jenny.How is your school life going? Well, I am a little busy this term.I have six claes every day.My school days are very long.Me too.I also have six claes every day.I start school at 8:00 a.m.I usually finish at 5:00 p.m.it‟s a long day, but I like my school.My school subjects are so interesting.What subjects do you have? I have Chinese, English, math, history and some others.P.E.is my favorite.We always have a big sports meet twice a year.I often take part in the long jump.Last term.I won first place! Wow! You‟re good at the long jump.Yeah! Thank you! What subjects do you have? I have social studies, shop, math, French, English and art.My favorite subject is shop! Last week, I made a bird house all by myself.That‟s so interesting. 16 Leon 14: Jenny’s School life Hi, it‟s jenny again! I go to school in Edmonton.Canada.My school is greenwood middle school.There are 400 students in my school.I „m in grade 7.my friend, Danny, is in my cla.My homeroom teacher is Mr.Jones.My favorite subject in school is shop.We often make many different things in shop cla.Once, we made a bird house from wood, sometimes we make things with clay.Last week, we made cups.And this week we will print our own t-shirts.Shop is always fun! In social studies, we do a lot of projects.Some times we work in groups.Today, my group and I worked on a map of Canada.In the first term, I have art cla.We always and paint.In the second term, I have music.I play the guitar! We usually play songs as a cla.But sometimes we play on our own.This year, we will have a science fair at my school I want to take part in the fair with my project on silk worms. 17 Leon 15: Making a Difference Hello.My name is Hao Tongxin.I live in a small village.I‟m in grade 7 and I love going to school! My school is a “hope” school.Last year.I wanted to give up my studies.I wanted to stay home and help my family.But my teacher said, “With a good education, you can make a difference.You can make a good life for yourself.Then you can help your family.Friends and other people, too.” She gave me hope.My teacher is great.She often visits her students and their families.She does not want anyone to drop out of school.She always helps us in every poible way.She is making a big difference in our lives.Now, I never mi a day of school.I want to make a difference in future just like my teacher. 18 Leon 16: We Are with You! Jason Glen is a 12-year old boy from Riverside High School.On the first day of school, something terrible happened.Jason Glen and his family lost everything in a big house fire, it was a very hard time for them.Jason‟s clamates heard the bad news.They stood up and said.“Jason, don‟t be afraid.We are with you.” the cla wanted to help Jason and his family.So they came up with a plan.The next day, many students brought clothes and food from their homes.The school had a car wash and a cooked sale.In just three days, the school raised $1200.Yesterday, the school gave the money to Jason‟s family.Jason said to his friends, “thank you, my dear clamates and teachers.My family and I will never forget this.”

19 Leon 17: School Science Fair Danny and Jenny are talking about their school science fair.They are very excited.Hey, Jenny! Are you ready for the big science fair next week? Oh, I hope so.I worked really hard this year.I hope to win first prize.Don‟t worry, Jenny.You will do a great job! What is your project about? It‟s about silk worms.I am really interested in this subject.I made a video about silk worms.Wow! I have a small piece of old silk.I also have a silk worm for the visitors.Silk worms are interesting.Yes, they„re amazing! My project is good, too.What is it about, Danny? My project is all about donuts.I talk about the history of donuts.I will make ten different kinds of donuts.And people can taste them all. 20 Leon 18: teaching in China Jane is from Canada.She is teaching English in china.She is writing an e-mail to her family and friends back home.Hello, everyone! How are you? I‟m doing well.Life in china is great! I arrived two months ago.I was quite nervous then.But everyone here is so friendly and nice.Now I feel quite comfortable and relaxed.My students are wonderful and other teachers are always helpful. My school I is very big.I have many students in my cla.In Canada, There are usually only 35 students in a cla.And they move from claroom to claroom for their claes.But in china, the teachers move!

Chinese students work very hard.They usually start school at 8:00 a.m.and finish at 5:00 p.m.Chinese teachers work very hard, too.I‟m so happy to be in China.I am learning so much here.My students often teach me Chinese.They also teach me about their culture. It‟s so interesting! I visited the great wall last month.Look at my picture. Wo ai zhongguo! I mi you all! Jane

21

Leon 19: A Dinner Date Hey.Steven! What day is it today? It‟s Monday.Would you like to come over for dinner tomorrow? Sorry, Jim.I can‟t.I have volleyball practice tomorrow.How about Wednesday? Hmm… Wednesday is not good for me.I‟m going to the che club after school.How about Thursday? I usually volunteer at the Old Age Home on Thursday.They often tell me lots of interesting stories.And sometimes we play bingo.Maybe Friday? I have math claes on Fridays.I‟m not doing well in math this year.What are you going to do this weekend? I‟m going to the countryside with my dad.We are going to plant trees.Hmm… we‟re both busy all week.Well, what are you going to do this evening? Nothing! How about coming over for dinner this evening? Sure! 22

Leon 20: Join Our Club! Che club Do you want to improve your thinking skills? Do you want to make new friends? Join our che club! Che challenges you and makes you think hard.You will learn and have fun at the same time.Club meeting are going to start next week.Join us after school on Tuesdays and Thursdays in Room 288.

Acting is fun and useful.You can meet lots of new people and improve your social skills.We do lots of role.Play games in our claes.Everyone can enjoy acting.Join our club and be a star! We meet at the school theatre every Monday, Wednesday and Friday.Swimming isn‟t just fun – it‟s also good exercise! You can stay in shape and have a good time.We have leons for all different levels.We meet after school and on weekends Join us today or stop by the pool to learn more. 23 Leon 21: What is your club type? What club is right for you? Read the following questions.Which answer describes you best? Circle it.Then add up your score and find out your club type.

1、you get enough exercise? a.Always! I love playing sports.b.Not really.I like to listen to music and relax.c.Not really.I usually draw and paint in my free time.d.Never.I like to read books and exercise my mind.

2、what I is your favorite school subject? a.P.E.I like to be active.

b.Music.I like to play a instrument.c.Art.I love to draw and paint.d.English and Chinese.I enjoy reading and writing.

3、What do you do on a cold and snowy day? a.I can‟t sit quietly.I must do something active inside.b.I stay in my room and listen to music or play an instrument.c.I paint or draw a picture.d.I read a look or write a story.

4、You are going on a trip.But you can only take one thing with you.What do you take?

24 a.Running shoes.I can‟t to anywhere.Without them. b.A music player.I can‟t live without music c.Some paper and a pencil.I can draw a picture on the way.d.A good book.I will be bored without a book. 25 Leon 22: Big Plans for the Weekend It‟s lunch time on Friday.Danny and Jenny are having lunch together.Danny, are you ok? You can‟t stay still today.And you never eat your lunch so fast.Are you in a hurry to go somewhere? No.actually Jenny, I have big plans for the weekend! I can‟t wait.It‟s going to be a good weekend? Oh! That‟s great.What are you going to do this weekend? I‟m going to learn something new this Saturday.Cooking! And I love donuts.So I am going to make donuts.Wow! How exciting! I don‟t have any big plans for this weekend.I usually just stay home, read a book, surf the internet, watch TV and help my mum with the housework.Hmm.Would you kike to join me this weekend? Really? I would love to come I always love learning new things.Wonderful! Now it‟s going to be a great weekend. 26 Leon 23: A Weekend with Grandma Zhao Hanyu is a Grade student.She is talking to her grandma on the phone.Hello, Grandma! It‟s me.Hanyu.Hello.Hanyu.How is school going? Are you doing well these days? Yes.I am learning a lot of interesting things at school.And I am reading some English stories.I can read you one this weekend.Are you coming to visit us this weekend? Yes, grandma.I am going to come over tomorrow.But I will go to the bookstore first.Sure.My little bookworm.The bookstore is just two bus stops away.It‟s very close.Do you need anything from the supermarket? I can get is for you.No, I always buy my groceries at the morning market.The vegetable are fresh and not too expensive.What are we going to have for dinner? Dumplings.of course.Yay! My favorite food.

27 Leon 24: how Was Your Weekend? Hey Li Ming, How are you? How was your weekend? I had g great weekend! What! I can make donuts myself now.my num taught me on Saturday.Jenny came over and helped us.It was a lot of take a bus there.It‟s three hours away from my house.We are going to sing songs and play games on the bus.I‟m so excited! My uncle is going to bring his camera and I am going to bring some donuts for everybody.Did you have a good weekend? What are you going to do next weekend? Write back soon, Danny. 28

Leon 25: A Phone Friend Li Jing is English.She wants to practice her English with a foreign friend.But she doesn‟t have any.So Li Ming calls Jenny.Hello.Can I speak to Jenny, please? Yes.This is jenny speaking.Is that you, Li Ming? How are you? Good! Are you free now? my cousin, Li Jing, Would like to speak to you.Ok.No problem! Hello.Jenny! This is Li Jing.I‟m happy to talk with you.Hi, Li Jing! I‟m sorry.I can‟t hear you very well.Could you speak more loudly? Sorry, I can‟t follow you.Please say that again.Ok.Could you speak more loudly? Yes.Now I understand.Good! You speak English very well.Do you like learning English? Yes.I love learning English.That‟s great! How do you practice? I practice by myself a lot.How do you practice by yourself? I watch many English TV.Shows and cartoons.I also listen to English music.Jenny and Li Jing have a good talk.Now, Li Jing has a Canadian friend!

29 Leon 26: Online Phone Calls Alicia is from Ruia.She is learning English.Ms.Bell is a Canadian teacher.They speak English online twice a week.Ms.Bell helps Alicia with her English.Today.Alicia has some good news for her teacher! Hi, Ms.Bell! Can you hear me? (Alicia does not hear a reply) Hello? Ms.Bell, are you there?

Oh good.I „m so excited today.I have some good news! Really? What is it.Alicia? I won first place at the national English competition! Good for you, Alicia! You really improved a lot! It‟s all thanks to you.No.I didn‟t do anything.You did all hard work yourself.I am so proud of you.I couldn‟t do it by myself.Talking with you I such a great help.Thank you, Ms.Bell.And gue what! I won a great prize! That‟s great! What did you win? I won a trip to Canada! Next year, I will visit Canada for two weeks.I can meet you in Canada.Wow! That is great news! You can stay with me.I can‟t wait to see you.

30 Leon 27: Amazing English There are only 26 letters in English.So English is an easy language to learn.right? Well, not exactly.Yes, English only has 26 letters, but those 26 letters can make a lot of words.In fact, there are about 800000 words in the English language.One letters like a can be an English word.And just one word, like “go” can be a sentence.There is an English word with about 1900 letters in it.Wow! That‟s a long word.This sentence uses all 26letters: the quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.Look at this word: level.You can read it forwards or backwards —— it‟s the same word! The word “therein” has ten words in it.You don‟t even need to move any letters around.How many words can you find? Dig in and enjoy! 31 Leon 28: how do I learn English? My name is Teresa.I came to Canada two years ago.Now I‟m in grade 7.My family comes from Hong Kong.I speak Chinese at home.But I speak English at school every day.How do I learn English? Here are some tips.Read a lot and use a dictionary! I often read English storybooks, magazines and newspapers.Sometimes I don‟t understand some words.So I look them up in a dictionary.Watch English TV shows and movies! Every Sunday evening, I watch English movies.It helps a lot.I can enjoy myself and learn English at the same time.Listen to English music! I love music and I often listen to English songs.Just to on the internet! You can find the words for many songs yourself.I like to write the words down.Then I can sing along with the music.It‟s fun! Speak English every day! I practice my English in cla and after cla.Don‟t be afraid to make mistakes! Sometimes I make silly mistakes and I laugh at myself.My friends help me a lot.Oops is something you say when you make a mistake.You can also say uh-oh or whoops.Read Teresa‟s phone conversation above.What mistake does Teresa make?

32 Leon 29: A Door to the world All over the world, many people are learning English.Learning a new language takes time.It can be a challenge, but the new language can give people more opportunities.With a good knowledge of a new language, you can enjoy a better life.People from many countries speak English.With English, you can travel almost anywhere.You can communicate with different people and learn new things.You can order food and drinks at restaurants, and ask for directions.As an international language, English connects you with the rest of the world.Learning English can also help you understand difference between cultures.In many ways, English opens a door to the world for you. 33 Leon 30: writing an E-mail English Wang Mei has a new pen pal.Her name is Jeica.She is from Africa.This is Wang Mei‟s first E-mail to her.Dear Jeica, Let me introduce myself.My mane if Wang Mei.I‟m twelve years old.I live with my mother and father.I have no brothers or sisters, but I have many friends.I am 1.6 meters tall.I like to play che.Last years, I won first place in my school.My favorite food is noodles.I can make noodles myself! Do you study other languages in school? I am learning English now.I want to have some more English – speaking friends.Learning English opens the world up to me.In this e-mail, I am trying to use some new words.I will teach you some words in my language.Can you say, “Ni hao”? That means,”Hello”.Try it.Here is a picture of me.What do you look like? Can you send me a photo of yourself? I‟m looking forward to your reply.Your new Chinese friend, Wang Mei. 34 Leon 31: What Strange Weather! Hello, cla! Did you notice the wild weather today? Yes, I did! I woke up this morning and I was surprised! What a snowy day! Yeah! Then the sun came out and it became warm.All the snow went away.And right now the sky is dark.It‟s going to rain.Yes, you‟re right.What strange weather! We are experiencing almost four different seasons in one day! Now, cla, I want you to write a report about your favorite season.Why is it your favorite season? What do you like about that season? Well, I love spring! It is spring right now.and spring usually means green trees, beautiful flowers and playing in the rain.I like summer.The weather turns hot and I can go swimming.Autumn is my favorite season.It‟s so colorful and the weather is nice and cool.Well, I like winter.The weather is cold and there is al lot of snow.You can go skiing and skating.You can also have snowball fights.But you have to wear warm clothes.Good work, everyone! You are all going to write some wonderful reports.

35 Leon 32: I Can’t Wait for Winter! Hey, Danny! What are you doing? I‟m doing some research for my report about my favorite season.I‟m going to talk about winter.Winter is my favorite season.Loot at this website: Come and enjoy a true Canadian winter out in the mountain.Start your day on the ski hills or go ice skating.But don‟t forget your scarves.hats and gloves.Why? Winters here are really cold! Have lunch in our world-cla restaurant and then go back outside for a snowball fight.You can even get the family together and make a snowman.In the evening, you can join us inside for dinner.Winter is the best season! Enjoy a clear, cold night beside a warm fire.Hope to see you there! Wow! That looks really good, Danny.Loot at that picture! What a cold, snowy day! It‟s amazing! I can‟t wait for winter.I‟m going to have a great time! 36 Leon 33: Kim’s Favorite Season Kim is excited.She is going to talk about her favorite season.She stands in front of the cla with a very big black bag.“good morning, everyone! Today, I am going to talk about my favorite season.In this season, the weather is usually bright and sunny.The temperature outside is cool and the sky is blue.I often wear sweaters and scarves.I love wearing scarves On weekends, my family goes to the farm and picks apples.It is a great season for apple picking.Often, we pick five full bags! I usually help my mum make apple pie.It‟s delicious! During this season, I can enjoy the different color of the leaves.They are red, orange, yellow, green and brow.I like to play in the leaves with my friends.How fun it is!”

The cla claps for Kim.But what‟s in the bag? Everyone wants to know.Apples! Kim gives a delicious red apple to each clamate.Everyone happily takes an apple. 37 Leon 34: Steven’s Report Now it‟s Steven‟s turn to speak.“Today, I am going to tell you about my favorite day during my favorite season.On that day.The weather was warm and the sun was bright.After breakfast, I went on a trip to the countryside with my friends.All the gra and made maple syrup.Later, we had a picnic near the lake.We had sandwiches and milk.After lunch, we fed the geese.„Honk! Honk!‟ the geese love bread! Then the sky became dark.These were many clouds.It began to rain! We ran to the car, but it was too late.We were all wet! We all laughed.What a great day!”

“Great work, Steven! Let‟s give a big hand, cla,” says Mr.Jones.(the cla claps loudly.) “Today is another good days,” Steven think.38 Leon 35: Surfing in Sydney

G‟day mates! My name is Aaron and I „m 16 years old.I live in Sydney, Australia.It is always sunny here, and we have lots of beaches.Our summers are always very not.Often, the temperature reaches 40 degrees! Seasons in Australia are different from seasons in many other countries.Summers here go from December to February.Our winter is from June to august.Summer is my favorite season.I don‟t have to wear shoes! We wear shorts and go to the sea every day.How nice it is! On a windy day, I can ride the waves on my surfboard.Surfing is very popular here.It is difficult, but very good exercise.My mum and dad often come and watch me surf.My dad likes to bring his camera and take pictures of me.But there are always so may people on beach.He can never get a good picture of me.I hope to be a great surfer one day.I will work hard and practice every day.

39 Leon 36: Spring in China

Hey jenny! How are you? It‟s spring in china now.I lie spring.It‟s a lovely season! The temperature is not too hot or too cold.The rain and sun make all the tre and gra green again.Beautiful flowers are everywhere and everything looks new and fresh.What is spring like in Canada? Is it warm? Is it rainy? I‟m going to the countryside with my parents tomorrow.We are going to pick strawberries and have a picnic.We‟ll stay outside and enjoy the nice weather.How exciting! Let me show you spring in china.Here is picture of me in park near my house.

Talk to you soon.Li Ming

40 Leon 37: You Are What You Eat!

Jenny and Jenny are having lunch together.Jenny look at Danny and notices something very strange.What are you eating, Danny? This is salad, jenny.There are many different vegetable in it.I know.But you don‟t like vegetables.Well Jenny, vegetables are good for us.That‟s true.To tell you the truth, I decided to change my eating habits.Yesterday evening, I ate ten donuts as usual.My uncle said to my, “you shouldn‟t eat so many donuts.It‟s not good for your health.Do you know the saying: you are what you eat?” later that night, I had a dream.In the dream, I became a big donut and everyone tried to eat me.Oh no! Then I woke up and I was scared.So, I decided to eat more vegetables.Good for you, Danny! 41

Leon 38: Stay Healthy

A lot of kids like reading, watching TV and listening to music.That‟s great! We should exercise our minds.School is great for building our minds.But what about our bodies? There is an old saying, “a healthy body is a healthy mind.” It‟s true.Our bodies need lots of exercise and healthy food.Did you know? Running helps us remember information.Walking can improve our thinking skills.Exercise can keep our brains young.What about healthy food? Apples help our brains stay strong.Eggs and fish help our brains work faster.How can we stay healthy? There are many ways: Eat good food! Vegetable

meat Fish

fruit 42 Leon: 39 Danny’s Report

Danny is writing about sports day for the school newspaper.Sports day was a great succe this year! All the students and teachers from grades 7, 8 and 9 took part in the sports events.There were ten different events like running, long and high jumps, and ball throwing.Everyone worked very hard, and we all got some good exercise.There were many winners this year.Kim, from grade7, won first place in four events.Tony, form grade 8, won first place in two events and second place in three events.And jack, from grade 9, won first place in six events.Well done! I took part in a running event.I ran really hard.But my tail got in the way.So I didn‟t win first place.I only got third place.I felt a little sad, but then my teammates said, “good work, Danny.Winning is not everything.Having fun is important.” They were right! We all had lots of fun! Thank you everyone for a great sports day.Hope to see you all next year! 43 Leon 40: Move Your Body

Ben and Tim are good friends.They used to be very active together.They walked everywhere.They played games outdoors.But now Ben worries about Tim.Tim is not active any more.He has some bad habits.He watched too much TV and plays too many computer games.And he is putting on weight.Ben sends his friend a poem: You can be a couch potato and watch TV all day.But don‟t do that.There is another way! Move your body, get out and have fun.Fresh air, a bike ride, playing in the sun! Tim arrives home from school.There is a letter at his front door.It‟s Ben‟s poem! He reads the poem and he smiles.He writes a poem back to his friend: Your poem is funny, but I feel really lucky.With a true friend on my side, my world will be open wide.Let‟s meet tomorrow at his six o‟clock, and we can go for a good walk. 44 Leon 41: Were People Healthy Then?

It‟s Sunday morning.Dena Morin and her grand her grandfather, Mr.Morin, are fishing at the lake.Grandpa, did people go fishing a long time ago? Well Dena, we are first Nations people.Our came to Canada a long time ago.At that time, there were no supermarkets.Our people always went fishing and hunting for food.Were people healthy then? They were very healthy.They spent a lot of time outdoors.They worked hard.And they ate good, natural food like fish and vegetable.Was life hard at that time? It was hard.But people were healthy and happy.After a hard day of work, people rested and played together.In the evenings, they often made a big fire.Some people played the drums and others danced around the fire.They called this dance the pow-wow.We still have pow–wow dances today.I can‟t wait for the pow-wow next years

45 Leon 42: Know Yourself

Know yourself! This is the first step towards succe.But how? Try this! Take a piece of paper and write down a list of your habits.

I make two lists.There is a list of my good habits and a list of my bad habits.Good habits I usually get up early.I often wake up at 6:30 in the morning.I always eat breakfast.I brush my teeth three times a day.I drink eight glaed of water a day.Bad habits I don‟t get enough exercise.I spent too many hours watching TV.I don‟t always make my bed.I am not organized.And my room is always a me.Good habits lead the way to good health and succe! Look at your lists.Are there any bad habits? How can you change those habits? Develop your good habits and improve yourself! I tried it and it worked for me.Now I watch TV only a few times a week.I often play

46 basketball after school.And I keep my room clean and organized.I still don‟t always make my bad, but I‟m working on it. 47 Leon 43: Have a Good Summer!

Jenny and Danny took their final exams today.School is over.They are excited for the summer! How did you do on the English exam, Danny? Good… I hope.I‟m sure you did well.What are you going to do the summer? Do you have any plans? Yes, I have big plans.My uncle has a house near the lake.I‟m going to stay with his family for one month.Wow! That will be so fun.Yeah.We will do so many things.We make a long list.We will go swimming and play in the sun every day! We well eat ice cream and enjoy the hot weather.We will play basketball, tennis, volleyball and football.It‟s going to be a great summer.I‟m looking forward to it! How about you, jenny? What are you going to do? Well, I‟m going to…

Sorry, jenny.My mum is waiting for me.I have to go.Have a good summer! Ok, Danny.You too! 48 Leon 44: Volunteering in Summer

What will you do in the summer? Here is my plan.I will volunteer at ARG (Animal rights group).ARG takes care of pets without a home.Sometimes, people move away and they can‟t take their pets with them.Other times, people are too old or sick and they can‟t take care of their pets.Or sometimes, people are not nice to their pets.See this puppy? His name is rocket.His family left him alone in a field.Luckily, ARG found rocket and took him to the animal centre.ARG needs a lot of volunteer.I‟m going to volunteer four times a week.I will walk the dogs and I‟ll help with the other animals, too.I love animal. 49 Leon 45: Baseball Season

Hello! My name is Greg.This summer I am going to play baseball for the tigers.“Tigers” is the name of my team.Baseball is my favorite sport.My team and I will usually practice in the morning.And some evenings, we will play just for fun.On weekends, we will often play against other teams.My family and friends will come and watch me play.They‟ll all sing “take me out to the ball game” and they‟ll buy snacks and pop at the game.Baseball is a fun sport for everyone.I love baseball season! Take me out to the ball game.Take me out to the fair.Buy me some hot dogs and lots of snacks.I don‟t care if I ever get back.For it‟s root toot toot for the home team.If they don‟t win, it‟s a shame.For it‟s one, two, three and you‟re out.At the old ball game. 50

第12篇：冀教版七年级下学期英语教学计划

2011——2012学年度第二学期

七年级英语教学计划

前进九年制学校

本学期的教学重点是围绕教学大纲，努力调动学生的学习积极性，引导他们热爱学习，表现为他们自觉学习的行为，认真完成教学工作。现将本学期担任的初一英语课教学工作计划如下：

一、指导思想：

在本学期的英语教学中，坚持以下理念的应用：

1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神；

2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础；

3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异；

4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功；

5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。

二、学生基本情况分析：

本届七年级新生和以往初一学生相比在英语基础方面很薄弱，由于在小学英语课并未受到足够的重视，他们在写的技能方面基本上没有得到过训练，连音标和字母的拼读都没有掌握好。经过上学期努力，

年段学生的基础知识得到了加强，学习态度也有所好转。但是学生整体的惰性还是很强，自觉性很差。

另外，学生在情感态度，学习策略方面还存在诸多需要进一步解决的问题。例如：很多学生不能明确学习英语的目的，没有真正认识到学习英语的目的在于交流；大多数同学没有养成良好的学习习惯，不能做好课前预习课后复习，学习没有计划性和策略性；不善于发现和总结语言规律，不注意知识的巩固和积累。

三、奋斗目标：

钻研新课标，提高教学水平，真正做到教学相长，努力达到学校规定的教学指标。

四、具体措施：

1、抓好英语的常规教学，加强基础知识训练：①归纳学过的词组，方便学生记忆；②用词组造句和中译英训练；③组织学生结对子，一有空就你问我答，营造学习氛围，同时加强笔头的练习，使学生能熟能生巧；④把课文分段，按学习组为单位，进行朗读比赛，对学过的课文尽量做到人人会背，有些课文还要求学生会默写。

2、抓好语法学习：①掌握形容词、副词的比较级和最高级的构成和用法。区分单音节词和多音节词的构成，规则和不规则变化。②学习一般过去时态，重点突破不规则动词。③学习过去进行时与现在进行时的区别。④学习联系词的用法。

3、培养学生综合运用知识的能力：每个单元围绕着知识点反复训练，层层渗透。每个单元结束都进行测验，找出存在问题，及时补

漏补缺。

4、抓好阅读能力培养：每周规定学生阅读三篇短文，带着问题阅读，阅读之后要回答问题。

5、培养学生写作能力：逐步创作一些简笔画要学生写出他们的动作编成故事，逐步培养他们看图写话的能力。

6、在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

五、教学进度：

第一周：准备周（开学思想教育）

第二周—第三周：Unit 1 A Trip to Beijing

第四周—第五周：Unit 2 On the Train

第六周—第七周：Unit 3 Having Fun in Beijing

第八周—第九周：Unit 4 Did You Have a Nice Trip?

第十周—第十一周：Unit 5 Li Ming Goes to Canada！

第十二周：期中复习考试（Unit 1—Unit 4）

第十三周：五一节假期

第十四周—第十五周：Unit 6 Winter in Canada

第十六周—第十七周：Unit 7 Sports and Good Health

第十八周—第十九周：Unit 8 Li Ming Goes Home！

第二十周—第二十一周：期末复习、考试

第13篇：冀教版七年级英语(下)短语归纳

冀教版七年级英语（下）短语归纳 1.go on a trip to 到……去旅行(游) 2.the capital city of ……首都

3.too … to …

太……而不能…… 4.(be) far (away) from 离……远 5.from … to …

从……到…… 6.work hard 努力工作(学习) 7.in school = at school 在学校 8.go shopping (去)买东西 9.in restaurants 在餐馆 10.live in/on 住在……

11.come on one\'s trip to 来参加去…的旅游 12.talk to/with sb. 跟某人交谈

13.This is …(打电话时). 我是……。 14.be going (to) 打算；准备；计划 15.That\'s great/wonderful. 太好了。 16.leave for + 地点

动身去…… 17.on February first 在二月一日 18.arrive in + 大地方

抵达某地 19.arrive at + 小地点

到达某地 20.in the morning/afternoon 在上/下午 21.how far (某处)多远

22.how long (某物)多长；(时间)多久 23.take catch a bus 坐车；乘车 24.take a train 坐火车

25.stay with 和……呆在一起

26.have a week for 有一周(做某事) 27.want sth. 想要某物

28.want to do sth. 想要做某事

29.want sb.to do sth. 想要某人做某事 30.one/a pair of 一双/对/副…… 31.need more sth. 需要更多某物 32.All done! 全部做完! 33.at the train station 在火车站 34.Have a good trip! 旅途愉快! 35.walk to …

走路去……

36.there is/are …

(在某处)有…… 37.run to …

向……跑去 38.jump on 跳上去 39.be ready 准备好

40.be excited 很兴奋/激动 41.love doing sth. 喜爱做某事 42.Don\'t do sth.! 别做某事! 43.sit down 坐下 44.stand up 站起来 45.pack sth. 打包某物 46.write home 给家人写信

47.say sth.about …

说说有关……的情况 48.before a trip 旅行前

49.have fun (in) doing sth. 做某事很有趣 50.on February first in the morning = in the morning on February first = on the morning of February first

在二月一日的早上 Unit 2

1.look out of 往……外面看

2.a big brown cow 一头棕色的大奶牛 3.a tall green tree 一棵绿色大树

4.a little red school 一所红色的小学校 5.point at + 较近处

指着…… 6.point to + 较远处

指向…… 7.look at …

看…… 8.be quiet 安静

9.draw a picture 画画 10.read a book 看(读)书

11.sing a song (to sb.) (向着某人)唱歌 12.a bottle of 一瓶…… 13.on the train 在火车上

14.sit behind …

坐在……后面

15.Here is/are …. 这儿有(是)……。 16.the baby\'s mother 这个婴儿的妈妈 17.Li Ming\'s father 李明的父亲

18.the woman behind me 我后面的那位女士19.be tired 很累 20.be thirsty 口渴

21.Me, too. 我也是(做)。 22.would like sth. 想要某物

23.would like to do sth. 想要做某事

24.would like sb.to do sth. 想要某人做某事 25.in one\'s stomach 在某人的肚子里 26.too hot to drink 太热而不能喝 27.a little food to eat 可吃的一点食物 28.a snack 快餐

= fast food = take-away food 29.have some soup 喝(些)汤 30.read the newspaper 看报 31.play cards 打扑克

32.with his friends 和他的朋友一起 33.have fun 玩得开心

= have a good/great/nice/wonderful time = enjoy oneself (某人自己) 34.play with sb. 和某人一起玩 35.play with sth. 玩弄某物 36.arrive in Beijing 到达北京 = get to Beijing

37.many men/women 许多男/女人

38.people in the train station 火车站里的人 39.the Beijing Train Station

北京火车站 40.find sb.doing sth. 发现某人在做某事 41.buy tickets 买票

42.Good work! = Well done! 干得好! Unit 3

1.a walk in Beijing 在北京散步 2.take a taxi to 打的/坐出租车去… 3.there are many people 有很多人 4.on/in the street 在街上

5.walk quickly/slowly 走路很快/慢 6.too many + 复数名词

太多的…… 7.feel scared

觉得害怕 8.Here I come! 我来了! 9.see sb.playing 看见某人在玩 10.laugh loudly 大声笑

11.fly kites quietly 静悄悄地放风筝 12.fly a kite 放风筝

13.hurt one\'s arm 伤着胳膊 14.Don\'t worry. 别着急(担心)。

15.put a bandage on 在……上绑绷带 16.put film in 把胶卷放进…… 17.take a picture 照相

18.help sb.do sth. 帮助某人做某事 19.Are you okay? 你还好吗？ = Are you all right? 20.sit down 坐下

21.in front of 在……(外部)前面 22.in the front of 在……(内部)前面 23.Be careful! 当心!/注意! = Look out! = Take care! 24.Jenny\'s and Danny\'s postcards/pictures 珍妮和丹尼(分别所有)的贺卡/ 照片 25.a shop in the hotel 酒店里的一个商店 26.send … to …

把……寄给…… 27.a picture of …

……的照片 28.on the left/right 在左/右边 29.put the addre 写地址 30.put the stamp 贴邮票 31.in the corner 在角落 32.write to sb. 给某人写信 = write a letter to sb.33.be bigger than 比……大 34.put sth.in 把某物放进…… 35.at the post office 在邮局 36.how much 多少(钱) 37.a friend in Canada 在加拿大的朋友 38.send an e-mail 发电子邮件

39.go straight down 沿着……一直走 40.Here it is! 就在这儿! 41.How\'s the weather … ？ ……天气怎样? = What\'s the weather like …?

42.go/come home to 回到……的家中 43.be ready for sth. 为某事做好准备 44.forget sth. 忘记某物

45.at the top/bottom 在顶/底部 Unit 4 1.shopping in Beijing 在北京购物 2.buy sth.for sb.给某人买某物 = buy sb.sth.3.walk there 走路到那里

4.sit and sit 坐呀坐呀(一直坐)

5.What time is it? (现在)几点了？ = What\'s the time?

6.Here is Danny! 丹尼来了!

7.What happened (to …)？ (……)怎么啦？ 8.every day (everyday) 每天 (每天的 adj.) 9.arrive home from 从……回到家 10.have a nice trip 旅途愉快 = have a good/great/wonderful trip 11.last week/month 上周(星期) / 月 12.the first/second day 第一 / 二天 13.show sth.to sb.给某人看某物 14.gifts for everyone 给大家的礼物 15.put (it, them) on 穿上 (它，它们) 16.too + adj.+ for sb.对某人太…… 17.sth.from China 来自中国的某物 18.like sth.喜欢某物

19.like to do sth.喜欢做某事(偶然) 20.like doing sth.喜欢做某事(习惯) Unit 5

1.making breakfast 做早饭

2.It\'s time for sth. 该做某事了。 = It\'s time to do sth.

3.It\'s time for sb.to do sth. 该某人做某事了。4.on the school bus 在校车上 5.forget sth. 忘记某物

6.forget to do sth. 忘记去做某事(没未做) 7.forget doing sth. 忘记做过某事(已经做了) 8.the bus stop 公共汽车站 9.bus driver 公共汽车司机

10.go to school by bus 坐公交车上学 = go to school on a / the bus = take a / the bus to school

11.live too far from …

住得离……太远 12.This is sb. 这位是……。

13.be (am, is, are) from

来自…… = come from

是……人

14.the name of the city 城市名字(称)

15.speak English / Chinese 讲英语/汉语 16.how old 几岁了

17.… years old ……岁了 18.be the same 一个样，相同

19.What\'s for + 三餐? 三餐吃什么？ 20.watch TV / a game 看电视/比赛 21.sit in a / the chair 坐在(扶手)椅子上 22.sit on the couch 坐在沙发上 23.read the newspaper 看报 24.in the corner 在角落 25.in the living room 在客厅 26.teach a leon 上课 27.get to work 开始工作

28.What\'s the temperature …? ……气温多少度？

29.get bigger 变得更大

30.with an s 加有 s 31.at the end (of) 在(……的)末尾 32.make a chart 绘制图表

33.do one\'s homework 做家庭作业 34.help sb. 帮助某人

35.help sb.to do sth. 帮助某人做某事 = help sb.do sth.= help sb.with sth.36.put a circle for 画个圆代替…… 37.never do sth. 从来不做某事 38.brush one\'s teeth 刷牙

39.have lunch / supper 吃午饭/晚饭

40.What else …? ……其他东西/事情？ = What other things …? 41.be gone 消失了

42.say good-bye to 向……道别 43.say hello to 向……问候/好 Unit 6 1.a cold, snowy day 一个寒冷的雪天 2.get ready for sth. 准备做某事 3.winter jacket 棉夹克

4.What a cold, snowy day! 多冷的一个雪天啊!(感叹句) 5.in winter / fall 在冬天/秋天 6.on the ice / snow 在冰/雪上 7.teach sb. 教某人

8.teach sb.sth. 教某人某事

9.teach sb.to do sth. 教某人做某事 10.winter fun 冬天的游戏/娱乐 11.make a snowman 堆雪人

12.another snowman (任意)另一个雪人 13.some little rocks 一些小石子 14.go inside 进去

15.… be coming! ……来了! 16.a Western holiday 一个西方的节日 17.on a / the holiday

在节日/ 假期 18.Santa Claus

圣诞老人 = Father Claus = Father Christmas 19.in red ( clothes ) 穿着红色衣服 20.on / at Christmas 在圣诞节

21.invite sb.to …

邀请某人到…… 22.come for Christmas 来过圣诞节 23.bring sth.for sb. 为某人带来某物 24.Merry Christmas! 圣诞快乐! 25.do sth.together 一起做某事 26.Christmas cards 圣诞贺卡

27.the bus stop (station) 公共汽车站

28.the card with sb.(sth.) (印)有某人(某物)的卡片

29.Jenny\'s family 珍妮的家庭(家人) 30.put up 举起; 挂起; 装点… 31.something special 特别的东西 32.ask quietly 悄悄地问

33.whisper to sb. 对某人耳语 = say in a low voice

34.something Chinese 中国的物品 35.There is + 单数名词 + 介词短语 .There are + 复数名词 + 介词短语 .在某地 / 某时有某物 / 人。 36.warm and rainy 温暖而多雨

37.What a hot, sunny day! 多么酷热的艳阳天啊! 38.blow sth.off …

把某物从……吹落 39.ski on the snow 在雪上滑雪 40.walk in the rain 在雨中行走 41.swim in the sea 在海里游泳 42.play in the wind 在风中玩耍

43.one\'s favourite season 某人最喜爱的季节 Unit 7

1.at the (sports) store 在(体育用品)商店 2.a ping-pong ball 一个乒乓球

3.this one (pron.) 这一个(只；……) 4.How much is + 单数名词 (代词) ？ How much are + 复数名词 (代词) ？ ……多少钱？(问价钱)

5.… dollar(s) for sth. 买某物……元 6.at the gym 在体育馆

7.like … very much 非常喜欢…… like … better 较喜欢…… like … best 最喜欢……

8.my favourite (n.) 我最喜欢的人/物 9.throw /catch the basketball 扔/接篮球 10.throw the basketball at the net 投篮 = put the basketball in the net

11.hit the ping-pong ball with the paddle 用乒乓球拍拍球

12.hit the ball to sb. 将球拍向某人

13.teach each other sth. (两人)互教做某事 14.a good basketball player 一位优秀篮球运动员

15.play basketball with a ping-pong ball 用乒乓球当作篮球来打

16.a basketball game 一场篮球赛 17.the other team (两队中的) 另一队 18.A play B A与B比赛 = A play against B = A VS B

19.have fun doing sth. 做某事很有乐趣 20.yell for sb. 为某人加油/助威 21.be good for sb. 对某人有好处/益 be bad for sb. 对某人有害处 22.make a chart 做个图表

23.how often 多长时间……一次…… 24.once a day 每天一次 twice a week 每周两次

three times a month 每月三次 several times 几次 many times

许多次

25.wake up 醒来；叫醒 26.more (le) than 多(少)于 27.never do sth. 从来不做某事

28.for strong bones / muscles 为了结实的骨骼/肌肉

29.make one\'s body healthy and strong 使某人的身体健康和强壮

30.Sixty minutes makes an hour. 六十分钟组成一小时。

31.need to get more exercise 需要得到更多的锻炼

32.on TV 从(通过)电视上

33.have to = must 得；不得不；必须 34.listen to sb.

听某人讲(话) 35.from Monday to Friday 从周一到周五 Unit 8 1.enjoy sth. 喜爱某物 (事) enjoy oneself 玩得开心; 过得愉快 enjoy doing sth. 喜爱做某事

2.at the swimming pool 在游泳池(整个范围) in the swimming pool 在游泳池里(水里) 3.swim to …

向……游去 4.run with the kite 牵着风筝跑 5.make it fly 让它飞起来 6.run into a tree 撞上树

7.(lie) on the gra (躺)在草地上 8.look like 看起来像

9.drive one\'s car to …

开车去…… = drive to …

10.pick the flowers 摘花 11.on the beach 在沙滩上 12.in the ocean 在海洋里 13.the summer holiday 暑假 14.the winter holiday 寒假 15.visit sb. 看望某人

16.next week / year 下周 / 明年

17.some books about 一些关于……的书 18.a souvenir of China 中国的纪念品 19.at the door 在门口

20.how long (时间, 物体)多长

第14篇：冀教版英语七年级上册单词表unit3

Unit 3

身体长的头发头眼睛嘴耳朵读感冒；冷；冷的在何处；在哪里头痛英语非常；很拿阿嚏放；放置（表示停顿）；健康的；气轻敲；轻踏色好的转动；转弯药高的；有……高停留；留下；呆一段时间

鼻子

脸；面向；朝向矮的；短的have的第三人称单数形式琳达（人名）金色（的）；浅黄色（的）高兴的悲伤的脖子，颈胳膊腿胃手脚感觉今天累的拍真的；是吗要；想要跺；踏挥手；摆手摇；抖动玩左边（的）在里面；在……里在外面；在……外面；出局；出界

米中等的；中间的在；在……上我们不同的（do的第三人称单数）美丽的漂亮的；好看的酷的；凉爽的逗人喜爱的，漂亮的加拿大（地名）有趣的；可笑的；精致的有趣的；可笑的中国（地名）眼镜疼痛；伤害那些脚趾肩膀肘膝盖手指（大拇指除外）问题切；割严重的；坏的医生牙痛病的；生病的肚子痛；胃痛在家；回家；家

休息

第15篇：冀教版英语七年级上册单词表unit1

Unit 1 男孩二三四可以在这儿受欢迎的课，功课教师喂（表示问候）学生是吉姆名字他的是学校我这,这个五我的她的；她（宾格）当然

詹妮什么你的，你们的丹尼喂（表示问候等）怎么样；多少；多么是你，你们令人愉快的；好的（不定式符号）向；往；给；达结识；遇见健康的；好的；美的和也；太；非常谢谢让我们唱歌一个/件歌曲乔(人名)休(人名)告诉;讲诉我(宾格)朋友她他女孩

教室

实验室图书馆那，那个去；离去这（那）个；这（那）些字母练习好的早晨；上午铅笔黑板钢笔铅笔盒水彩笔尺；直尺橡皮擦；黑板擦椅子桌子是；是的它不；不是不许多的书(助动词，无词义)做；完成有零一

再见

再见站立向上坐向下；沿着出示；显示；指引看伸出跳

指；指向

第16篇：冀教版小学英语第六册教案

冀教版小学英语第六册 Leon 1

Look! 2 Leon 2 What Are you doing ? 5 Leon3 Who Is singing? 9 Leon 4 Who Is Thirsty 13 Leon 5 Who Is Hungry? 17 Leon6 What Are They Doing？ 20 Leon 7:Are You Ready For a Song? 23 Leon 8 Again, Please 27 Leon 9: Arriving in Beijing 30 Leon 10 A Walk in Beijing 32 Leon 11: Tian‘anmen Square 37 Leon12：The Palace Museum 40 Leon13: Taking Pictures 44 Leon14 ：Shopping in Beijing 46 Leon 15: Are You Ready for a song ? 49 Leon16 Again, please.51 Leon 17 Let‘s buy postcards! 54 Leon 18 :Jenny Writes a Postcard 57 Leon 19 Li Ming‘s Letter 60 Leon 20

At the post office 62 Leon 21 Writing the Addre 65 Leon21:Writing the Addre 67 Leon 22 : Sending an E-mail 68 Leon 23 Are you ready for a song ? 70 LESSON 24：AGAIN，PLEASE！ 73 Leon 25：Li Ming Goes Home 75 第26课：Jenny回家 78 Leon 27

Danny Goes to School 81 Leon28 :Jenny‘s and Danny‘s Pictures 83 Leon 29 : Gifts for Everyone 86 Leon 30：A letter from Li Ming 88 leon 31.Are You Ready for a Quiz ? 90 Leon 31: Are you ready for a quiz? 92 Leon :32

Again，Please！ 92

Leon 1

Look! 教学目标：

1． 知识目标：要求学生掌握四会单词：look, see, point 体会表演looking, seeing, pointing；巩固食物名称单词和动物单词；

2． 能力目标：能灵活使用句子 I see ___________.能运用所学的英语词汇和句式解决描述观察中所看到的东西。

3． 情感目标：培养学生观察能力，提高学生对事物的探究兴趣。 教学重、难点：

要求四会的单词look, see, point和要求掌握的句式I see ___________.。 教具、学具准备： 1． 单词卡片。 2． 录音机或课件。 教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review 1.

做游戏：“Colour point”

教师提前在黑板上放上不同颜色的纸，指明几个学生到前面做游戏，其他学生一起说歌谣，指颜色。

(设计意图：这个环节的设置既复习了一些颜色，又引出了本课中提到的颜色。) 2.

做游戏“Name it”

教师说出颜色名称和表示词汇的类别，如Rde:food,这时学生必须写下他们所能想起来的红色的食品。（如：肉，苹果，草莓）谁写的最多就算赢。 教师拿出准备好的一些食物，说：“I’m hungry.I want to eat some bread.I like to eat some bread.What do you like to eat?” “I like to eat____.”复习表示实物名称的词汇。利用单词卡片What’s your favourite food? My favourite food is ____.也可用此句型复习动物词汇。

(设计意图：这个环节的设置用来复习以前学过的食物词汇和动物词汇，同时复习What’s your favourite ____?这个句式。)

3.教师指着教室中的某个物品，说Look, I see _______. (引出新概念。) New Concepts

1． 本课的新概念look, see, point学生曾多次接触，比较熟悉，让其表演looking, seeing, pointing.教师要向学生说明look和point的区别，look表示看的动作，see表示看见，是看的结果。让学生多运用这些单词说句子。

2． 学生熟悉句式后，再利用实物和单词卡片学习。 让学生看卡片，练习句型，Look! I see a _______.

3． 运用实物进行练习。

让学生向周围或窗外看，练习句型Look! I see a _______. ¬¬¬¬¬¬_______is piointing.4． 两人一组做问答练习。 What do you see? Look! I see ________.

(设计意图：利用已有知识引出新知识，减小教学的难度，同时可以放手让学生自己说出自己观察到的，教师加以指导就可以了，通过练习巩固新知。) 5． 听录音两遍，注意语音语调。

第一遍听后回答问题，What does Jenny/ Danny/ LiMing see? 第二遍跟读，让学生足以模仿录音中的语调。 6.两人一组自编对话。（学生自创情景，火车上，飞机上，操场上，教室里„„）

教师先找一个口语较好的学生作一下示范。然后让学生分组练习，鼓励学生多说些知道的句子。如：

Hello! How are you? How do you feel? Are you hungry? / thirsty? (出示一幅图画) What do you see? 7.利用实物或单词卡片汇报演出。

（设计意图：锻炼学生自己的创造性，可以结合以前学过的句型和词汇，并利表演出来，运用于实际生活中。） Cla Closing Activity book 板书设计： Leon 1 Look!

look,

see,

point looking,

seeing,

pointing

Look! I see a ___________.课后反思：

课后习题：

一． 找出不同类的一个单词。

(

)1.chicken

dumplings noodles

school (

)2.cow

rice

sheep

goat (

)3. bus

train

airplane

kite (

)4. fruit

vegetable

bicycle

meat 二． 连词成句

see

a

I

cow

brown

_____________________________________ school

red

see

I

a

small ______________________________________ Leon 2 What Are you doing ? 单位：双桥教育总校

姓名：徐凯

联系电话：0315-3336795 教学目标：

1.

要求学生掌握四会单词：行为动词draw

sleep 和形容词quiet loud 2. 理解并能够运用短语：

drawing a picture

looking out the window

singing a song

sleeping

reading a book 3. 句型what are

you doing ? I am ___ing.

What is he (she) doing? He (She) is ____ing .

教学重点：本课的四会单词：

draw

sleep

quiet loud 教学难点：本课的难点在于对课文的理解和句型的灵活运用。 教学用具：录音机、教学卡片、实物等。 教学过程：

一、Cla opening and review(复习行为动词)

1.

唱歌曲：“I am Drawing”找一名唱的好的学生到前面做动作领唱。

2.

学生已学过，walk run jump sit stand 这几个行为动词，教师可以用自问自答的形势，借助体态语言说出下面的话

What am I doing?

---I am

standing .

What are you doing? ---you are sitting .What am I doing?

---I am walking .What am I doing?

---I am seeing.What am I doing ?

---I am pointing.(设计意图

标提倡“以旧引新”,在这个环节中，教师自己做动作，让学生借助形体语言理解句子，并复习学过的行为动词，为这一课的教学作好铺垫)

二、Key concepts(新授)

1．学习单词：draw, sleep

继续上一环节的动作，What am I doing ?

---I am drawing.让学生猜教师在做什么。What am I doing ?

---I am sleeping.利用单词卡片学习这两个词汇，并练习拼读、造句。

2.给全班发指令，使用新旧词汇，特别注意draw和sleep，开始时，教师边发指令，边做动作，然后只发指令。

Read a book!

Draw a picture! Sing a song!

Go to sleep! „„

叫一名正在做动作的学生，提问并出示句子 What are you doing? I am _____ing. 两人一组做动作练习以上句型。

指名到前面表演并练习对话。 3.学习单词 quiet, loud

When I am drawing, I am quiet.

（这时把食指贴在嘴唇上作“别出声”状，重复quiet, quiet） But when I am singing ,I am loud。

（这时也可以亮一嗓子，唱两句歌，也可以提示学生这两个词是反义词这样学生就很容易理解这两个词了。并板书单词）

利用卡片学习新词，提示学生这是一对反义词。

结合前面学过的句型练习这两个词，可以教师发指令，学生将这个词用动作或声音演示出来。或老师演示，学生猜词。然后作对话练习What are you doing? I am _____ing.

4.课文阅读 （1）（听第一部分录音）回答问题：In the morning. Who is quiet? Who is loud?

What is Jenny /Danny/ LiMing doing?

（2）跟读课文加深理解。学生提出不懂的地方，全班学生一起讨论解决。

（3）分角色大声朗读。

（文章第二部分“In the afternoon”教法基本同上）

注意理解now这个词的意思。让学生猜测是什么意思。教师指正。

设计意图：新课程提倡“任务型教学”和“目标性听、读课文”由开始设置疑问到学生在听课文的过程中有重点的有目的地理解课文，再到听完课文后回答问题，学生经历了从带着兴趣好奇心想去了解课文到与课文的完全接触和初步理解，最后终于解决疑问找到答案的探究发现过程。 5.表演课文对话，可以让学生对照课本进行表演。给学生一些时间进行表演前的准备。

三、Cla Closing Activity book 板书设计：

Leon 2 What Are you doing?

draw

drawing a picture point

quiet

singing a song sleep

loud

reading a book

see

looking out the window sleeping 课后反思：

课后习题：

1.

把单词补充完整，并连线。

q _ i _ t

睡觉

l_ _ d

安静的 s l _ _ p

画画 d r _ w

看见 s _ _

吵闹的 p _ _ n t

指 2.拓展练习

让学生小组合作，创设一个任意情景，要求利用 quiet, loud, sleep, draw, 然后进行表演。 Leon3 Who Is singing? 单位：双桥教育总校

姓名：徐凯

联系电话：0315-3336795 教学目标：

A.

知识目标：对本课单词baby man woman; 句型Who is this? This is a man.做到听说读写四会。

能听懂说出认读单词their 能够理解并表演第二部分：Who is singing? B.能力目标：通过学习本课，能掌握相关的词汇；用简单的语言描述人物，描述人物的活动，表达自己的感受；用现在进行时描述。

C.情感目标：通过和Li Ming, Jenny, Danny在火车上的活动，增强学生观察力，增加生活情趣，更加热爱生活。

教学重点：本课的四会单词： man, woman, baby

句型：Who is ___? It’s ____.教学难点：本课的难点在于对课文的理解和句型的灵活运用。 教学用具：录音机、教学卡片、实物等。

教学设计：

Cla Opening and Review 1.用Simon Says的游戏复习所学动词或动词短语，也可以猜词。（看卡片做动作）

（教学意图：也可利用其它游戏或歌曲复习所学动词或动词短语，主要是与前一节课衔接。）

New Concepts 1.出示图片，教授单词 man woman baby 教师示范利用图片描述。（可以给他们起名字） This is Tim.

He is a father.How old is he?

He is ____ years old. He is a man.在让学生依例描述图片，也可以手写。 让学生描述woman 和baby.（教学意图：根据第一部分教学内容，充分利用直观教具和多媒体创造各种语言情景，让学生利用各种感观参与英语学习的实践活动，加快对语言材料的吸收和运用，提高学生运用语言的能力。）通过游戏巩固新词。

可以教师描述，让学生猜词。如：He is a father.How old is he?

He is ____ years old. He is a „„ 。

也可以让学生做动作表演，其他学生猜词。 2.教师领读课文第一部分。

给学生一些卡片，让学生模仿课文进行描述。

然后让学生模仿Li Ming 描述自己的家庭。可以先让学生画一画自己的家庭，然后再介绍。教师最好给一个示范。

（教学意图：学生利用自己家庭的实际情况描述，使英语更贴近生活，更便于学生之间运用。） 3.复习句型：She/He is ___ing.创设情景，复习正在进行时。板书学生提出的动词短语，加上ing并朗读。

（增加本课需要掌握的动词短语：sing cry talk sleep） 4.变换问题： What is he doing? What is she doing? What are they doing? 引导学生做出正确回答。

5.小组合作学习，操练句型。

可以四至五人一组，两个学生对话练习，其他学生表演动作。综合练习所学的语言。 （设计意图：合作操练以巩固知识为主，也可让学生拓展练习。）

6.自读课文，说说了解到了哪些信息。

7.回答问题：Who is singing?

Who is crying?

Who is talking?

Who is sleep?

8.小组合作读课文，提出不懂的地方，互相帮助解决。

（教学意图：锻炼学生阅读能力，使学生学会用多种学习方式学习，增强学习策略方式。）

9.分角色朗读课文。情景表演。可以让学生借助课本进行对话表演。 （教学意图：根据学生能力，可进行情景小表演，分组或其他形式。） Cla Closing Activity book 课后反思：

板书设计：

Leon3

Who is Singing?

man

woman

baby

singing

crying Who is ___? It‘s ____.

talking

sleeping 课后习题：

1.

填入所缺字母。

m _ n

b _ b _

w _ m _ n

s _ n g

c r _

t _ l k

s l _ _ p

2.画一张自己家庭的全家像，给每个人分别标上 mam, womam, baby, girl, boy.并写出描述家庭关系的单词（mother, father, son, cousin） Leon 4 Who Is Thirsty Ⅰ.教学目标： 1.知识与技能： 掌握词汇quick now 理解并灵活运用下列句型 :Who is_____? What would you like to drink?

Would you like ______? Yes, please./No,thanks.2.过程与方法: 采用情景交际法和分组对话表演法 3.情感态度教育: 学会与他人合作和关心他人 Ⅱ.教学重点、难点: 灵活运用句型Who is_____? What would you like to drink?

Would you like ______? Yes, please./ No, thanks.Ⅲ.教具学具准备 1.

录音机和磁带

2.

水,一大杯茶,一杯牛奶,一瓶汽水和若干一次性纸杯 Ⅳ.教学过程

Step1.Greetings and review 以教室里同学们的活动为主要情境,复习操练Who is ____?,形成师生互动,生生互动.(设计意图: 简单的问候以及小对话的操练,在上课开始就给孩子们营造一种轻松愉快的课堂氛围,增进师生之间的情感交流,使学生进入一种自然而真实的语言状态.) Step2.New concepts 1.

T: (作干渴状) Well, I am very thirsty now.I would like to drink something.Look!

There are so many drinks here: water, tea, milk and pop.(像变魔术一样拿出各种饮料并一一展示给学生) But what would I like to drink? Would I like some pop? No! Would I like some milk? No.Or some tea? No.Some water? Yes.I would like some water(倒一些水,然后喝了).Wow, so good!

(设计意图: 教师投入的,甚至夸张的表演及意想不到的实物展示一下子吸引了孩子们的注意力, 他们会目不转睛地观看和倾听老师的表演, 甚至会幻想如果让自己选择, 他会喜欢喝哪一种饮料.此时, 他们进入了一种自然真实的语言环境.) 2.T: Who is thirsty too now? (重复Who is thirsty? 边说边写在黑板的正上方 ) S1: I am.

S2: I am thirsty, too.T: Would you like some sth to drink? S1: Yes.T: What would you like to drink?(板书) (To S1): Would you like some tea? (板书) S1: Yes, please.T: Here you are.(倒一些茶给他) (To S2:) Would you like some tea? S2: No.

T: Would you like some milk? S2: No.

T: What would you like? S2: Some pop, please.

T: Ok.Here it is! (倒一些汽水给他)

(设计意图:创设一种开放, 和谐, 积极互动的语言活动氛围, 努力产生一种融入式的真实语言环境.让学生体验用英语做事的快乐和自豪感.从而自然地不知不觉地沉浸其中, 增强语感, 同时也渗透了本节课的重点内容) 3.Listening

Li Ming, Mrs.LI, Danny and Jenny are on their trip to Beijing.They‘re on the train.What are they doing? Are they thirsty? Listen to the tape and let‘s see who is thirsty.(

(设计意图: 听录音为学生提供地道的语言材料和标准的语音语调, 有助于学生正确模仿, 强化记忆, 以便形成良好的语言素质, 同时, 有了前面的师生的对话的铺垫, 这一环节帮助学生更好的理解课文)

(Ss answer the question: ―Who is thirsty?) 4.Reading Comprehension

Read the text aloud and find out : “What would Danny, Jenny and Li Ming like to drink?” (板书) (Ss answer the questions)

乘胜追击, 进一步检查学生对课文的理解, 提出问题.

Why are Jenny and Li Ming slow? Their tea is too hot to drink.(板书) Is Danny slow, too? No, he is quick.(板书)

(设计意图:通过阶梯性目标性阅读, 让学生在逐步加深对文章整体理解的同时, 有重点地去捕捉有效信息, 提高了学生的阅读理解能力, 从师生对话到听课文录音再到此时的大声朗读课文, 难点句型也不在是难点, 在不知不觉中被易化了.) Step 3: Practice

1.Read the text in group of five and role-play it.(At least two groups)

2.

Suppose you and your friends are at a restaurant, ordering.Make up a dialogue.3.

Act out the dialogue.(At least two groups)

(设计意图:分角色朗读, 设定情景编对话及对话表演, 这一系列的操练活动, 始终以学生为主体, 他们始终是课堂的主人, 老师只是一个引导者, 一个助手, 或者说一个导演, 学生们在朗读中学习并收集材料, 在既定情景中自由创作.在对话表演中体验共同创作的快乐, 真正起到了 “用中学, 学后用” 和 “乐中学, 学中乐” 的绝佳教学效果.) Step 4: Homework

1.

Get ready for the dialogue-acting.2.

Do the exercises in the Activity-book.Ⅴ.板书设计:

Leon4 Who Is Thirsty?

1.Who is thirsty?

What would you like to drink?

Li Ming, Jenny and Danny

Would you like …? 2.What would Li Ming

A cup of tea.Jenny

like to drink? Some tea, too Danny

Some pop.3.Why are Jenny and Danny slow? Their tea is too hot to drink.3.

Is Danny slow too?

No.Danny is quick.课后反思：

Leon 5 Who Is Hungry? Ⅰ.教学目标： 1.知识与技能：

理解并灵活运用下列句型 :Who is hungry? What would you like to eat?

Would you like some______? Yes, please./No,thanks.

May I have some…? 2.过程与方法: 情景交流及对话表演

3.情感态度教育: 学会与他人合作和关心他人 Ⅱ.教学重点、难点: Who is hungry? What would you like to eat?

Would you like some______? Yes, please./No,thanks.

May I have some…? Ⅲ.教具学具准备 录音机和磁带

一些袋装小吃和一些图片 Ⅳ.教学过程

Step1.Greetings and review (表演上节课布置的情景对话) Step2.Leading-in and listening T: When you are thirsty, you drink.But when you are hungry, what do you do? Yes, when you are hungry, you eat.Then what do we eat every day? Ss: Rice, dumplings, noodles, apple, hamburgers…

T: Yes, you are right.For breakfast, lunch, or supper, we have rice, dumplings,noodles, and many other kinds of food.But do you like to eat snacks? What‘s a snack? Look, these are snacks.(show them to the cla).出示单词卡片，教学生认读这个词。引导学生利用新词说句子。如I like / don’t like snakes.

师：Do you like them? Do you think Danny, Li Ming and Jenny like them? Ok, let’s listen to the tape.( Play the tape and Ss answer the question： Do you think Danny, Li Ming and Jenny like them?) Step3.Reading 1.Read the text and answer the question “What would Jenny, Li Ming and Danny like to eat on the train?‖ ( Write the question on the blackboard)

--( Ss read the text and answer the questions)

鼓励学生提出更多的问题，并让其他学生回答。 2.Read the text after the teacher to understand it better.

3.

Read the text aloud in groups and try to make it into a dialogue.Step4.Optional- practice

Ss can read the text in groups or practise the dialogue in groups 找表演好的小组到前面进行表演。 Step5.Homework

1.

Collect as many words about food as you can.2.

Go on with the dialogue about the text.3.

Do the exercises in the Activity Book.Ⅴ.板书设计

Leon5 Who Is Hungry?

Do Jenny, Li Ming and Danny like a snack?

What would Jenny

Li Ming like to eat on the train?

Danny 课后反思：

Leon6 What Are They Doing？ Ⅰ.教学目标： 1.知识与技能：

理解并灵活运用下列句型 : What is __ doing? -- He/She is __ing „

What are you doing? -- I‘m __ing …

What are they doing? – They‘re __ing … 2.过程与方法: 情景交流及对话表演

3.情感态度教育: 学会细心观察,与他人合作和关心他人.Ⅱ.教学重难点:

理解课文并能够熟练使用下面的句型 What is __ doing? -- He/She is __ing …

What are you doing? -- I‘m __ing …

What are they doing? – They‘re __ing … Ⅲ.教具学具准备

录音机和磁带,多媒体课件 Ⅳ.教学过程

Step1.Greetings and review

可以做动作，让学生猜词语，如hungry, thirsty, sleep,draw 等。然后出示卡片，复习这些词。Step2.Leading-in and listen

Show some pictures to the cla by ppt.(幻灯片)and present the sentences:

What is he doing? He is running./ What is she doing? She is singing./ What are they doing? They‘re playing.

(To the cla) What are you doing? C: We‘re looking and listening.

T: Good! Then do you know ― What are Jenny,Li Ming and Danny doing on the train?‖ What are they doing?

( Write the question on the blackboard)领学生多读几遍。

Ok, let‘s listen and find the answer.What are Jenny,Li Ming and Danny doing on the train?‖

播放录音，第一遍听，第二遍跟读，之后让学生回答问题。What are Jenny,Li Ming and Danny doing on the train?”

Step3. Reading comprehension Read the text and fill the chart Who

What is he/she doing? The baby The woman The three men Danny

检查学生的完成情况，进行指导。 Step4.Practice Do “ask and answer” in pairs like this:（利用书中的图画。） What‘s the baby doing? – He is___ing.„

教师先与一名学生示范一组，然后再让学生联系。 Step5: Homework 画一幅人物图，并写出句子What’s the ____ doing? – He/She is___ing.Ⅴ.板书设计

Leon6 What are they doing? What is __ doing? -- He/She is __ing …

What are you doing? -- I‘m __ing …/ We‘re __ing …

What are they doing? – They‘re __ing … 课后反思：

Leon 7:Are You Ready For a Song?

一、教学目标：

知识目标：

1、完成本正课的句型问答，并通过句型练习，能正确地运用句型：Can you_____?及其答语，描述能在火车上做什么。

2、复习现在进行时并学习本课的歌曲。

3、完成本单元的故事和活动手册。

4、复习单词∶loud,quiet 能力目标：

1、利用所学的知识进行情景交际联系。

2、通过所学歌曲，进一步加深对现在进行时的认识。情感目标：

通过学习，培养学生对大自然的热爱及合作意识。

二、教学重点：

1、能正确运用单词“loud,quiet 和句型“Can you____?”及其答语。

2、完成本单元的故事和活动手册。

3、复习现在进行时。

4、利用所学进行情景交际练习。

三、教学难点：

利用所学进行情景交际练习。故事的学习。

四、教具、学具准备： 录音机（磁带）或光盘， 五：教学过程：

1、Greeting

T: Hello! Boys and girls.How are you today? Ss: I‘m fine.

T: How‘s the weather today? Ss: The weather/It‘s ___, T: How do you go to school?

S: I walk to go to school./I go to school by bus.T: What can you see on a bus? T: I see___.

T:What can you do on a bus? Ss: I can ___.

T:How do you go to Beijing?

Ss: I go to Beijing by bus/train/car.T: What can you do on a train? Ss: I can ___.

T: Can you look out of the window? Can you read a picture?

(让学生在不知不觉中完成了本课的一部分学习任务，调动了学生的学习积极性)

2、Let’s sing a song

T: Today, Danny is on the train, too.What happened? Let‘s listen to the song.和学生一起朗读歌词，解答学生不懂的词语或句子。 按节奏朗读歌词。达到熟练。

(打开书或看光盘，学习本课的歌曲，教师可利用手势语或体态语言帮助学生理解本课的歌词，边唱边做动作，这样也可激发学生的学习兴趣)

3、Story Book

T: Today Baby Becky doesn‘t go to school.He goes for a walk with her mother.What can do? Let‘s look at the story. 播放故事录音，让学生边看书边听。勾出自己不懂的地方。

然后将学生分成小组，互相帮助解决勾出的问题，小组内解决不了的，全班同学一起解决，教师指导。

再次听故事，跟读，并思考老师提出的问题。What can Baby Becky do?

回答老师的问题。

师生讨论故事，可以互相提问，也可以自由讨论。老师可以给出一些有关的问题，如：Do you like Baby Becky？why or why not? 表演故事。将学生分成小组，组内的学生分别扮演不同的角色，表演这个故事。 小组到前面展示对话表演。

(对于本课的故事教学，教师主要培养学生的合作意识，带动那些不积极参与的学生。)

4、Cla closing Activity Book

（检查本课所学知识的掌握情况，对于所遇到的问题及时解决） 板书设计：

Leon 7: Are You Ready for a Song?

What can you see on a bus? I can see___.

What can you do on a bus? I can ___.

What can you do on a train? I can___.

Can you look out of the window? Yes, I can.

Can you Read a picture? No, I can read a book.课后反思：

Leon 8 Again, Please

一、教学目标： 知识目标：

1、掌握本单元的四会单词和句型“Who is ____? It’s ___.

2、能流利地用英语表达你在火车上所看到的、听到的和所能做的事情。

3、能利用所学进行情景交际练习。能力目标：

通过本课的复习，能对本单元所学知识进行简单的总结，能正确的表达自己在旅途中的思想感情。 情感目标：

培养学生对大自然的热爱及其小组合作意识。

二、教学重点

1、本单元的单词、句型“Who is ___? It’s ___.”

2、能正确表达自己在车上的所见、所闻，并能进行情景交际练习。教学难点：

能利用所学知识进行情景交际练习。

二、教具、学具

单词卡片、录音机（磁带）或光盘

四、教学过程

1、Greeting and review.

表演唱歌曲Who’s drawing? 把学生带入课堂学习的氛围之中。

2、教师发指令，做游戏Simon says.重点复习本单元所学过的词汇draw,look,point,see,sleep,quick,slow,loud,quiet,等。 教师将学生分成小组， Play “Simon Says”,继续复习本单元的单词：baby, man, woman, draw, look, point, see, sleep” 同时教师提问“ Are you loud/quiet?” (当学生做动作时，比如说教师发出指令，Please point to the blackboard后，可继续问“Who is quick? It’s ___.”并把最快小组的分数写到黑板上，这样既复习了单词，又复习了本课的句型，还培养学生的合作意识，调动所有学生的学习积极性。)

（3）Play“Go fish.” 把学生分成二人组或四人组，每人一沓词汇卡片，类似纸牌的钓鱼游戏，相同的词汇卡片可以配成一对，看谁配成堆的卡片多，谁就赢。

在玩游戏的过程当中，让学生能正确的背着拼写本课的四会单词，并练习说单词和句子。

（此环节教学中，根据学生的年龄特点，体现了玩中学，学中玩，让学生带着浓厚的兴趣完成教学任务。

(4)小组竞赛：交给分别给出每小组相同的时间，看看哪组拼写的单词多。

（这样的竞赛，不但培养了学生们的合作意识，还巩固了所学的单词）

(5)、小组利用所学的单词编句型或对话，展示本组的成果时，教师要适当的给予鼓励。鼓励学生说出尽量多的英语。

教师先找一两名学生进行示范，否则学生会觉得无所适从。

（对于五年级的学生来说，句型已经是学习的重点，所以由单词过渡到句型是非常必要的） （6）、T: I am very happy.Are you happy?”

Ss: I am happy, too.

T: Now ,Let’s go to Beijing.(教师边说边做出开车的动作）， “What can you see on the train? What can you hear on the train? What can you do on the train?‖

之后分组讨论问题，小组编对话，展示成果。

（这样的环节，可以带动成绩较差的学生，做到人人有收获。）

五、Cla Closing

公布各小组的成绩，对各小组进行不同程度的鼓励。

Activity Book

六、板书设计

Leon 8 :Again, Please!

Group 1:

Group 2:

Group 3:

Group 4:

What can you see on the train?

What can you hear on the train?

What can you do on the train?

课后反思：

Leon 9: Arriving in Beijing

一、教学目标：

1.

掌握本课四会单词：men, women, children, people, many 2.

能够正确运用四会单词：men, women, children, people, many 3.培养学生较好的文化意识与英语语感。教育学生在社会中做到尊老爱幼、遵守社会公共秩序。小组合作，互相帮助。

二、教学重、难点

掌握与运用men, women, children, people

三、教具学具

录音机、磁带、CAI（or poster）:第9课第二部分的图片

四、教学过程

（一） 1.Greeting: 2.Chant: What do you see?

（二）

1.Show CAI （or poster）about many people in the train station.2.Let cla discu and answer: What do you see in this CAI.3.Learn men, women, children and people.4.Listen and follow 5.Let‘s Chant: Leave Arrive Chant 6.Look at the CAI again, then answer these questions: 1) What are the women doing? 2) What are the children doing? 3) What are the men doing? 7.Listen the tape carefully, then answer my question: Who is tired and hungry? 8.Open your book and look at the second part，and then follow the tape.9.Show the poster to practice 10.Homework

（三） } Cla closing 1) What are the women doing? 2) What are the children doing? 3) What are the men doing? 4) Who is tired and hungry?

五、板书: people man ———— men

woman ———— women child ———— children

课后反思：

Leon 10 A Walk in Beijing

一、教学目标：

1、知识技能：

（1）掌握四会单词slow, slowly, quick, quickly.

（2） 能正确使用slow, slowly; quick, quickly并且造句。

（3）能把所学内容提升到实际生活的对话当中去应用。

2、能力目标：Tell a funny story of your trip to the cla.

3、情感目标：根据课文内容“在北京街道散步”，Danny在过马路时的对话。培养学生对过繁华街道时应注意和了解的内容，培养学生良好的行为习惯。因此，在教学中加强助人为乐，尊老爱幼的道德情操，增强了他们的爱国情操。

二、教学重、难点：

1.

形容词变副词的方法及用法。 2.

能力的提升，对话表演

三、教具准备：单词卡片 录音机 磁带 图片 幻灯片

四、教学过程： 一 Greetings:

Teacher: Hello, boys and girls.How are you today? How do you feel?

Students: I feel happy!

T: There are many teachers.Do you feel scared?

(摘苹果，然后领读scared)

Now, look, there‘re many apples.If you answer a question, you can choose one apple. 二 复习新授

（一）引入

T: OK.Now I know everyone likes to sing a song first.Let‘s sing a song, ok?

Ss: Ok.

T: Stand up and follow me.

(sing the song of 《stop, look, listen, think》)

T: What do you listen? What can you see?

S: There are many cars, buses, a policeman, children, a road……

T: Yes.There is a street.Now, look at blackboard.

Here is a street in Beijing.Can you gue : what does the street has?

S: Yes.It has a restaurant, many cars and buses.

S: It has many trucks, bicycles, children and people on the street.

S: ……

（教师把学生想象出的人物以及交通工具，建筑物等粘贴在街道上或者街道旁，看图复习一遍图片上的单词，教师带学生读一遍）

（二）看图（黑板上学生们想想出来的图画）师生对话练习，新授

T: Now, look at the picture.Can you make a sentence with quick or slow?

S: The cars and bicycles are quick.

S：The people are quick.

S：The children are slow.

S：The buses and trucks are slow.„„

T：Good.The cars are quick.(板书)

The children are slow.(板书)

（复习slow, quick）

T: What are the children doing?

S: They are walking (down the street).

T: Yes.They‘re walking.

The children walk slowly.(板书)

The cars are slow.The cars go quickly.(板书)

(领读slowly, quickly, 学生一个个的读,并且背着拼读，并且造句，可以是黑板上的例句)

T: Now, look me! I am jumping.Am I jumping slowly or quickly?

Ss: You‘re jumping slowly.T: Can you jump?

Ss: Yes, I can.

T: Please jump quickly—run slowly—fly quickly„„（带学生做动作，边说边坐）

Very good! Boys and girls, What do you find? When do we say quickly or slowly?

(由学生找规律，自己说出方法，然后教师在通过课件总结出规律)

(三) 练习：

T: Now, let‘s play a game and

practice!(出示幻灯图片,学生连词成句，看图造句,对学生进行奖励，发苹果)

T: Great! Everyone does a good job.Who has an apple, come here please.

(连词组句，将苹果背面单词的排列好成为一句话，在带大家重温一遍今天的重点句型；然后按照他们站的位置，把苹果正面翻过来，师问：Does everyone have a happy apple? Does everyone have a sad apple? Does everyone have a scared apple? (复习everyone, 为下节课打好基础。) 三 阅读课文，对话表演

（一）听音回答问题：

T: Now, I feel happy.Are you happy?

Ss: Yes, I feel happy, too.

T: Do you know，how does Danny and Jenny feel? Let’s listen and answer!

（先让学生读一下一会将要回答的问题，让学生有目的的去听课文，然后回答问题。）

（二）跟读课文：（一遍）

（三）设置情景，布置编对话任务，小组合作

Make up a dialogue :(you can choose one )

要求： use “slowly”and “quickly” in it

（一）人物：family members and salesclerk

地点： at the zoo

内容： watch animals：panda, tiger, rabbit,

lion, fish, bird, monkey and so on.

（二）人物：an old woman and young children

地点： near our school

内容： go to school and cro a street

五、布置作业：

Homework:

1.Write down what do you know, when you cro the street.

2.Write down your funny story with pictures.

六、板书

slow ———— slowly

scared quick ———— quickly

七、课后反思：

Leon 11: Tian‘anmen Square

一、教学目标： 1．知识目标：

a) 能听懂、会读、会说:loudly, quietly, easy, hard, hurt ,fly a kite .

b) 能听懂、会读、会说句型：1They are laughing loudly ./He is standing quietly .2This is easy/hard .2．能力目标：

a) 使学生能把所学的单词运用到所学过的句子中去。

b)能运用本课所学的内容及以前学过的相关句子结合实际生活情况表达自己感情和意愿。 3．情感目标：

通过学习用英语在情境中描述自己的所见所闻所做，把所学的语言与学生的生活实际结合起来，激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养学生自主学习英语的能力以及交流和合作学习的能力。

二、教学重、难点：

使学生争取掌握（包括正确地说、读、写、用）单词：loudly, quietly, easy, hard, hurt ,fly a kite

三、教具学具：

多媒体课件,单词图卡,算式条,句型条,风筝

四、教学过程： Step 1: 师生问候

T：Hello, Boys and girls.（唱歌问候How are you, how are you ,how are you today? Ss：（唱歌回答）I am fine，thanks, I am fine，thanks, how a lovely day!

（通过师生间亲切的歌曲问候，建立轻松、和谐、民主的课堂气氛，使学生很自然地进入英语学习状态。）

Step 2: Revision: 1.T：Are you happy today ? Let’play a game: do the action follow my order .Boys stand up /girls sit down /boys laugh /gils walk/ children talk/sing/cry...

Ss：OK.(listen and do the action and )

（采用游戏来缓解学生的紧张情绪，并复习了boy, girl, children, laugh ,talk, play .等单词,为进一步学习奠定了良好的基础）

Step 3 : 新课呈现: (在游戏中不知不觉引入新知,衔接自然,让学生在玩中学,学中玩) 1.loudly

They are laughing loudly

T: We can see some children .What are they doing ? They are laughing loudly (动作)教loudly在教读过程中让学生read loudly .让学生sing loudly / laugh loudly 并引导学生说I am singing/laughing loudly .

2.quietly T(动作)Quietly please.Look .I am a cat now .I am walking quietly .教读quietly并通过音量让学生明白loudly\ quietly.3 .easy, hard This is easy.This is hard.

通过一根小木棒很容易折断和一小扎小木棒很难折断来演示单词easy和hard。边做边说：This is easy.This is hard.(学生通过拿椅子\桌子以及算式1+1=2 和123x456=?来体验This is easy.This is hard) 4 fly a kite (实物教学) T.look!What`s this .This is kite .出示短语fly a kite,教读(小组比赛读).几生上台演示.Let`s fly a kite .5 hurt T : (师放风筝时不小心碰对头) Oh ,no ,I hurt my head .教读hurt.(创设情景,让学生”体验”语言) (教读全部) loudly, quietly, easy, hard, hurt ,fly a kite .1They are laughing loudly ./He is standing quietly .2This is easy/hard .Step 4 : 游戏巩固(知识的输出)

1.起立\坐下  T：Let’s play a game.OK? Group1 are “loudly,” , Group2 are “quietly”„.When I say “loudly” Group1 站着,.其他组坐下.(先单词后句子,逐步增加难度.此活动要求练习学生的听力和对所学单词的迅速反应能力。 说单词猜动作.Step 5 : 1.T :Well done! Our friend Danny and Jenny are playing on Tian`anmen square .They are flying a kite .Can Danny fly a kite? Let`s watch the vedio and read loudly .2 say the sentences that you can .Step 6 : Task –fulfilling(语言的输出,综合能力的运用) 在情境中描述自己的所见所闻所做.Describe what can you see/hear /do on Tian`anmen square (学生上台边贴图边用所学知识描述).

五、板书设计：

Leon11: Tian‘anmen Square

loudly

They are laughing loudly quietly

They are standing quietly.easy

This is easy/ hard.hard

It‘s easy/ hard.fly a kite

Let`s fly a kite .hurt

I hurt my head.

六、课后反思：

Leon12：The Palace Museum

一、教学目标：

1、认知目标：能听懂会读本课的内容。

( 1 )掌握词汇camera, picture, help, hurt，并能读、写、说出和听懂这些词汇。 （2）可以说出和听懂film, take a picture, May I take your picture? I hurt my ......。Dont worry.I can help you.等用语。

2、能力目标：能在一种贴近现实生活的语境中正确地运用所学的用语进行对话，以达到“学习活动化，活动交际化”的目的。

3、情感目标：激发积极的情感因素。

（1）在学习运用Dont worry .I can help you.等用语的过程中学会关心他人，与他人进行友好的交际。

（2）通过情景对话，感受到所学知识融汇到实际交往中的乐趣，从而激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养学习英语的积极态度，使学生乐于合作参与，勇于进行交际实践

二、教学重点、难点 教学重点：

（1）掌握词汇camare, picture, help, hurt.

（2）会用受伤后求助及如何安慰别人等用语。 教学难点：

运用本课所学的用语进行情景对话。

三、教具、学具准备

照相机、胶卷、相片、剪刀、创可贴、纸片、录音机等。

四、教学过程：

一、Cla opening

and

review

1、师生间互相打招呼问好并自由对话。

Hello! Are you happy? Whats your name? Nice to meet you.（营造英语氛围，让学生进入学习英语的状态。）

2、唱“Head, should, knees, toes”.

（学生一边唱一边指着身体各部位，一方面达到复习人体部位名称的词汇，另一方面活跃了课堂氛围。）

3、Show me......学生按指令拿出实物并说This is a ......。 （养成良好的听说习惯和用英语思维的习惯。）

4、How oid are you?/I am _years old.

二、New Concepts

（一）呈现新知camera, film, take a pictrue, picture及要帮别人照相的用语。

（1）教师假装去公园玩，对学生说：I am going to the park today.I want to take my camera.What a camera ? Look! I can show you!接着呈现实物camera， 板书单词，教读练说camera.（2）呈现实物film，教读练说film，This is film.

（3）边说边演示Film goes in the camera.Now I’m putting film in my camera.让学生理解。 （4）T：Ok! Let’s take a picture.边说边演示take a picture.让学生边说边做出照相动作。 （5）教师拿着照相机与一些学生对话，演示要帮别人照相的用语，并帮他们照相。 T: May I take your picture ? S: Sure./ No, thanks.lian （6）练说句子，分两大组相互问答?同桌两人相互问答，并做出照相动作。 （7）实物呈现 picture.板书单词，教读练说。

（打破常规的直接呈现单词，直接教读句子的教学模式，通过语境利用实物及动作演示来呈现单词和句子，让学生很直观的、很自然的接受新知。）

（二）操练巩固新知 （1）游戏：猜一猜。 （2）游戏：找朋友。

（3）创设情景：小伙伴们相约去一个地方玩，然后相互帮照相。学生分组自编小对话。

（在活动在游戏、游戏活动中操练，让全班同学热情高涨，跃跃欲试，学生在情景会话中感受运用英语的喜悦。）

（三）呈现新知 hurt, help , 及受伤后求救和安慰别人的用语：I hurt my ..... Dont worry! I can help you .( 1 )露出贴有创可贴的手臂，引出单词 hurt, 板书单词，教读练说，让学生口头造句。

（2）教师剪纸，装作伤着了手指向学生求救，让学生帮包扎。T: Help! I hurt my finger.引出help, 板书单词，教读练说单词及句子。 （3）当最后一名说完I hurt my ......时，教师拿出创可贴边安慰边帮他包扎。T: Dont worry ! I can help you.教说句子。

（四）操练巩固新知

（1）让几名学生分别指着受伤的身体部位向全班同学求助。进行对话。 （2）同桌练习求助、安慰的用语。

（3）学生自己创设情景表演求助、安慰。

（五）利用教科书 No.1 （1）学生翻开书，同桌讨论书上插图，试读单词和句子。 （2）播放录音磁带，学生跟读。 （3）齐读。

（既紧扣教材，又抛开教材来设计新知的教学，然后再回到教材，通过学生自主活动，把书本上的知识内化为实实在在的语言交际能

（六）利用教科书 No.2 （1）各小组试读课文，自学讨论How old is the Palace Musuem ? Danny 发生了什么事？他说了什么？

（3）听录音磁带跟读。 （4）齐读课文。

四、Cla closing.作业：完成本课的活动手册

五、板书设计

Leon12：The Palace Museum camera

I want to take my camera film

This is film.picture

take a pictrue help

I can help you

六、课后反思：

Leon13: Taking Pictures

一、教学目标：

(1)帮助学生掌握四会词语：hurt help

(2)学生能够熟练掌握和运用一下短语：take a picture ,be careful.

二、教学重点难点：hurt help.

三、教具学具：camera、film、audiotape

四、教学过程： Step one： 1、Greeting.

2、Play “spell It” or “Letters” to review any vocabulary from this unit.(camera, picture)

3、Play the “semen says” to review parts of the body.

Step two： Take a picture

1、Introduce

Demonstrate:― take a picture‖ with my camera and film.Play‖ Stop! Go!‖ with the phrase

2、May I take your picture?” Each time the students stop, they take turns saying:” Hi! May I take your picture?” They listen to the answer and only act out taking a picture if their partners say yes.

Step three:

1.Review the story so far.Last time, they were at the Palace Museum.Danny hurt his nose, how about the camera and the film?

2.Where are they now? And what happed? Let students look at the pictures then gue.3.Introduce the paage.

4.Use the students ‘book and audiotape.Listen and read.Divide the cla into small groups.

Ask each group to make up a dialogue about taking pictures.

Encourage the students to use as much vocabulary from this unit as poible.(camera, picture, easy, hard, help, hurt, loudly, quietly, many, everyone, men, women, children, people, quickly, slowly ).Step four:

Have a practice of the word― hurt‖.Teacher acts some parts of her body hurt let students say them out.Such as my ears hurt.My head hurts.And so on.Step five:

Use the activity book.Check for understanding.

五、板书设计：

Leon13: Taking Pictures May I take your picture? Sure.

No, thanks, my nose hurts.It has a bandage on it .Help! I am falling! Be careful!

六、课后反思：

Leon14 ：Shopping in Beijing 一，

教学目标

能力目标: Review the phrase: Let’s go to the — to —.知识目标：Review the phrase: Let’s go to the — to —.情感目标：Encourage the students to make their own observations about the pictures and the story.

二、教学重点：everyone 三，教具、学具：Same real photographs.

四、教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review

1、Greeting Hello, everyone!

2、Play “Charades” to review the phrase : Let’s go to the — to —.Let‘s go to the shop to buy

.Let‘s go to the restaurant to eat

.Let‘s go to the

library to read a book.Let‘s go to the gym to play

.Introduce Demonstrate: everyone with volunteers .Ask for a series of volunteers to come to the front of cla.Ask each to perform an action loudly or quietly.Teacher: (point to each volunteer in turn.) What is he /she doing? Cla: He/she is _____ing.Teacher: Is he/she ____ing loudly or quietly? Cla: Loudly/Quietly.

Teacher: (To all t Is he/she ____ing loudly or quietly?he volunteers.) Stop! Please —loudly / quietly now! (To the cla.) Look! Everyone is ____ing loudly/quietly. Use the student book and audiotape.Review the story so far、last time, Jenny, Danny and Li Ming were at the Palace Museum.What happened? Look at pictures.What are they doing now? (shopping ) why ?

Tell them to continue the action until I give a command.

They must listen carefully! Then lead a dialogue.

Practice

Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about shopping for gifts on a trip. Play: Mother, May I ? to review adverbs from this unit.(quickly, slowly, loudly and quietly).Use the activity book.Check for understanding.

Cla Closing Activity book Leon 14 No.1

五，板书：

Leon14 ：Shopping in Beijing Let‘s go to the — to —.What is he /she doing? He/she is _____ing.

Is he/she ____ing loudly or quietly? Is he/she ____ing loudly or quietly?

六、课后反思：

Leon 15: Are You Ready for a song ?

一、教学目标：

1、

知识目标：1.学唱歌曲 Everyone goes for a walk .2.完成书上的测试题，学习故事“Maddy’s Family Photographs”

2、

能力目标：能够读懂、听懂故事“Maddy’s Family Photographs”，并能回答简单问题。

3、

情感目标：激发学生 对英语的持久兴趣，培养学生勤动脑，学会思考。

二、教学重点、难点：能准确回答书中的问题，能听懂故事。

三、教具准备：录音机、故事书

四、教学过程：

一、

Cla Opening and Review 1.

Greetings

2.

T: Open your book and turn to page 30 .(让学生观察图片说话)

（这首歌曲的歌词是这个单元的重点知识，所以在学习歌曲之前让学生自己说出来不仅复习了以前的知识，同时孩子们还掌握了歌词。） 3.

学唱这首歌曲。

先听两遍，让学生有一个初步的印象。在分段进行。

4.Quiz

1.

分组观察图片，讨论。 2.

找同学回答。

3.

听录音。检查答案是否正确。（同时锻炼了孩子的听力。）

二、Story :Maddy’s Grandfather 1.

Prepare to Read

T: Look at the pictures.Who do you think these characters are? Is the man younger or older than maddy ? What do you think it happening ?

Does anyone have a relative who is hard of hearing ? 2.

Listen to the audiotape, read 3.

Discu

a.

Is Maddy older or younger than her grandfather/aunt/uncle? b.

What does Maddy‘s grandfather speak? c.

Can he hear well ?

d.

What does maddy have to shout ? e.

What happens ?

4.

Talk about the students‘ photographs 5.

Activity Book L15 N1

三、Cla Closing Homework: Activity Book

五、板书设计

Leon 15: Are You Ready for a song ? a.

Is Maddy older or younger than her grandfather/aunt/uncle? b.

What does Maddy‘s grandfather speak? c.

Can he hear well ?

d.

What does maddy have to shout ? What happens ?

六、教学反思：

Leon16 Again, please.

一、教学目标： 1.

知识目标：

（1）

重点词汇：

quick , slowly , loudly , quietly

easy , hard , many

camera , picture, everyone

men, women , children , people

help , hurt

（2）

标准口语：

take a picture

Ate you okay? Yes/No.Be careful ! Don‘t worry.

2.

能力目标：

（1）

学生能够正确地在句中使用形容词和副词。 （2）

熟练运用everyone。

（3）

掌握不规则名词复数，并运用。

3.

情感目标：通过本单元的学习，了解我国的首都北京，培养学生的爱国之情。

二、教学重、难点：

quick , slowly , loudly , quietly

easy , hard , many

camera , picture, everyone

men, women , children , people

help , hurt

take a picture

Are you okay? Yes/No.Be careful ! Don‘t worry.

三、教具、学具：教学图片、实物等

四、教学过程：

Step1 Warming-up and revision 1.学生互相问候，建立氛围。 2.Game ―Find friend‖

通过游戏复习不规则名词复数。

3.展示课件大标题，让同学们谈论“What’s in Beiing ? 4.Prictice

通过学生表演动作，其他学生来填空，复习形容容词和副词的用法。 Step2 Practise

1.Play a game ―What‘s miing?‖

（规则：把词汇卡片竖放在教室前面，告诉学生看1分钟的卡片后闭上眼睛,然后教师移开一张卡片。让学生睁开眼睛，设法指出教师移走了哪张卡片。提问每个学生让其说出移走的卡片的名称，直到猜对正确答案为止。让学生重新看到那张移走的卡片，并把它放回原处。那名猜对正确答案的学生可以在移走另一张卡片，让大家接着猜。） 2.Text

Step3 Cla closing

五、板书设计：

Leon16 Again, please quick

quickly

men slow

slowly

women loud

loudly

children quiet

quietly

people

六、课后反思：

Leon 17 Let‘s buy postcards!

一、教学目标：

（一）、知识：

1.掌握下列四会词汇： postcard, letter, e-mail.

2.运用学到的日常用语简单地会话。

（二）能力：

1.在创设的情境中运用所学的知识，使语言交际能力进一步提高。2.通过对话，初步学会用英语购物，为学会生活打下基础。

（三）、情感：

激发积极的情感因素,培养与人交流的能力。

二、教学重点、难点：

重点：四会词汇：postcard, letter, e-mail

难点：所学词汇和句型的灵活运用，进行交际。

三、教具、学具：

明信片、信件、电脑、录音机、

四、教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review Greeting.Sing ―I Am Drawing‖.Key Concepts Postcard, letter, e-mail Introduce

Demonstrate ―postcard‖ and ―letter with real objects. Talk about :What do you write a letter on? What does a postcard have? Where can we buy postcards? Demonstrate ―e-mail‖ with a computer.Translate ‗e-mail‘.Note that we say ― an e-mail‖.Talk about: What do you write an e-mail on? Use the student book and audiotape. Play the audiotape.Ask some students to read the text.Introduce T: Look, here is a shop.It has many postcards.Which one do you like? Why? (Ask the students to answer.)

T: Do you want to choose one to send to your family or friend? Introduce ―send‖ with a picture. Who do you want to send them to? Now, I’m a clerk.Can you buy it? (鼓励学生用How much ______?及I’ll take ______.等句子 进行对话，可再叫几名学生进行示范。) T: very good! You can get it.T: Danny, Jenny and Li Ming are in the hotel shop.Let‘s listen carefully.Show the questions: What does Jenny‘s postcard have? Who does she want to send it to? What does Li Ming‘s postcard have? Who does he want to send it to? Listen to the audiotape.Fill in the blanks. who What picture Whom Jenny the Palace Museum mum and dad Li Ming Tian‘anmen Square Cousin Jing Listen to the audiotape again.Answer these questions: What is the panda doing? How much for this postcard？

How many postcards does Danny want to buy? Do you know why? Practice Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about buying postcards.Why are they buying postcards? Who do they buy them for？What pictures do the postcards have? Present

Cla closing

五、板书设计

Leon 17 Let‘s buy postcards!

a letter

paper.You write

on

an e-mail

a computer.We buy postcards in the hotel shop.How much ________ ? ________ yuan.I‘ll take __________ .

六、课后反思：

Leon 18 :Jenny Writes a Postcard 一.教学目标:

1.Vocabulary: top, bottom, left, right, corner, stamp

2.Learn how to write a postcard.二.教学重点:

1.top，bottom，left，right,corner

2．I want to send this postcard to ________ .三.教学难点：

学生会用英语写名信片。 四.教学教具：

word-cards, audiotape, postcards 五.教学过程： Revision

1.

Greeting

2.

做“Draw and Gue”游戏用以复习postcard和e-mail

3.

做“What Day is it”游戏用以复习星期的名称、月份和序数 New concepts:

1.bottom, top, left, right Introduce:

Use a postcard to demonstrate ―top‖, ―bottom‖, ―left‖, ―right‖, and ―corner‖.Write on the blackboard and read a few times together.

Ask for volunteers to show you the top,bottom,left and right of objects in the claroom.(让学生能够正确运用所学单词)

Point to the picture of a postcard on blackboard and ask ―Where do we put the stamp?‖ in Chinese.Teach them the new word ―stamp‖.We put the stamp in the top, right corner of the postcard.

Play a game.(传递单词游戏)

One by one read the word on the card.

2.Introuduce how to write a postcard.(介绍明信片写法)

Where do you write on a postcard? On the left.

Where do you put the addre? On the right.

Teach them write the day first,and write the name.

(提示：一.在明信片右边地方写收信人的地址，注意要先写收信人的姓名，再从小到大写上收信人的地址。二.内容的写法：顺序是先写日期，其次称呼，正文，最后结束语) 3.Drills

Make a postcard by yourself.Then introduce it.

(要求每个学生都做一张明信片，用top bottom, left 和right来向学生说明在哪儿写日期，在哪儿写地址，在哪儿写名字。 4.Open books.Let’s listen to the audiotape and read after the speaker.(读课文)

Look at Jenny‘s postcard.Who can tell us what does she say? 5..Do exercises in the activity book.(听力练习) Cla closing 六.板书设计

Top corner

bottom 七.课后反思：

Leon 19 Li Ming‘s Letter

一.Teaching aims and requiremenfs.1.Students can read , write,say and aurally understand the following vocabulary :envelope corner.二.Key concepts:

Envelope

corner 三.Resources:

Word---cards,

paper, pencil, envelope, stmap.四.Teaching procedure

1.cla opening and Review

（1）Greeting: hello, everyone! How are you today? How’s the weather? What day is it?

（2）Play a game:“what’s miing?”（复习1---12序数词）

（3）Sing a song:“The Month song.”

（4）Play a game:“pen pal”（讲上一节课制作的名信卡邮发出去）

2.New concepts:

（1）Role---play writing a letter.As you do this:

I am writing a letter.

I am writing a letter to____.

I I am writing with a pen.

I am writing on a piece of paper.

I am putting my letter in an envelope.

Now I am writing the addre.

Now I am putting a stmap in the corner.

同事教授 envelope, corner, 领读几遍。

（2）Put the envelope.

T; Can you point to the bottom of the envelope?（top, left, right corner）

C;

进行多次练习，重点练习Can you point to the corner of the envelope?

（3）Play a game: “Pen pal”游戏

（4）what’s the right corner of the envelope?

（5）Play a game to practice directions:（turn right ,turn left, go straight） 五.Cla closing:

Activity book: Leon 19: Number 2 六.版书：

Leon 19: Li Ming’s letter

Envelope

corner

post office 七.课后反思：

Leon 20

At the post office

一、教学目标： A 知识目标

1、能够掌握单词：post card ， letter ，以及重点句子

How much…..?

2、能够独立朗读课文中的对话内容，理解主要意思。B.能力目标

通过学习，能够正确运用买东西时的英语表达形式，能够在比较真实的情景下进行购物的交流，提高学生的语言交际与表达能力。 C.情感目标

在活动中进一步增加学生的英语兴趣，学会运用简单的礼貌用语。

二、教学重点：

能够正确运用所学的postcard , letter , stamp 等单词，能够理解运用课文内容。

三、教学难点：买东西时的英语交际用语

四、教学准备：售货员服装， 邮票，信封，铅笔，卡片等。

五、学具准备：学生卡片，邮票，信封等

六、教学过程：

（一）Cla Opening and Review 1.Greeting

Hello , boys and girls ! How do you feel ? 2.Review :Play a game

Review to words that learned in last leon.3.Sing a song

设计意图:利用生动、活泼的歌曲，把学生带进一个轻松、愉快的学英语的课堂，调动了学生学习的积极性，恰当的游戏不仅复习了旧知识，更让学生愉快地动起来，不由自主地进入了一个英语学习的佳境。

(二) New Concepts Step 1 : Demonstrate Show a dialogue :

Lynn：Hello , Mingming .Where are you going ?

Ming: To the post office .I want to buy some stamps .Because I want to send my postcards to my friends .

Lynn: May I go with you ? Ming: Sure ! Let‘s go .At the post office : Clerk : Good morning ! May I help you ? Lynn: Hello , I need two stamps, please . Clerk: Where are you sending your postcard ? Lynn: I‘m sending it to Beijing .How much is the stamp , please ? Clerk : One yuan .Lynn: I ‗ll take two , please .Thank you , Clerk : You are welcome .Good-bye ! 设计意图：在创设的真实地对话情景中让学生感知语言的运用技能，并在预设中理解本课的重要知识点。而且在呈现中避免了枯燥乏味。 Step 2 : Practice

Four students in a group to make up a short dialogue .Step 3 : Understand the book .

Play the recorder and read the sentences .Step 4 : Play a game

Make a shop at the claroom.(三) Cla Closing

Activity Book : Exercises .Homework: Make up a dialogue and write on paper .设计意图:英语作业的形式也要有所改变,新颖而且有创新性,更让学生乐于接受.并可将优秀作品在班内或校内展示.从而激发学生在英语学习上的兴趣,达到积极巩固的目的.课后反思：

Leon 21 Writing the Addre

一、教学目标：

知识目标：掌握词汇stamp。使学生学会在明信片上用英语写地址。

能力目标：在创设的情境中运用所学的口语、书面语知识，使语言交际能力进一步提高。

情感目标：学会通过用明信片的形式主动与人交流，建议更广泛的交往空间；通过地址写法的对比，了解中英语言的差异，激发爱国主义情感。

二、教学重点、难点： 重点：stamp 难点：地址的正确书写。

三、教具、学具：一张放大的邮票、录音机、磁带

四、教学过程

（一）、复习导入

1、PLAY“Simon says”,复习top, bottom, right 和left（告诉学生向上指表示top，指下面表示bottom，左指表示left，右指表示right，由单个学生来指挥）

2、做《活动手册》第一题听力

（设计意图：本课课文频繁的涉及了top, bottom, right, left等词，第1步复习，用以让学生熟悉这些词汇的意义与发音，第2步复习，为了让学生在句子层次中复习这几个单词的用法）

（二）、讲授新知识

1、出示一枚放大的邮票，师：What’s this ? （前面是接触到Stamp这一单词，所以大部分学生应该会读，本课要让学生会写、会用） 师：“Who can spell it ?”拼读句子，师要板书，让学生说一说，谁有办法记住这个单词的写法。 ２、在黑板上划一张大型的明信片 师：Where do you put the stamp？

（请单个学生回答，再问几个学生，最后齐答） 师：a、Where do you put the addre？

b、What’s your addre？请学生用汉语讲出来 国家－省份－城市－乡镇（街道）－门牌号

c、What’s Danny’s addre？（先让学生看课文，再回答问题，答后，将其板书在黑板上） ９４２

Ninth Avenue Edmonton ， Alberta Canada 并用汉语翻译在旁边

请学生总结中英文地址书写顺序的不同

（设计意图：地址书写的难点，关键在顺序的排列不同，让学生自己去观察、发现，是一个不可缺少的体验过程，以后便不容易出现“忘了顺序”的现象）

（三）、活动与练习

１、让学生拿出自己提前准备好的明信片（可以自己画一张）

要求每个学生也为自己的母亲画一张明信片，在上面写上自己家的地址

（设计意图：本环节充分体现了任务型教学理念，让学生能够自己用所学的新知识去完成任务，这是一个参与的体验过程）

２、师：Does Danny Know his addre？Read and listen 播放录音至Ｐ４３第四行，让学生看书跟读

３、自读课文剩余部分，然后请两位同学表演课文内容。

（设计意图：此活动充分利用课文的有趣的情景优势，让学生会使用语言进行有效的交际，这是一个实践的体验过程）

（四）、结束课堂

１、完成《活动手册》 ２、一起拼读stamp 板书：

Leon21:Writing the Addre

stamp

Mrs.Dinosaur

942 Ninth Avenue Edmonton,Alberta Canada

课后反思：

Leon 22 : Sending an E-mail

一、

教学目标

（1）

知识技能：学生能够理解并掌握 computer 这个单词，学会用computer 发E-mail 。 （2）过程与方法:由于这节课的特殊性，学生在微机室用实物电脑进行电子邮件的发送，使教学简单化，可视化。

（3）情感态度：激发学生学习英语的浓厚兴趣，培养他们英语学习的主动性，使他们养成大胆说英语的习惯，体会学习过程的成就感和快乐。

二、

教学重点： 掌握单词computer。

三、教学难点：

学生能用电脑熟练地写和发送电子邮件。

四、教学过程：

教

学

设

计 设 计 意 图 （1）

a.Greeting : Hello ,cla !

How are you today ? How is the weather ? „„

b.Play a game : ―Draw and Gue‖to review ―postcard‖ ―letter‖ and ―E-mail‖.c.Drill : I write a/an

on a

.( 指着黑板上的图画进行练习)

(2) New concepts

a .Point to a computer and ask ―what`s this ?‖Introduce ―computer‖.b.Write ―computer‖ on the blackboard .Lead the Ss read and spell this word .c.Play the audiotape and let the Ss listen .Then answer the questions:

Who wants to send an E-mail ?

Where is the computer ?

How much is to send an E-mail ? d.Do you want to send an E-mail to your friend ? Let`s send our friends an E-mail on the computer ,OK ? e.强调些电子邮件的格式和写信和写明信片的格式一样。Lead the Ss to send on the computer .f .Who did you send an E-mail to ?

Ss answer with :

I send an E-mail to

.g.Do the exercise of activity book No1.

Blackboard design：

Leon 22 : Sending an E-mail computer

电脑

I write a/an

on a

.I send an E-mail to

.

Exercise ：用单词的适当形式填空

1.I write an E-mail on a

.2．I send a

(明信片) to

.

3．This is a

(信)。

用游戏来复习以前所学的单词，并使学生进入英语学习氛围，活跃了课堂气氛。

使用实物电脑进行单词教学，并让学生在电脑上进行实际操作，给朋友发送电子邮件，创造机会让学生真正体验知识的形成过程，有助于对新知识的掌握和理解。

操作过后，让学生根据实际情况和学过的句型进行表达：给谁发了电子邮件。这时候，学生会感到很容易就能把句子表达出来。

课后反思：

Leon 23 Are you ready for a song ?

一、

教学目标

帮助学生复习以及加以巩固本单元所学知识，例如：明信片和信封上地址的正确书写，邮票的正确粘贴位置，以及电子邮件中姓名的书写位置等等。从而帮助学生了解到日常生活中如何正确书写信封和收发e-mail。

二、

教学重难点 1．歌曲韵律的把握。

2．单元新授单词的正确拼读。

三、教具、学具

1．多媒体、录音机。

2．学生自制明信片、信封。

四、教学设计 Step1 ：Review

T：Hello！Boys and girls ! Nice to see you ! S : Nice to see you !

T: This unit we have learned how to write the addre on the postcard and where do we stick the stamp on the envelope.Now ,who can tell me about these ? S：We stick our stamps in the top , right corner .T：Yes , you are right ! ok ! where do we write our name if we write an e-mail ? S: Write it at the bottom .T: Good ! Step2: the song

1、

播放录音让学生熟悉歌曲，了解歌曲大意。

2、

再次播放歌曲，中间停顿。要求学生回答歌曲中相应的问题。

3、

逐段教授歌曲，请学得较快的同学到前面领唱。

4、

将学生分成两组，采用问和答的形式对唱。 Step3: the story

1、

在阅读之前，和学生们共同讨论一些相关问题。例如: Has anyone in the cla ever sent an e-mail ? Look at the pictures .who sends an e-mail in this story ? Where are Danny , Jenny and Li Ming ？（in Beijing , at the hotel.） Where is Little Zeke ? ( in Canada.)

2、

播放录音，学生听录音仔细阅读。

3、

讨论以下问题，帮助学生加深对故事大意的理解。 Who does Jenny send the e-mail to ？ Who gets the e-mail ? Why ? Did you like the story ？Why or why not ?

4、

利用《活动手册》，完成听力练习。

5、

结合故事，做 Secret Word 游戏。播放故事录音并仔细观察学生理解情况。不时地停止播放录音并更换秘密词汇。

五、板书设计

This is the

of the

.

This is the

.

This is the

.

This is the

.

六、课后反思：

LESSON 24：AGAIN，PLEASE！ 教学目标

1、情感目标：

学会与别人分享自己的感受，学会与他人共处

2、知识目标：

①巩固运用英文写明信片、书信和电子邮件的基本格式 ②掌握单词：bottom、computer、corner、e-mail、envelope、left、letter、postcard、right、stamp、top、send

3、能力目标：

①学会运用已掌握的单词造句

②会用写明信片、书信和电子邮件的基本格式 教学重难点

1、重点：

A掌握单词：bottom、computer、corner、e-mail、envelope、left、letter、postcard、right、stamp、top、send 。

B运用英文写明信片、书信和电子邮件的基本格式

2、难点：

运用英文写明信片、书信和电子邮件的基本格式

教具学具：

单词卡、录音机、明信片、信纸、信封 教学设计：

CLASS OPENING AND REVIEW（5分钟）

1、Greeting

2、Review（复习23课英文歌曲：齐唱-----分唱） NEW CONCEPTS（15分钟）

A：Review words：bottom、computer、corner、e-mail、envelope、left、letter、postcard、right、stamp、top、send（可以运用“What is miing ？”游戏，复习单词的发音；用单词造句子比赛；单词听写）

B：用“pen pal”游戏的变化形式做游戏。找十名左右自告奋勇的学生扮作“电子邮件信使”。用油彩或水彩笔在每位学生前额上（或手上）涂上一道“电光”。（老师也可以用黄色的纸剪出“电光”，给每名学生戴一个）要求每个学生在一张纸上画一幅电脑屏幕的图画，在图画下面写上单词computer。然后让学生在这个屏幕上给自己笔友写一封电子邮件，同时要求他们写下笔友的地址。如果他们写好了，喊一声send那些自告奋勇者便马上取走邮件并且传送给该生的笔友。那些自告奋勇者也写邮件并且亲自将邮件给自己的笔友。 C：Writing

做“Simon Says”游戏来复习top，bottom, right和left。告诉学生向上指表示top,指下面表示bottom。找一名自告奋勇的学生来指挥此游戏。这名学生需要背对全班，这样，左和右的命令就不会混淆。教师观看全班表演。

要求学生分成若干个学习小组；学生在小组内说一说“How to write a postcard or a letter to your friend？”接着写一份明信片或信件给同班的同学，并送到同学的手上；收到的同学负责检查是否有写得正确，并进行评价。写作过程中教师注意及时纠正学生的错误。 D：小组内互查课文的朗读，并评价，教师抽查。 E:Activity book(5分钟)

完成活动手册55——56页练习板书：

bottom、computer、corner、e-mail、envelope、left、letter、postcard、right、stamp、top、send 课后反思：

Leon 25：Li Ming Goes Home 一．教学目标：

1、知识与技能：This leon teaches students regular past—tense verbs、walked、looked、talked、played .

2、过程与方法：They can say and understand the common phrases.“Did you mi me? Did you have a good trip?” Answer

3、情感态度价值观：They can expre their feeling and try to speak more.二．教学重难点：Regular past-tense verbs ：walked、looked、talked 三．教具学具：Tape recorder and tape pictures CAI 四．教学过程: 教学环节 教师活动 学生活动 设计意图 Cla opening.Review.Greeting .

Lead them do the games:

1、What `s miing?

2、What day is it ? Q: What day was yesterday? Greeting .

Review the words about weeks、months and ordinals .

A: It was -------.通过复习及问候让学生对已学词汇进行回顾，创造良好的语言环境。 New concepts.Make a chart on the blackboard as show below.Make up sentences as act out .Try to make them under stand .(Make models) Do the game :Travel.Play the audiotape .(Part 1) Review the story so far.Li Ming Danny and Jenny went on a trip to Beijing where are they now? Divide the cla into small groups.Encourage every one.Do the listening exercise.Check for under standing.Today yesterday play played walk walked talk talked look looked Have a try.Make a sentence with right verb tense。 Do the game.Listen and read.(Ask questions.) Play attention to the new word “gift‖.and sentences.Did you mi me? Did you have a good trip? It‘s for you.

Practice by them selves.

Make up a dialogue about coming home from a trip.Write what you hear.

Use the activity book.通过肢体语言及详细的表格让学生体会动词过去时的变化情况.给学生创新的机会,充分展示个人才华,不拘泥于仅限词汇.

对故事的掌握在于是否会运用语言,创造合适的空间情境让学生大胆的发挥,能让学生更自由.在练习时要注意良好习惯的养成,达到锻炼的目的.Cla closing.

Home work Finish the homework.

板书设计

Leon 25：Li Ming Goes Home

walked、looked、talked、played .课后反思：

第26课：Jenny回家 教学目标：

1知识方面：能够认读掌握，灵活运用不规则动词的过去式。ate

saw

went

2能力方面：能够把所学单词运用到日常口语交际，在适当环境中灵活运用 。

3情感态度价值观：通过游戏激发学生学习兴趣，通过创设情境，激发学生的积极性，让学生感受到英语学习是有趣的，容易的。

教学重点：不规则动词的过去式。ate saw

went

教学难点：灵活运用不规则动词的过去式 教具学具：录音机，单词卡片，课件

教学过程：

1问候

T：Let’s begin

our cla. Hello boys

and girls

S: Hello, teacher.

—— 师生交流情感，解除拘束感 T; How are

you ?

S: Fine, thank you ， and

you ?

T: I‘m

fine ,too

2游戏“Travel”

—— 复词规则动词过去式

教师手持”Today”，

“Yesterday”两张卡片在全班来回走动，让学生抽此卡片。

教师用动作给出一些常用的动词， 如：教师作“走，跳，玩，谈话等”的动作，学生抽到卡片后就说

S1：Today ,I walk .

一、复习

S2: Yesterday , I walked.

用“Travel”的变化形式做游戏以复习以前学过的动词过去式。

3教授

二、新授

以上我们复习了一些规则动词的过去式，今天我们来学习一些不规则动词的过去式

1、利用手偶及有关Danny的图片进行对What happened?的教授。

出示课件：

Teacher: I have some pictures of Danny.（对手偶说）

Danny, can you talk about your pictures?

Today：

Yesterday：

go

went

see

saw

eat

ate

have

had

am

was 4听录音并跟读课文第一部分

5出示课件，根据所给内容说话

Jenny的旅行计划

The first day

Tian‘anmen Square

The second day

Palace Museum

The third day

Wangfujing

6听录音并跟读第二部分内容

7练习，完成活动手册第一题 8布置作业：总结所学常用规则和不规则动词的过去式，并在现实生活中主动应用

板书设计

Leon 26：Jenny Goes Home Today：

Yesterday：

go

went

see

saw

eat

ate 课后反思：

Leon 27

Danny Goes to School 教学目标：

1、掌握重点句子 What happened?并能够对此问句进行回答。

2、了解hurt fall break的过去式为hurt fell broke。

3、培养学生遇到挫折仍保持良好心态的心理。

教学重难点：

学生能回答What happened?这个问句来讲述已发生过的事情。

教具学具：

教具：本课第一部分中有关Danny的图片

写有hurt fall break及其过去式的词汇卡片

录音机

学具：学生准备一些有意义或有趣的照片

教学过程： Danny: OK.Teacher: (拿出一张照片)Oh! What happened, Danny? Danny: I hurt my nose! Teacher: (拿出二张照片) What happened? Danny: I fell! Teacher: (拿出三张照片) What happened?

Danny: I broke my tail! Teacher: Oh, poor Danny!（面向学生）Can you talk about Danny’s pictures, what happened?（将学生分成若干组，给他们一定的时间进行练习并找几组表演）

2、出示写有hurt fall break及其过去式的卡片并领读，告诉学生这三个词是不规则动词，要特殊记忆。

3、听录音，阅读第二部分Danny’s story, 对本部分内容进行提问，检查学生的理解情况，如：

What does Danny talk with Mr.Wood? Where did Danny hurt？

Did Danny have fun in Beijing?

三、编排对话 将全班学生分成若干组，就自己准备的照片进行讲述，并编一段与照片有关的对话，要求学生在对话中用到句子：What happened? 让自告奋勇者到前面表演对话。

四、课后练习选词填空

1、What

, Danny?

2、I

my nose!

3、I

.

4、I

my tail! fell

happened

broke

hurt 板书： Leon 27

Danny Goes to School

What happened? hurt

hurt fall

fell break

broke 课后反思：

Leon28 :Jenny‘s and Danny‘s Pictures 教学目标:

1、知识与技能:学生能读、写、说、运用句型This is

(名字)at the

(地点)。

2、过程与方法:,通过游戏，复习不规则动词和规则动词。利用演一演的方法使学生掌握新知识，通过练一练的方法使知识加以巩固。课上多以实物出现激发学生的学习兴趣。

3、情感态度与价值观:照片能留给孩子们美好的回忆，也能激发孩子们对北京的热爱，并能增加孩子们的环境保护意识。也使得孩子们对别人更有爱心。 教学重点:掌握句型 This is

(名字)at the

(地点)。

教学难点: This is

(名字)at the

(地点)句型的灵活运用，还有过去时态的正确运用。 教具准备:词汇卡片、习题卡片录音机、磁带.数码相机，多媒体课件。 教学过程:

一、Cla opening and Review.

1、师生问候:

2、游戏“What happened?”复习eat/ate go\went see\saw.

3、配词连线。每位同学的桌上放有习题卡片，学生独立完成。 today

yesterday eat

saw see

worked go

helped play

pointed work

went jump

ate point

jumped help

played 多媒体课件出示正确答案，老师拿出数码相机给做对的同学拍集体照，加以鼓励。

教师：没完全做对的同学要加油了，老师相信你们也是很棒的，有信心吗？好，今天我们就来学习有关照片的知识。 教师板书课题。

二、New Concepts

1、演一演，找一名学生，教师悄悄说library,这名学生扮作去找一本书并且去读这本书。教师拍照。然后教师说：This is

(名字)at the

(地点)，并板书。让其他同学自告奋勇重复此游戏，然后全班同学猜地名并用这个句型说句子。

2、阅读课文.同学们想知道课文中都有什么照片吗?多媒体出示课文内容,第一遍学生一边看一边听,第二遍学生只听录音.然后学生默读课文,并回答问题.

3、操练.利用词卡袋和词卡向学生展示怎样做句型替换: This is

at the

.教师一边说出单词,一边指向这些单词.然后找成对的自告奋勇的学生上来,边指着单词边读句子.这些学生轮流相互替换句子中的名字和教师指示的词汇卡片上的地点名称(restaurant shop school claroom gym city library house apartment hotel ).

4、情景练习.将全班分成若干小组,让每组学生设计场景,假设拍一张照片,然后叙述这张“照片”.教师需强调:虽然我们说This is

(名字)at the

(地点).(用一般现在时),但谈论的照片的动作是过去时.

三、Cla Closing

1、布置作业：画或者找四幅照片，用今天学到的句型进行描述，写在照片的下面。

2、唱一首英语歌曲结束教学。板书设计：

Leon28 :Jenny‘s

and Danny‘s

Pictures This is

at the

.课后反思：

Leon 29 : Gifts for Everyone

一、教学目标

1．知识目标：理解运用单词：gift

2、能力目标：运用gift编对话，培养学生语言运用能力。

3．情感目标：在合作中学习知识，培养学生学习英语的兴趣，帮助学生养成合作学习的态度。

二、教学重难点：

重点：理解运用单词gift。

难点：运用gift编对话。

三、教学准备：收音机，教师卡片，磁带。学生自带的礼物。

四、教学过程

Cla opening and review 1.Greeting。

2.Game―Draw and gue‖ 复习第二册中玩具的单词。

3.实物练习：复习教室中物品名称。New concepts 1.Introduce

Lead a dialogue ：

T：This is a gift.A gift .What is this ?（ Read after me：gift ） T：I like gifts .Do you like gifts？（Please answer me ） T：Who is this gifts for ?

2.学生利用自带的礼物进行链式操练 ： S 1：This is a gift .It’s for you ! S 2：Thank you !

S 1：You’re welcome!

S 2：This is a gift .It’s for you ! S 3：Thank you !

S 2：You’re welcome!

3.Use the tape and student‘s book.听录音，理解课文： What gift for Steven? What gift for Kim?

What gift does Jenny give Mr.Wood? What gift does Danny give Mr.Wood? 4.Practice ：make up a dialogue.

将全班分成若干小组，让学生编排关于送礼物的对话。表演时检查学生的理解情况。 5.Use the activity book .Cla closing.

板书设计

Leon 29 : Gifts for Everyone

a kite

Steven

gift

a hat

Kim

a picture

Mr.Wood

a T-shirt

Mr.Wood 课后反思：

Leon 30：A letter from Li Ming

一、教学目标

a、知识与技能：复习书信写法及动词过去式。 b、过程与方法：通过写信复习本单元重点。

c、情感态度价值观：培养学生对中、英文信的格式的正确书写习惯。

二、教学重难点：书信格式、动词过去式

三、教具学具准备：录音机教学卡片 旅游照片

四、教学过程

（一）Cla opening and review

1、Greeting。

2、Game“Simon says”。Review the words：jump、sleep、take a picture and so on。

（二）New concepts Use the pictures and review some words about the letter（letter, postcard，e－mail,top,bottom,left, right,corner,envelope,stamp）

Ask the students to understand the letter and read it then find the past－tense verbs。 Practice：

先让学生结组以Danny或Jenny的身份用汉语组织语言试着口头回信，然后在让每个组试着给LiMing写英文回信，并回答信中的问题，最后各组在全班进行交流。（同学之间互相取长补短，吸取他人写信时好的方式方法，如附加图片等。） 教师针对以上交流，随时进行指导纠正。 Play the audiotape and read after it。 Practice：

让学生试着介绍自己提前准备好的旅游照片。

（三）Cla closing

Homework：Do the activity book

五、

板书设计

Leon 30：A letter from LiMing had-have liked-like jumped-jump was-is were-are

课后反思：

leon 31.Are You Ready for a Quiz ?

一、教学目标

a、知识与技能：完成本课所涉及的小测试;学生能够读懂故事书中的小故事。 b、过程与方法：通过小测试及故事理解，提高学生的阅读及听力理解能力。 c、情感态度价值观：培养英语学习的兴趣，提高学生的英语综合水平。

二、教学重点：能准确回答书中的问题，听懂并理解故事内容，顺利完成相关练习。

三、教具学具准备： 录音机、故事书、教学卡片

四、教学过程

（一）Cla opening and review

1、Greeting。

2、Review：Irregular past-tense verbs and regular past-tense verbs.

3、Chant：What did you do？ Listen、read and plus the action

4、Quiz：a.Use the quiz as the listening exercise.The students finish it on the paper.Play the tape twice.Then check for understanding. b.Ask them to write the answer below each question .

（二）Story：A gift for little Zeke Prepare to read

Ask the cla to look at the picture in the story. Questions：Is Little Zeke happy or sad? Why? „„

Read the story

Play the audiotape twice and check for understanding.Discu the story

Do Little Zeke want a gift? Who gives Little Zeke a gift? What is the gift? „„

Use the activity book.

Ask the students to listen carefully. Play the tape twice.

（通过有目的的提问及讨论，学生带着问题去听、去理解故事内容，在故事教学中听说读写四个方面都得以训练。）

（三）Cla Closing Main idea of the story.

五、板书设计

Leon 31: Are you ready for a quiz?

规则动词和不规则动词过去式的教学卡片 课后反思：

Leon :32

Again，Please！ 教学目标：

1、知识技能：

（1）读、写、运用下列动词的过去式:

ate, saw, went，walked, talked, liked, played, worked, shopped, jumped, looked, pointed, helped （2）掌握并运用句型: This is ____ at the ____.What happened?

2、过程方法：

同学们介绍旅行中的趣事，培养学生的语言运用能力和表达能力。采用小组合作式、体验式等多种学习方式，通过竞赛游戏、表演等环节使学生理解掌握词汇及句型。

3、情感目标：

培养学生较好的文化意识与英语语感。在教学中要特别加强国情教育，爱国主义、集体主义教育。增强他们的爱国情操。小组合作，互相帮助，培养学生的合作能力。 教学重点：

运用本单元学习的动词的过去式及句型。 教学难点：

介绍自己的旅途趣事并编对话。 教具准备：

录音机、磁带、学生的旅游照片 教学过程：

一、热身

1、Greeting.

2、reviews: ①快乐过去式我来猜。（把学生分两组，进行竞赛。） ②利用录音机播放故事，做秘密词汇游戏。

3、Talking: Where did you go last summer? Did you have a good trip?

二、练习

1、示范。

拿起一名同学的旅游照片，进行对话： T；Do you like to go on a trip? S；Yes, I do.T；Where is here? S；It is ＿.T；It is a famous city.Where did you go in ＿? S；I went to ＿、＿ and ＿.T；What did you do in ＿? S；I looked in shops.I eat snacks.I bought many gifts. T；What a nice trip!

2、小组内活动。

①小组内成员利用旅游照片进行问答练习。可利用如下句型： On your trip, what did you see? What did you do in ＿ ?

Are you happy in ＿? Did you have a good trip? What happened?

②谈论自己的旅行趣事。用上句型This is ＿ at the ＿.③设置旅游回来的情境，学生编对话并进行表演。

三、测试

做活动手册第32课。

四、结束课堂教学 写下自己的旅行趣事。 板书设计：

Leon :32

Again，Please！ On your trip, what did you see?

What did you do in ＿ ? Are you happy in ＿? Did you have a good trip? What happened? This is ＿ at the ＿.课后反思：

第17篇：冀教版九年级英语下册教案

Leon 1: Poetry, Please Mastery words and expreions: poem, decide, nature, expre,

learn/know …by heart, pleased, happine, shut

Oral words and expreions: poetry, description, continue, beyond Teaching Aims: 1.Learn about the poems in foreign countries.2.Know the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.How to make suggestions.2.The grammar: infinitives.3.Some words and expreions: learn/know …by heart Teaching Difficult Points: The grammar: infinitives Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK AOBUT IT”.

Let the students talk about the questions in groups. 1.Have you written a poem in Chinese? Is it hard? Why? 2.What kinds of poetry do you like best? After a while, let the students in each group present their ideas to the cla in front of the cla.Step2: Listen to the tape and find the answers to the questions: 1.Have Brian finished his poem? 2.What’s Danny’s poem about? Step3: Reading task: 1.Read the text and underline the new words in this leon.2.Present the meanings of the words with the help of the media computer.We can use our body language if neceary.3.Tell the main idea of this leon.Step4: Read the text again and decide the statements are true or false.1.Jenny wrote a Chinese poem.2.Brian wrote a poem about nature.3.Danny learned his poem by heart.Step5: Deal with the language points.How to make a suggestion: Maybe you could write a description of your favourite place.The infinitives: I haven’t decided what to write about.Would you like to hear my poem? I don’t need to read it.

Let the students sum the use of infinitives of this leon.Then encourage them to make more sentences with the grammar.Step6: Activities 1.Divide the cla into several groups.Then let them translate a Chinese poem written by Li Bai or other famous poets.Then compare the translations of the groups.Let’s see which is the best? 2.Each group writes an English poem about the familiar things around us.Then let them change the poems in groups.They may give their own advice to the poems written by others.Step7: Describe the picture in English.

Ask the students work in their formal groups.Then let them read their poems in cla loudly.Step8: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Work with a partner.Let the students talk about the question: which do you think is more difficult to understand, English poetry or Chinese poetry? Homework 1.Finish off the activity book.2.Get more information about the English poetry after cla.Feedback：

The students more little of the English, so that the teacher provides them more information about the English poetry is very neceary.We can use the Internet to help us.The teacher should stimulate the students’ interests about the English poetry.The students can have more time to search more information on the Internet after cla. Blackboard Design

Leon 2: Poems About Nature Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: hill, clear, brave, pale, golden, softly, ki, noisy Oral words and expreions: swiftly, tiny, warmth, scene, related, topic Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ gueing ability of the whole text.2.Enjoy the charming of the English poetry.3.Compare the differences between the English and Chinese poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn the English poetry about nature by hearty.2.Know how to write an English poem.Teaching Difficult Points: Use what we learn to write an English poem.Teaching Aids: audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Divide the cla into several groups.Talk about the next questions: Have you read any poems in English? Which one do you like best? Why? What should you do first if you want to write a poem about winter? Choose several best poems and let the students read them in front of the cla.Show some pictures of winter to the students.Help them to find more words to describe winter.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.1.Does the poem make you think of _______? 2.You can write a poem about _______, too.3.Before you start writing your poetry, think about your _______.Step3: Read the text and find the new words.1.Let the students gue the meanings of the new words.Most of the new words are related nature.So present some pictures to the students to help them understand the new words.2.Ask some students to tell the main idea of this text.Step4: Do with the language points.Make sentences with the new words we learn in this text.Ask if someone can tell a story with the words we learn today.Encourage them to stand in front of the cla and tell his story to us.Step5: Reading task Encourage the students to ask questions about this text.Finish the task in groups.Let the students design questions and exchange them in groups.They can ask questions like this: 1.What are your ideas for a nature poem? 2.What can you do to describe about something? Step6: Activities.Work in groups.

Write a poem about the two pictures.Finish a poem.Then each student in the group correct it before reading it to the cla.Step7: Come to “LET’S DO IT!”

The task is similar to the step6.Finish it in cla.Try to write a poem about one of the seasons.The teacher shows some pictures about the seasons to the students. Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Feedback：

It is fun and interesting to write a poem in English.The teacher tries to write a poem and presents it to the cla.Let the students correct it if they have any good ideas.Some students are interested in English, and they are also interested in poems.So give them more chances to create their minds.Blackboard Design

Leon 3: Say It in Three Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: direction, form, poet, simply, a set number of, middle, clearly, dark, sleepy, unexpected, frog, feeling Oral words and expreions: petal, cherry, grebe, Matsuo Basho, Haiku, particular, pattern, set, syllable, interruption, plop, splash, limerick, Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ reading comprehension.2.Know more about the foreign culture.3.Compare the differences between the Chinese and Japanese poems.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn about an old style of Japanese poem: Haiku.2.Know some styles of poems: Haiku, Nature Poem and Limerick.Teaching Difficult Points: The old form of Japanese poetry: Haiku.Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Show pictures of Japanese poets and poems.Then introduce Haiku to the students.The teacher can find some music to match the poem.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.Usually Haikus are about _______.Haiku always has ______ lines.The first line of a Haiku has _______ syllables.Check the answers in cla in oral.Step3: Read the text and gue the meanings of the new words.Sometimes some new words are too hard to understand, so the teacher can find some related pictures to help them.

If the students bring some pictures about nature to the cla, let them show them in front of the cla.Step4: Read the text and find the answers to the questions: 1.Do Haikus tell a story? 2.What’s a syllable? Step5: Come to “PROJECT”.

1.Divide the cla into groups to finish the task.2.Finish the three poems in the text.Use the sentence: I need a ______.Let the others give the answers, one student write the words down.3.After finishing the poems, read it to the cla.All the groups have different poems.Do they sound funny? 4.Decide a subject by each group.Then make a pattern according to the subject.Then finish the poem as the models in the text.5.Read the poem to the cla.Homework: 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Feedback:

Some students may think the foreign poems are funny and easy.The teacher may also think so.It is poible for the students to create poems like those we have learned in the cla.Give them more chances to create their minds.The teacher can try some poems, too.The cla and the teacher can find much fun in learning foreign poems.Blackboard Design：

Leon 4: The Wish Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: wish, in the middle of, stone, friendship, Teaching Aims: 1.Learn how to sing foreign songs.2.Know more about the foreign culture.3.Learn about the styles of all kinds of poems in other countries.Teaching Important Points: 1.Master the main idea of the song.2.Grasp the use of “without”.3.Make a similar song like this.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of “without”.

Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Listen to the tape for several times.At the same time, ask the students to sing after it.Test how long they grasp the rhythm of the song.Step2: Read the song as a poem.Let the students read the poem as a lyric line by line.Step3: Make a poem like this.

Divide the cla into several groups.Make the similar this.Every group makes a poem.Then present it to the cla.If the others have other better ideas, they can give their advice.Step4: Do with the language points.

Make sentences with the important phrases: in the middle, without.

S1: Danny sits in the middle of the claroom.

S2: There is a stone in the middle of the road.

S3: Fish can’t live without water.

S4: We can’t finish the work without your help.Step5: Come to “PROJECT”.

Finish the task in groups.

1.Everyone in the group chooses one pattern of these poems and writes one by yourself.

2.After writing the poem, show it to the others in the group.

3.Each exams the others’ poems and gives his advice.

4.After examine all of their poems, change them with the other group.Give their reasonable advice.

5.The teacher gives them chances to expre themselves.Homework：

1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Feedback: The students are familiar to the Chinese poetry, but the foreign ones are hard for them.When the students practice, the teacher should give them a hand if neceary.It is a challenge for the Chinese students to write foreign poems.Encourage them more in order to stimulate their interests of learning English.Blackboard Design:

Leon 5: That’s a Funny Limerick!

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: both…and… Oral words and expreions: blank, motion Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ ability of learning by themselves.2.Master one of the patterns of foreign poems.3.Compare the differences between the Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know more about the limerick.2.Learn more words about describing weight, size, feeling and age.Teaching Difficult Points: Know how to write a limerick.Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Let the students answer the questions in cla in oral.1.Ask several students to say funny sayings in English.If they can’t expre themselves in English, they can say them in Chinese.

2.Let some students tell jokes.Encourage them to tell jokes in English.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.

1._______ and _______ help Jenny fill in the blanks in her limerick.2.They choose _______ to describe the weight.Step3: Read and get the main idea of the text.1.Let the students scan the text.Then tell the main idea of the text.2.Find the new words and gue their meanings according to the text.Step4: Do with some language points.Either…or…, both…and…

Let some students make sentences with the help of the pictures.S1: He eats either apples or oranges.S2: Either he or I am good at dancing.S3: Both his teachers and his parents love him.S4: Susan loves both reading and listening.Step5: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Limerick is a kind of poem that has a pattern.Study the “Limerick”.Get the results.1.There are five lines in the limerick.2.From Jenny’s limerick, we can see the first, second and fifth lines have rhyme.Look in the library or search on the Internet to find some information about limericks.Show them to the cla and let them find the patterns of “limerick”.

3.Let different groups act the dialogue out in front of the cla.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Feedback:

Limerick is fun.It’s interesting for the students.The students may like to practice it very much.Everyone writes a limerick.The cla will be full of laughter.Ask the students to begin the similar dialogue in cla to practice the limerick.Blackboard Design

Leon 6: Say It in Five Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: create, single, thought Oral words and expreions: fur, stretch, hum, adjective Teaching Aims: 1.Improve the students’ listening and reading abilities. 2.Know more about the foreign poetry.3.Learn the American five-line poems.Teaching Important Points: 1.Grasp the pattern of the five-line poem.2.Use the pattern to describe something.Teaching Difficult Points: Use the pattern to describe something.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

We all know Chinese poetry has different kinds of patterns.Let the students give some examples.Step2: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Who created the five-line poem? 2.How many poems does the text show us? Finish the listening part in cla in oral.Step3: Reading task: Read and tell the main idea of the text.This is a game to practice the students’ memories.It can improve the students’ summary abilities.Step4: Read and decide the statements are true or false.1.Today we learn a pattern of French poetry.2.The second line has three words.3.The topic of the poem is a noun.Finish the questions in cla in oral.Step5: Activity: Show some pictures to the students.Let them the favourite one to describe.They can work in pairs.Then show their poems to the cla. It’s easy to finish the task, but it is hard to do it well.Step6: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.Work in groups of three or four students.1.Say the differences between a Haiku and a five-line poem.Say about their different forms and different patterns.A haiku is just a description of a scene.It is simply what is happening in this place, at this moment.Five-line poem has five lines.It is always about a single topic.Each line has a set number of words.The first line has one word.The second line has two words.The third, or middle, line has three words.The fourth line has four words.The last line has one word.2.Finish the task in groups.Choose one topic as they like.Then exchange the poems among the groups.Step7: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Ask the students to find more topics after cla.Summary:

We learn different kinds of foreign poetry.They are limericks, five-line poems and Haiku.The students may think they are very interesting.Some students have surprising poems that you didn’t think of.Give them more chances to practice so that they can create their minds.

Leon 7: Trading Poems Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: awake, riddle Oral words and expreions: avenue Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about the foreign culture.2.Create the student’s cooperation ability.Teaching Important Points: 1.Master the written style, letter.2.Learn the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Difficult Points: Write a letter with what we learn in this unit.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Show the type of the letter.Let the students sum how to write a letter.Pay attention to the written style of the envelope.Step2: Listening task Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.1._______ is a beautiful way to expre thoughts and feelings.2.Danny’s teacher says Danny’s always saying _______ things.Let the students listen to the tape and finish the listening task in cla in oral.Step3: Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Does Danny think it is hard to write a poem? 2.Did Li Ming write back to Danny? Ask the students scan the text and answer the questions.Step4: Practice Write a letter to your friends about what we learn in this unit.The teacher encourages them to write a poem to their friend, too.It’s hard, so they can choose any topic that they like.They only write for friends.We don’t need to demand too much.Step5: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish the task in groups of three or four students.In a small group, write a poem like the one in Li Ming’s postcard.

1.First, choose a word your group like.They can choose any word that they like.Because the task is to begin a poem with the letters in this word, everyone can write a word on a piece of paper.Then they can choose one from these.2.Use each letter in this word to begin a line of our poem.Everyone in the group can write different poem according to the word.Then they can exchange their poems and give advice to each other.3.Make a poster to display your poems on the wall.It takes some time to design the poster.

4.Which one do you think is the best? Give your reasons.

Let the students choose the best poem that they like best and give their reasons in front of the cla.Step6: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The last poem that we learn in Li Ming’s postcard is very interest

Leon 8: Unit Review

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions from Leon1 to Leon7.Oral words and expreions from Leon1 to Leon7.Teaching Aims: 1.Improve the students’ ability of using what we learn in this unit.2.Stimulate the students’ mind of learning about Chinese and foreign poetry.3.Know the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Making suggestions.2.Master the use of infinitives.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of infinitives.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: review leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Listen to some beautiful poems in Chinese or in English.Music usually creates atmosphere for the students.

If anyone can recite some English poems, the teacher can give them chances to recite in front of the cla.Step2: Do the exercises in Leon8.At the same time, the teacher walks in the claroom and see if they have any trouble to solve.Step3: Let the students write some difficulties on the blackboard.Then let’s try to solve them together.

The most important grammar is the infinitive.For example: I haven’t decided what to write.

Li Ming has something important to do, so he can’t come to your party.My wish is to go to space.It’s not easy to walk against a strong wind.Step4: Practice the spoken English.Make a similar dialogue according to the Speaking the Language part.It’s how to make suggestions.

Ask the students work in pairs to make up dialogues like this.Then present it in front of the cla.Step5: Play “Story Game’.

Work in groups to finish the task.When the students play the game, the teacher walks around the claroom and see if any group needs help.At last, ask each group presents their stories to the others in front of the cla.Whose story is the funniest? Step6: Homework 1.Finish the exercises in activity book.2.Preview the next leon.Summary:

Poetry is an important part of culture.So it is useful to learn it well.This unit gives us opportunities to practice.Making suggestions is important, too.So let the students make dialogues to practice it.The teacher should pay attention to the infinitives in this unit.We should practice more in this cla.

Leon 9: What’s a “Horkey”?

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: helpful, at the same time Oral words and expreions: DNA, combine, juicy, mule, donkey Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about cloning. 2.How to combine two different things.Teaching Important Points:

1.Talk about the ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunctions.3.Combine two different things.Teaching Difficult Points: Talk about the ability and inability.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in the cla by showing some pictures about combining to the students.They may be about different things, such as food, fruit, animals and other things.

Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Can Danny combine a donut and a pizza? 2.Who wants to combine a cow and a chick? Let the students answer the questions with the help of the pictures.Finish the task in oral in cla.Step3.Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct words. 1.We can combine two different ______ or two different ______.2.Brian would combine ______ and ______.Look through the whole text quickly and answer the questions in cla in oral.Step4.Encourage the students find the new words in this leon.Give more examples and let the students understand more about the words.I would combine a donut and a pizza.Then I could have breakfast and lunch together.Then I would have little, juicy bananas.Do you know what a mule is? It has a horse as mother and a donkey as a father.Step5.Read the text again and encourage them to find more questions about the text.One student stands up and asks a question.The others who want to answer can stand up and answer it as quickly as he can.For example: 1.What would you combine? 2.What about combining a duck and a deer? 3.Can we combine apples and bananas? Step6.Come to “PROJECT”.

Finish the task in groups of three or four students.Think about something that is combined by two different things.Each of the group writes his answer down and shows it to others.Then choose the most meaningful one to study.What will your group combine? What if you combine the two things? What can it do for us? What’s its advantage? Talk about the questions above, then sum their ideas.Give a report in front of the cla.Demonstrate your ideas.Describe the thing that you combine in detail.Describe its advantages and disadvantages.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary In this leon, we learn to combine two different things together.In order to get new living things, we must make full use of our imagination.What can the things that we combine are used for? It is important for us to discu.During the discuion, we practice our spoken English.

Leon 10: What is DNA? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: generally, twin, clone, not only…but also Oral words and expreions: blueprint, identical, egg, identify Teaching Aims: 1.Know how to write a paage on science.2.Learn something about DNA.3.Know more about our body.Teaching Important Point: 1.Master the words and expreions of this leon.2.The ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Point: The use of DNA.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in the text by discuing what DNA is.Divide the cla into several groups.Then talk about the subject for several minutes.Then one of the groups presents their opinions in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task:

Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words you hear.1.Generally speaking, a ______ is a drawing.2.______ for identical twins, each living thing has its own unique DNA.Play the tape once.Then let the students try to finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text quickly and answer the following questions: 1.Where does your DNA come from? 2.Is your DNA in every part of your body? Finish the reading task in cla in oral.Try to get more information about the text at the same time.Step4.Read the text again.Find the sentences with the new words.Try to create situation about the new words.Then make sentences with the new words.If someone can make a whole story with the new words that we learn in this leon, the teacher must encourage her. The sentences with the new words: Generally speaking, a blueprint is a drawing.Identical twins are two children that grew from the same egg.They are clones.From your DNA, scientists can identify not only you, but also people related to you.Step5.Let some students tell some details about the text. What is DNA?

Where is your DNA from? What is DNA used for? Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish the task with a partner.Find the things about you that show your parents’ DNA.Talk about if for a while.Then let some volunteers come to the front to talk about the subject.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

You look like your father or your mother.That identifies the DNA of your body from your parents.DNA is very fascinating.Each living thing has its own unique DNA.Try to find more ways to use the DNA in many fields.Discu the use of DNA in this cla.Make full use of it to help more people in the world in more fields

Leon 11: Cloning People? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: exactly, divide, crazy Oral words and expreions: human being, original, adult, Dolly, insect Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about cloning.2.Create the students’ spirit of cooperation.Teaching Important Points: 1.The advantages and disadvantages of cloning.2.The expreion of ability and disability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Points: The advantages and disadvantages of cloning.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure:

Step1: Show a picture of Dolly.Then let the students discu what our life will be if we make a clone of ourselves.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Discu for five minutes.Then present their results to the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words you hear.1.The clones are the ______ height.2.There are ______ ways to clone people.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false(F).1.We can make clones from dead animals.2.Each clone would be a different person.3.We can combine the DNA of pigs and dogs.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Pair work: Read the text again and find more details about the text.Try to solve the following problems.Talk about them with your partner.At the same time, encourage them to ask more questions about the text.How many ways are there to clone people? What are they? Do you want a clone of your self? Why? What is the use of cloning? Try to finish it in a limited time in order to improve their comprehension ability.Step5.Read the text by the students.Give the students time to listen to the tape again.Then make a chance for them to practice in front of the cla. Step6.A debate Divide the cla into two groups.One group is for the advantages of cloning.The other is for the disadvantages of cloning.The teacher designs the task in order to find out the meanings of cloning.Step 7.Come to “LET’S DO IT’.

This task is similar to the one is step6.This topic is about the food.The students can use their imaginations.Of course the best way is to search on the Internet for more information about the subject.Step8.Homework 1.Search more information about cloning on the Internet or in the newspaper.

2.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.Summary:

Cloning is a popular subject in the modern society.It is good for the students to know more about that.Encourage the students to find out more information on the Internet.They can use other tools to get more.Give them chances to present their results in the next leon.Leon 12: Did You Ever See a “Chorse”?

Teaching Content: There are no new words and expreions in this leon.Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about combining.2.Find the differences between the Chinese and foreign songs.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreion of ability and disability.2.The use of coordinating conjunctions.3.Sing the song fluently.Teaching Difficult Points: Combine two different living things.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Show some pictures of animals to the students.Let them imagine what animals what animals they would like to combine. What would they look like? What are they used for? Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Then discu the questions for five minutes.After a while, show their results to the cla in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the song and repeat after it.Play the tape for several times.Let the students to be familiar to the rhythm of the song.Step3.Read the song as a lyric.Then let the students make up other similar songs according to their imagination. Let some volunteers present their song to the cla.

Step4.Let the students try to sing the song together.Play the tape again.Ask them to sing after it for several times again. Step5.Ask some volunteers to sing in front of the cla. Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.Work in a small group to finish the task.

Use the pattern in the song to tell customers about your new animals.Describe the new animals in the following ways.What animals will you combine? What is the new animal look like? What are they used for? What will you name them? At last, they can present their result in words or in pictures.Let the students talk about the subject for five minutes.Then let one of the members come to the front and present their result.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Practice the song after cla. Summary:

This song is about combining.Combine two different things together by changing their DNA.It is a new technique.We must make full use of it in many ways.The students today are the future scientists and engineers.So let them know more about coming is good for them.Give them more chance to search after cla.Help them to use many tools to teach themselves.

Leon 13: Clones Are the Same Teaching Content: Oral words and expreions: laboratory Teaching Aims:

1.Practice the students’ spoken English.2.Create the students’ imaginations.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know more about cloning.2.The expreion of ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Points: The expreion of ability and inability.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Talk about the question “What would you like to clone?” in groups.They can use the following patterns: What would you like to clone? Why? Give the students five minutes.Then let them act their dialogues out in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Jenny would like to clone a dog.2.Danny would clone himself.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Scan the text and answer the following questions: 1.What would Jenny like to clone? 2.What would Brian like to clone? 3.Why would Danny like to clone himself? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and find the main idea of the text.Ask some students to say it in front of the cla.Step5.A Game Make up a similar dialogue according to the text.Finish the task in groups of three or four.Give them five minutes.And then ask the students to present their dialogues in front of the cla.Step6.Discuion Discu the use of the clones of yourself.If you have a clone of yourself, what would you like him to do for you? Do you think it is very useful? Step7.Come to “PROJECT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Talk about the subject “Have you heard of cloned animals?” The next is “If you are a scientist, what would you like to clone? Why?”

Talk about the subjects in groups.The students may have five minutes to finish the task.Then try to present your result to the cla in front of the cla.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Cloning is new to some students.It is useful to give them more time to talk about the subject.They can find more information about cloning on the Internet or with other tools.Encourage them to know more after cla by themselves

Leon 14: A Clone of My Own Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: secret, copy, doubt, stupid, che, robot Oral words and expreions: foolish, flute, closet, prefer, play che, prefer…to… Teaching Aims:

1.Improve the students’ written ability.2.Create the students’ imaginations.Teaching Important Points: 1.Imagine the use of cloning in our daily life.2.The expreion of ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions. Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Talk about the question: Would you like to have a clone of yourselves? Why? Finish the task in groups.Give the students five minutes to discu the subject.Then let the students present it in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the flowing questions: 1.How old is Kate? 2.What does “foolish” mean? Finish the task in cla in oral.

Step3.Scan the text and decide the following statements are True or False: 1.Katie would like a secret clone.2.Katie already has three sisters.3.Katie’s clone would live the living room with Katie.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and try to find the sentences with the new words.What does Katie mean by “a secret clone”? I doubt what she says! “Foolish” means “silly or stupid”.Also, she would play che with me.Maybe I need a robot! She would feed my tow cats, clean my room and practise my flute. Step5.Ask some students to tell the main idea of the text.Let some students say it in front of the cla.Step6.Group Work Talk about the subject in groups.Talk for about five minutes.If you have a clone of yourself, what would you like her or him to do for you? Write what you think of down on a piece of paper.Then exchange their ideas in groups.One of the members sum what they think of.Then present it in front of the cla.Step7.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish the task in pairs.Make up a dialogue with a partner and act it out in front of the cla.

Encourage them to make the story funny. Make the ending surprising.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

It is fun to give the students chances to speak in front of the cla.Sometimes they think they are not happy in their daily life.They don’t want to do something sometimes, so they want someone else to do it for him or her.Maybe some students think clones of themselves are useful to them.

Leon 15: Cloning Questions

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: neither, nor, neither…nor…, dead Oral words and expreions: mammoth Teaching Aims:

1.Be familiar to the e-mail.2.Know more about cloning.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreions of ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by showing some pictures of cloning.Let the students talk about the use of cloning. What is cloning? What is cloning used for? What can we do with cloning? Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.What did Li Ming study this week in school? 2.What’s the name of the first cloned animal? Ask the students to answer the questions in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text and decide the statements are True or False.1.Li Ming doesn’t think cloning is interesting.2.Li Ming knew how the sheep Dolly cloned.3.Jenny has ever studied cloning.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and find the sentences with the new words.Let the students gue the meanings of the new words.Give more examples with the new words.I knew that English scientists had cloned a sheep, but I knew neither how nor why.I chose mammoths.Ask the students to make sentences with neither…nor… He is neither a teacher nor a doctor.Neither he nor I am thirteen years old.Step5.Sum the main idea of the two e-mails.Let the students tell them in their own words, not word by word according to the content of the e-mails. Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Use the Internet or other tools to find more information about cloning.

Talk about what, where, when, why and how cloning is taking place.Everyone writes down a short paage, then exchange it with the others.Next one of the members of the group gives a report in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Ask your parents for some information about cloning.Summary:

Cloning is new to the students.Let them get more information on the Internet.That is helpful for them.It is helpful for them to use the Internet for some important information.On th the coordination conjunctions are important in this unit.So make more practice in cla.

Leon 16: Unit Review Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions in this unit.Oral words and expreions in this unit.Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to use the Internet and other tools to search more information.2.Know more about cloning.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreion of ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: review leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Group work Talk about the question in groups.“What do you like to clone the most? Why?” Let the students write their opinions down on a piece of paper.Then exchange their opinions.At last, one of the members sums the opinions and gives a report in front of the cla.Step2.Finish the exercises in this leon.Find out the problems and write them down on the blackboard.

Discu the problem together and find out the correct way to solve the problems.Step3.Do with “Grammar in Use”.

Let the students finish the exercises.Then ask the students to make some sentences with neither…nor…, not only…but also….Not only he but also his father is handsome.Neither my mother nor my father likes this kind of fruit.Step4.Come to “Speaking the Language”.

Complete the dialogue.Then ask the students to make a similar dialogue with his partner.Then present it in front of the cla. Step5.Play the game “Stop-Go”

Play the game in front of the cla.Start the game with 10 volunteers from the cla.Play the game to practice the “ability and inability” expreions on this page.Change the students to play the game if the time is enough.Step6.Group work Divide the cla into several groups.Ask them to introduce themselves in the group.Then choose two best ones to present in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Find out more information about cloning on the Internet.Summary:

This unit is designed to review the main language points in this unit.It is used to build the vocabulary of the unit.Practice the grammars and spoken English in this unit.All those are put in a situation of cloning.Cloning is a new subject for the students.It is very interesting to discu.

Leon 17: Do Mistakes Matter? Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: pardon, mention, pocket, double, mistake, make a mistake, depend, common Oral words and expreions: Bruce, confused, confusing, depend on, bargaining Teaching aims: 1.Know the cultural differences between China and western countries.2.Improve the students’ abilities of speaking English.Teaching Important Points:

1.Target language: I made a mistake.He looks confused.Buying things in China is confusing.2.Train the students’ focus abilities and cooperation spirit.Teaching Difficult Points: the difficult cultures of different countries Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching procedures: Step1.Lead in The teacher shows some pictures to the students with the Multi-media computer.The pictures show the differences between China and Western countries. From the people’s appearance and the colour of the skin，We can tell the differences.The others show cultural differences.We use chopsticks but they use the fork and knives.Divide the cla into several groups and finish the task.Encourage the students to speak more.They can use their own pictures to help them. Step2.Listening task

Listen to the text and answer the following question: 1.Where is Bruce from? 2.What does Bruce’s father do?

3.How much does Li Ming pay for the two pops? 4.How much did Bruce pay for one pop?

Ask the students to listen carefully and answer the questions.We can arrange the students to listen to the part that is connected with the two questions.Step3.Read and find the new words: He looks confused.

Buying things in China is confusing. I made a mistake.

Let the students try to make sentences with the new words. Step4.Reading task:

Read the text again and answer the questions: What are Bruce and Li Ming doing? Is Bruce confusing?

Where don’t people try to change the price, in China or in North America?

Encourage the students to ask more questions by themselves. Step5.Fill in the blanks with the right forms of the words given. 1.My brother is _______(迷惑的). 2.It is so ______(迷惑的) a thing. 3.Does he often ______(犯错误)?

This part is used to check if they have grasped the new words. Step6.Activity

Suppose you and Bruce are shopping, you are bargaining with the clerk.Bruce can bargain, too.

Divide the cla into several groups and talks about the questions.After a while, let the students act their out in front of the cla.

Encourage the students to speak loudly in front of the cla.Choose the best group and praise them.Step7.Think about: What’s the difference between people in China and North America when they are shopping?

Use the formal group to finish the task.When the students discu, the teacher walks around the claroom to see if they need any help. Step8.Talk about: Where would you like to buy things, in shopping center or market? Let them debate the questions.As usual, the cla can be divided into two groups.One group thinks the shopping center is good.The other thinks the market is better.Let them debate for five minutes.Then let one student in each group to sum the opinions of his own group. Step9.Homework

Find more information about the differences between China and western countries. Summary:

This interesting text is about bargaining in China.It’s based on the different cultures between Chinese and Western countries.In some countries in North America, people don’t try to bargain, so some foreign friends feel confused when they buy things in China.Try to help them when you meet foreigners.Try to find more differences between Chinese and Western countries on the Internet.

Leon 18: Wait! Don’t Eat Yet!

Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: society, politely, manner, especially, unle, polite, fork, serve, forever, act, compare, theirs Oral words and expreions: custom, tablecloth, rude, toothpick, Spaghetti, sauce Teaching Aims: 1.Find the differences between the Chinese and Western customs at table.2.Cultivate the students’ creation and cooperation spirit.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreions of similarities and differences.2.Grasp the Past Future Tense. Teaching Difficult Points: The expreions of similarities and differences.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching Procedures: Step1.Lead in: a pair work.

The teacher asks the students the following question: Have you ever traveled to other places? Where have you been?

Show some pictures with the help of the multi-media.The pictures are from Australia, France, China, England, America and Japan.

Let the students discu for 2 or 3 minutes.Then let them say in front of the cla.When the student is speaking, the others can ask him or her questions about his subject. Step2.Listening task Listen and answer the following questions: 1.Table manners in China and Canada are quite ______.2.In China, if your guests have no food on their plates, putting food on their plates is ______.3.It’s ______ to use a toothpick at the table.Finish the task in cla in oral.

Step3.Read the text and find out the sentences with the new words.All societies have customs about how to eat politely.We call these customs “table manners”.

It’s okay to eat it, especially if it’s something dry, like a piece of bread.In Canada, if you drop something on the tablecloth, you pick it up and put it on your plate.Parents are forever telling their children: “Don’t talk with your moth full!”

Step4.Reading task: Read the text and decide the statements are true or false.1.In China, if you drop something on the tablecloth, you usually pick it up and eat it.2.In Canada, to finish the food in front of the cla in rude.In China, everybody has a knife at the table.Exercises: Fill in the blanks with the right forms of the words given.1.I think______(sing) loudly at table is not polite.

2.It’s rude ______ (point) to the others when you eat at table.3.His mother said he ______ (return) the fork to the restaurant tomorrow.4.Nobody ______(know) the secret except me.Step6.Activity:

Project: What’s the story? 1.Find pictures in magazines.

2.Make up a quick story about your picture.

3.Trade your picture with the students from another group.Practice:

Show some pictures to the students.Let the students picture them.Show some different pictures in different situations.Let them give vivid description.When they finish one picture, try to show them the whole story.If we don’t have enough time, show them the main idea. Step8.Consolidation

Suppose you have a foreign friend.He will come to China.Make a chart.Write down his/her name, his nationality, his language and his aims.Show it to your partner, then finish it in cla.

Leon 19：Sayings

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: culture, several, action, fly, as soon as Oral words and expreions: saying, penny, earn, boil, hatch, judge, prevention, cure, worm, fence, spoil, broth, honey, vinegar, Nick, giggle Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about the differences between the Chinese and Western table manners.2.Train the students focus abilities.3.Cultivate the students’ cooperation abilities.Teaching Important Points:

1.Understanding the English saying.2.The expreions of similarities and differences. 3.The past future tense.Teaching Difficult Points: Learn the expreions of similarities and differences between Chinese and Western countries on table manners and sayings.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching Procedures: Step1.Lead in: The teacher begins the cla by discuing the question.It is a group activity.Ask the students to tell the manners at the table.

In the activity, the students will think of many funny stories.Give them chance to speak in front of the cla.Praise the groups that act well.Step2.Listening task: Listen and answer the following questions: 1.Who does Nick sit beside?

第18篇：冀教版九年级英语下册教案

冀教版九年级英语下册全套教案(48课)

Leon 1: Poetry, Please Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: poem, decide, nature, expre, learn/know …by heart, pleased, happine, shut Oral words and expreions: poetry, description, continue, beyond Teaching Aims: 1.Learn about the poems in foreign countries.2.Know the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.How to make suggestions.2.The grammar: infinitives.3.Some words and expreions: learn/know …by heart Teaching Difficult Points: The grammar: infinitives Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK AOBUT IT”.

Let the students talk about the questions in groups.

1.Have you written a poem in Chinese? Is it hard? Why? 2.What kinds of poetry do you like best? After a while, let the students in each group present their ideas to the cla in front of the cla.Step2: Listen to the tape and find the answers to the questions: 1.Have Brian finished his poem? 2.What’s Danny’s poem about? Step3: Reading task: 1.Read the text and underline the new words in this leon.Present the meanings of the words with the help of the media computer.We can use our body language if neceary.3.Tell the main idea of this leon.Step4: Read the text again and decide the statements are true or false.1.Jenny wrote a Chinese poem.2.Brian wrote a poem about nature.3.Danny learned his poem by heart.Step5: Deal with the language points.How to make a suggestion: Maybe you could write a description of your favourite place.The infinitives: I haven’t decided what to write about.Would you like to hear my poem? Do you really want to hear? I don’t need to read it.

Let the students sum the use of infinitives of this leon.Then encourage them to make more sentences with the grammar.Step5: Activities 1.Divide the cla into several groups.Then let them translate a Chinese poem written by Li Bai or other famous poets.Then compare the translations of the groups.Let’s see which is the best.2.Each group writes an English poem about the familiar things around us.Then let them change the poems in groups.They may give their own advice to the poems written by others.Step6: Describe the picture in English.

Ask the students work in their formal groups.Then let them read their poems in cla loudly.Step7: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Work with a partner.Let the students talk about the question: which do you think is more difficult to understand, English poetry or Chinese poetry? All of the students have seen much Chinese poetry, but few of them have seen English poetry.So present the students several English poems.Let them discu the mean ideas of the poems.Then let them finish the task.Step8: Homework 1.Finish off the activity book.2.Get more information about the English poetry after cla.Summary:

The students more little of the English, so that the teacher provides them more information about the English poetry is very neceary.We can use the Internet to help us.The teacher should stimulate the students’ interests about the English poetry.The students can have more time to search more information on the Internet after cla.

Leon 2: Poems About Nature Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: hill, clear, brave, pale, golden, softly, ki, noisy Oral words and expreions: swiftly, tiny, warmth, scene, related, topic Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ gueing ability of the whole text.2.Enjoy the charming of the English poetry.3.Compare the differences between the English and Chinese poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn the English poetry about nature by hearty.2.Know how to write an English poem.Teaching Difficult Points: Use what we learn to write an English poem.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Divide the cla into several groups.Talk about the next questions: Have you read any poems in English? Which one do you like best? Why? What should you do first if you want to write a poem about winter? Choose several best poems and let the students read them in front of the cla.Show some pictures of winter to the students.Help them to find more words to describe winter.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.1.Does the poem make you think of _______? 2.You can write a poem about _______, too.3.Before you start writing your poetry, think about your _______.Step3: Read the text and find the new words.1.Let the students gue the meanings of the new words.Most of the new words are related nature.So present some pictures to the students to help them understand the new words.2.Ask some students to tell the main idea of this text.Step4: Do with the language points.Make sentences with the new words we learn in this text.Ask if someone can tell a story with the words we learn today.Encourage them to stand in front of the cla and tell his story to us.Step5: Reading task Encourage the students to ask questions about this text.Finish the task in groups.Let the students design questions and exchange them in groups.They can ask questions like this: 1.What are your ideas for a nature poem? 2.What can you do to describe about something? Step6: Activities.Work in groups.

Write a poem about the two pictures.Finish a poem.Then each student in the group correct it before reading it to the cla.Step7: Come to “LET’S DO IT!”

The task is similar to the step6.Finish it in cla.Try to write a poem about one of the seasons.The teacher shows some pictures about the seasons to the students. Step8: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

It is fun and interesting to write a poem in English.The teacher tries to write a poem and presents it to the cla.Let the students correct it if they have any good ideas.Some students are interested in English, and they are also interested in poems.So give them more chances to create their minds.

Leon 3: Say It in Three Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: direction, form, poet, simply, a set number of, middle, clearly, dark, sleepy, unexpected, frog, feeling Oral words and expreions: petal, cherry, grebe, Matsuo Basho, Haiku, particular, pattern, set, syllable, interruption, plop, splash, limerick, adverb Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ reading comprehension.2.Know more about the foreign culture.3.Compare the differences between the Chinese and Japanese poems.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn about an old style of Japanese poem: Haiku.2.Know some styles of poems: Haiku, Nature Poem and Limerick.Teaching Difficult Points: The old form of Japanese poetry: Haiku.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Show pictures of Japanese poets and poems.Then introduce Haiku to the students.The teacher can find some music to match the poem.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.Usually Haikus are about _______.Haiku always has ______ lines.The first line of a Haiku has _______ syllables.Check the answers in cla in oral.Step3: Read the text and gue the meanings of the new words.Sometimes some new words are too hard to understand, so the teacher can find some related pictures to help them.

If the students bring some pictures about nature to the cla, let them show them in front of the cla.Step4: Read the text and find the answers to the questions: 1.Do Haikus tell a story? 2.What’s a syllable? Step5: Come to “PROJECT”.

1.Divide the cla into groups to finish the task.2.Finish the three poems in the text.Use the sentence: I need a ______.Let the others give the answers, one student write the words down.3.After finishing the poems, read it to the cla.All the groups have different poems.Do they sound funny? 4.Decide a subject by each group.Then make a pattern according to the subject.Then finish the poem as the models in the text.5.Read the poem to the cla.Step6: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary: Some students may think the foreign poems are funny and easy.The teacher may also think so.It is poible for the students to create poems like those we have learned in the cla.Give them more chances to create their minds.The teacher can try some poems, too.The cla and the teacher can find much fun in learning foreign poems.

Leon 4: The Wish Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: wish, in the middle of, stone, friendship, recite Teaching Aims: 1.Learn how to sing foreign songs.2.Know more about the foreign culture.3.Learn about the styles of all kinds of poems in other countries.Teaching Important Points: 1.Master the main idea of the song.2.Grasp the use of “without”.3.Make a similar song like this.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of “without”.

Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Listen to the tape for several times.At the same time, ask the students to sing after it.Test how long they grasp the rhythm of the song.Step2: Read the song as a poem.Let the students read the poem as a lyric line by line.Step3: Make a poem like this.Divide the cla into several groups.Make the similar this.Every group makes a poem.Then present it to the cla.If the others have other better ideas, they can give their advice.Step4: Do with the language points.Make sentences with the important phrases: in the middle, without.S1: Danny sits in the middle of the claroom.S2: There is a stone in the middle of the road.S3: Fish can’t live without water.

S4: We can’t finish the work without your help.Step5: Come to “PROJECT”.Finish the task in groups.1.Everyone in the group chooses one pattern of these poems and writes one by yourself.2.After writing the poem, show it to the others in the group.3.Each exams the others’ poems and gives his advice.

4.After examine all of their poems, change them with the other group.Give their reasonable advice.5.The teacher gives them chances to expre themselves.Step6: Homework.1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The students are familiar to the Chinese poetry, but the foreign ones are hard for them.When the students practice, the teacher should give them a hand if neceary.It is a challenge for the Chinese students to write foreign poems.Encourage them more in order to stimulate their interests of learning English. Leon 5: That’s a Funny Limerick!

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: both…and… Oral words and expreions: blank, motion Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ ability of learning by themselves.2.Master one of the patterns of foreign poems.3.Compare the differences between the Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know more about the limerick.2.Learn more words about describing weight, size, feeling and age.Teaching Difficult Points: Know how to write a limerick.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Let the students answer the questions in cla in oral.1.Ask several students to say funny sayings in English.If they can’t expre themselves in English, they can say them in Chinese.2.Let some students tell jokes.Encourage them to tell jokes in English.Step2: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.

1._______ and _______ help Jenny fill in the blanks in her limerick.2.They choose _______ to describe the weight.Step3: Read and get the main idea of the text.1.Let the students scan the text.Then tell the main idea of the text.2.Find the new words and gue their meanings according to the text.Step4: Do with some language points.Either…or…, both…and…

Let some students make sentences with the help of the pictures.S1: He eats either apples or oranges.S2: Either he or I am good at dancing.S3: Both his teachers and his parents love him.S4: Susan loves both reading and listening.Step5: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Limerick is a kind of poem that has a pattern.Study the “Limerick”.Get the results.1.There are five lines in the limerick.2.From Jenny’s limerick, we can see the first, second and fifth lines have rhyme.Look in the library or search on the Internet to find some information about limericks.Show them to the cla and let them find the patterns of “limerick”.

3.Let different groups act the dialogue out in front of the cla.Step6: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Limerick is fun.It’s interesting for the students.The students may like to practice it very much.Everyone writes a limerick.The cla will be full of laughter.Ask the students to begin the similar dialogue in cla to practice the limerick.

Leon 6: Say It in Five Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: create, single, thought Oral words and expreions: fur, stretch, hum, adjective Teaching Aims: 1.Improve the students’ listening and reading abilities. 2.Know more about the foreign poetry.3.Learn the American five-line poems.Teaching Important Points: 1.Grasp the pattern of the five-line poem.2.Use the pattern to describe something.Teaching Difficult Points: Use the pattern to describe something.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

We all know Chinese poetry has different kinds of patterns.Let the students give some examples.Step2: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Who created the five-line poem? 2.How many poems does the text show us? Finish the listening part in cla in oral.Step3: Reading task: Read and tell the main idea of the text.This is a game to practice the students’ memories.It can improve the students’ summary abilities.

Step4: Read and decide the statements are true or false.1.Today we learn a pattern of French poetry.2.The second line has three words.3.The topic of the poem is a noun.Finish the questions in cla in oral.Step5: Activity: Show some pictures to the students.Let them the favourite one to describe.They can work in pairs.Then show their poems to the cla.

It’s easy to finish the task, but it is hard to do it well.Step6: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Work in groups of three or four students.1.Say the differences between a Haiku and a five-line poem.Say about their different forms and different patterns.A haiku is just a description of a scene.It is simply what is happening in this place, at this moment.Five-line poem has five lines.It is always about a single topic.Each line has a set number of words.The first line has one word.The second line has two words.The third, or middle, line has three words.The fourth line has four words.The last line has one word.2.Finish the task in groups.Choose one topic as they like.Then exchange the poems among the groups.Step7: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Ask the students to find more topics after cla.Summary:

We learn different kinds of foreign poetry.They are limericks, five-line poems and Haiku.The students may think they are very interesting.Some students have surprising poems that you didn’t think of.Give them more chances to practice so that they can create their minds.

Leon 7: Trading Poems Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: awake, riddle Oral words and expreions: avenue Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about the foreign culture.2.Create the student’s cooperation ability.Teaching Important Points: 1.Master the written style, letter.2.Learn the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Difficult Points: Write a letter with what we learn in this unit.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Show the type of the letter.Let the students sum how to write a letter.Pay attention to the written style of the envelope.Step2: Listening task Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.1._______ is a beautiful way to expre thoughts and feelings.2.Danny’s teacher says Danny’s always saying _______ things.

Let the students listen to the tape and finish the listening task in cla in oral.Step3: Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Does Danny think it is hard to write a poem? 2.Did Li Ming write back to Danny? Ask the students scan the text and answer the questions.Step4: Practice Write a letter to your friends about what we learn in this unit.The teacher encourages them to write a poem to their friend, too.It’s hard, so they can choose any topic that they like.They only write for friends.We don’t need to demand too much.Step5: Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish the task in groups of three or four students.In a small group, write a poem like the one in Li Ming’s postcard.

1.First, choose a word your group like.They can choose any word that they like.Because the task is to begin a poem with the letters in this word, everyone can write a word on a piece of paper.Then they can choose one from these.2.Use each letter in this word to begin a line of our poem.Everyone in the group can write different poem according to the word.Then they can exchange their poems and give advice to each other.3.Make a poster to display your poems on the wall.It takes some time to design the poster. 4.Which one do you think is the best? Give your reasons.

Let the students choose the best poem that they like best and give their reasons in front of the cla.Step6: Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The last poem that we learn in Li Ming’s postcard is very interest

Leon 8: Unit Review

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions from Leon1 to Leon7.Oral words and expreions from Leon1 to Leon7.Teaching Aims: 1.Improve the students’ ability of using what we learn in this unit.

2.Stimulate the students’ mind of learning about Chinese and foreign poetry.3.Know the differences between Chinese and foreign poetry.Teaching Important Points: 1.Making suggestions.2.Master the use of infinitives.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of infinitives.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: review leon Teaching Procedure: Step1: Listen to some beautiful poems in Chinese or in English.Music usually creates atmosphere for the students.

If anyone can recite some English poems, the teacher can give them chances to recite in front of the cla.Step2: Do the exercises in Leon8.At the same time, the teacher walks in the claroom and see if they have any trouble to solve.Step3: Let the students write some difficulties on the blackboard.Then let’s try to solve them together.The most important grammar is the infinitive.For example: I haven’t decided what to write.

Li Ming has something important to do, so he can’t come to your party.My wish is to go to space.It’s not easy to walk against a strong wind.Step4: Practice the spoken English.Make a similar dialogue according to the Speaking the Language part.It’s how to make suggestions.

Ask the students work in pairs to make up dialogues like this.Then present it in front of the cla.Step5: Play “Story Game’.

Work in groups to finish the task.When the students play the game, the teacher walks around the claroom and see if any group needs help.At last, ask each group presents their stories to the others in front of the cla.Whose story is the funniest?

Step6: Homework 1.Finish the exercises in activity book.2.Preview the next leon.Summary:

Poetry is an important part of culture.So it is useful to learn it well.This unit gives us opportunities to practice.Making suggestions is important, too.So let the students make dialogues to practice it.The teacher should pay attention to the infinitives in this unit.We should practice more in this cla. Leon 9: What’s a “Horkey”?

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: helpful, at the same time Oral words and expreions: DNA, combine, juicy, mule, donkey Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about cloning.

2.How to combine two different things.Teaching Important Points:

1.Talk about the ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunctions.3.Combine two different things.Teaching Difficult Points: Talk about the ability and inability.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in the cla by showing some pictures about combining to the students.They may be about different things, such as food, fruit, animals and other things. Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Can Danny combine a donut and a pizza? 2.Who wants to combine a cow and a chick? Let the students answer the questions with the help of the pictures.Finish the task in oral in cla.Step3.Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct words. 1.We can combine two different ______ or two different ______.2.Brian would combine ______ and ______.Look through the whole text quickly and answer the questions in cla in oral.Step4.Encourage the students find the new words in this leon.Give more examples and let the students understand more about the words.I would combine a donut and a pizza.Then I could have breakfast and lunch together.Then I would have little, juicy bananas.Do you know what a mule is? It has a horse as mother and a donkey as a father.Step5.Read the text again and encourage them to find more questions about the text.One student stands up and asks a question.The others who want to answer can stand up and answer it as quickly as he can.For example: 1.What would you combine? 2.What about combining a duck and a deer? 3.Can we combine apples and bananas? Step6.Come to “PROJECT”.

Finish the task in groups of three or four students.Think about something that is combined by two different things.Each of the group writes his answer down and shows it to others.Then choose the most meaningful one to study.What will your group combine? What if you combine the two things? What can it do for us? What’s its advantage?

Talk about the questions above, then sum their ideas.Give a report in front of the cla.Demonstrate your ideas.Describe the thing that you combine in detail.Describe its advantages and disadvantages.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary In this leon, we learn to combine two different things together.In order to get new living things, we must make full use of our imagination.What can the things that we combine are used for? It is important for us to discu.During the discuion, we practice our spoken English.

Leon 10: What is DNA? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: generally, twin, clone, not only…but also Oral words and expreions: blueprint, identical, egg, identify Teaching Aims: 1.Know how to write a paage on science.2.Learn something about DNA.3.Know more about our body.Teaching Important Point: 1.Master the words and expreions of this leon.2.The ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Point: The use of DNA.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in the text by discuing what DNA is.Divide the cla into several groups.Then talk about the subject for several minutes.Then one of the groups presents their opinions in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task:

Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words you hear.1.Generally speaking, a ______ is a drawing.2.______ for identical twins, each living thing has its own unique DNA.Play the tape once.Then let the students try to finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text quickly and answer the following questions: 1.Where does your DNA come from? 2.Is your DNA in every part of your body? Finish the reading task in cla in oral.Try to get more information about the text at the same time.Step4.Read the text again.Find the sentences with the new words.Try to create situation about the new words.Then make sentences with the new words.If someone can make a whole story with the new words that we learn in this leon, the teacher must encourage her. The sentences with the new words: Generally speaking, a blueprint is a drawing.Identical twins are two children that grew from the same egg.They are clones.From your DNA, scientists can identify not only you, but also people related to you.Step5.Let some students tell some details about the text. What is DNA? Where is your DNA from? What is DNA used for? Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish the task with a partner.Find the things about you that show your parents’ DNA.Talk about if for a while.Then let some volunteers come to the front to talk about the subject.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

You look like your father or your mother.That identifies the DNA of your body from your parents.DNA is very fascinating.Each living thing has its own unique DNA.Try to find more ways to use the DNA in many fields.Discu the use of DNA in this cla.Make full use of it to help more people in the world in more fields

Leon 11: Cloning People? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: exactly, divide, crazy Oral words and expreions: human being, original, adult, Dolly, insect Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about cloning.2.Create the students’ spirit of cooperation.Teaching Important Points: 1.The advantages and disadvantages of cloning.2.The expreion of ability and disability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Points: The advantages and disadvantages of cloning.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure:

Step1: Show a picture of Dolly.Then let the students discu what our life will be if we make a clone of ourselves.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Discu for five minutes.Then present their results to the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words you hear.1.The clones are the ______ height.2.There are ______ ways to clone people.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false(F).1.We can make clones from dead animals.2.Each clone would be a different person.3.We can combine the DNA of pigs and dogs.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Pair work: Read the text again and find more details about the text.Try to solve the following problems.Talk about them with your partner.At the same time, encourage them to ask more questions about the text.How many ways are there to clone people? What are they? Do you want a clone of your self? Why? What is the use of cloning? Try to finish it in a limited time in order to improve their comprehension ability.Step5.Read the text by the students.Give the students time to listen to the tape again.Then make a chance for them to practice in front of the cla. Step6.A debate Divide the cla into two groups.One group is for the advantages of cloning.The other is for the disadvantages of cloning.The teacher designs the task in order to find out the meanings of cloning.Step 7.Come to “LET’S DO IT’.

This task is similar to the one is step6.This topic is about the food.The students can use their imaginations.Of course the best way is to search on the Internet for more information about the subject.Step8.Homework 1.Search more information about cloning on the Internet or in the newspaper.

2.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.Summary:

Cloning is a popular subject in the modern society.It is good for the students to know more about that.Encourage the students to find out more information on the Internet.They can use other tools to get more.Give them chances to present their results in the next leon.Leon 12: Did You Ever See a “Chorse”?

Teaching Content: There are no new words and expreions in this leon.Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about combining.2.Find the differences between the Chinese and foreign songs.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreion of ability and disability.2.The use of coordinating conjunctions.3.Sing the song fluently.Teaching Difficult Points: Combine two different living things.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Show some pictures of animals to the students.Let them imagine what animals what animals they would like to combine. What would they look like? What are they used for? Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Then discu the questions for five minutes.After a while, show their results to the cla in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the song and repeat after it.Play the tape for several times.Let the students to be familiar to the rhythm of the song.Step3.Read the song as a lyric.Then let the students make up other similar songs according to their imagination.

Let some volunteers present their song to the cla.

Step4.Let the students try to sing the song together.Play the tape again.Ask them to sing after it for several times again.

Step5.Ask some volunteers to sing in front of the cla. Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Work in a small group to finish the task.

Use the pattern in the song to tell customers about your new animals.Describe the new animals in the following ways.What animals will you combine? What is the new animal look like? What are they used for? What will you name them? At last, they can present their result in words or in pictures.Let the students talk about the subject for five minutes.Then let one of the members come to the front and present their result.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Practice the song after cla. Summary:

This song is about combining.Combine two different things together by changing their DNA.It is a new technique.We must make full use of it in many ways.The students today are the future scientists and engineers.So let them know more about coming is good for them.Give them more chance to search after cla.Help them to use many tools to teach themselves.Leon 13: Clones Are the Same Teaching Content: Oral words and expreions: laboratory Teaching Aims:

1.Practice the students’ spoken English.2.Create the students’ imaginations.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know more about cloning.2.The expreion of ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Difficult Points: The expreion of ability and inability.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Talk about the question “What would you like to clone?” in groups.They can use the following patterns: What would you like to clone? Why? Give the students five minutes.Then let them act their dialogues out in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Jenny would like to clone a dog.2.Danny would clone himself.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Scan the text and answer the following questions: 1.What would Jenny like to clone? 2.What would Brian like to clone? 3.Why would Danny like to clone himself? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and find the main idea of the text.Ask some students to say it in front of the cla.Step5.A Game Make up a similar dialogue according to the text.Finish the task in groups of three or four.Give them five minutes.And then ask the students to present their dialogues in front of the cla.Step6.Discuion Discu the use of the clones of yourself.If you have a clone of yourself, what would you like him to do for you? Do you think it is very useful? Step7.Come to “PROJECT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Talk about the subject “Have you heard of cloned animals?” The next is “If you are a scientist, what would you like to clone? Why?”

Talk about the subjects in groups.The students may have five minutes to finish the task.Then try to present your result to the cla in front of the cla.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Cloning is new to some students.It is useful to give them more time to talk about the subject.They can find more information about cloning on the Internet or with other tools.Encourage them to know more after cla by themselves Leon 14: A Clone of My Own Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: secret, copy, doubt, stupid, che, robot Oral words and expreions: foolish, flute, closet, prefer, play che, prefer…to… Teaching Aims:

1.Improve the students’ written ability.2.Create the students’ imaginations.Teaching Important Points: 1.Imagine the use of cloning in our daily life.2.The expreion of ability and inability.3.The use of coordinating conjunctions. Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunctions.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Talk about the question:

Would you like to have a clone of yourselves? Why? Finish the task in groups.Give the students five minutes to discu the subject.Then let the students present it in front of the cla.Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the flowing questions: 1.How old is Kate? 2.What does “foolish” mean? Finish the task in cla in oral.

Step3.Scan the text and decide the following statements are True or False: 1.Katie would like a secret clone.2.Katie already has three sisters.3.Katie’s clone would live the living room with Katie.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and try to find the sentences with the new words.What does Katie mean by “a secret clone”? I doubt what she says! “Foolish” means “silly or stupid”.Also, she would play che with me.Maybe I need a robot! She would feed my tow cats, clean my room and practise my flute.

Step5.Ask some students to tell the main idea of the text.Let some students say it in front of the cla.Step6.Group Work Talk about the subject in groups.Talk for about five minutes.If you have a clone of yourself, what would you like her or him to do for you?

Write what you think of down on a piece of paper.Then exchange their ideas in groups.One of the members sum what they think of.Then present it in front of the cla.Step7.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.Finish the task in pairs.Make up a dialogue with a partner and act it out in front of the cla. Encourage them to make the story funny. Make the ending surprising.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

It is fun to give the students chances to speak in front of the cla.Sometimes they think they are not happy in their daily life.They don’t want to do something sometimes, so they want someone else to do it for him or her.Maybe some students think clones of themselves are useful to them.Leon 15: Cloning Questions

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: neither, nor, neither…nor…, dead Oral words and expreions: mammoth Teaching Aims:

1.Be familiar to the e-mail.2.Know more about cloning.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreions of ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by showing some pictures of cloning.Let the students talk about the use of cloning. What is cloning? What is cloning used for? What can we do with cloning? Step2.Listening task: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.What did Li Ming study this week in school? 2.What’s the name of the first cloned animal?

Ask the students to answer the questions in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task: Read the text and decide the statements are True or False.1.Li Ming doesn’t think cloning is interesting.2.Li Ming knew how the sheep Dolly cloned.3.Jenny has ever studied cloning.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and find the sentences with the new words.Let the students gue the meanings of the new words.Give more examples with the new words.I knew that English scientists had cloned a sheep, but I knew neither how nor why.I chose mammoths.Ask the students to make sentences with neither…nor… He is neither a teacher nor a doctor.Neither he nor I am thirteen years old.Step5.Sum the main idea of the two e-mails.Let the students tell them in their own words, not word by word according to the content of the e-mails. Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Use the Internet or other tools to find more information about cloning.

Talk about what, where, when, why and how cloning is taking place.Everyone writes down a short paage, then exchange it with the others.Next one of the members of the group gives a report in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Ask your parents for some information about cloning.Summary:

Cloning is new to the students.Let them get more information on the Internet.That is helpful for them.It is helpful for them to use the Internet for some important information.On th the coordination conjunctions are important in this unit.So make more practice in cla.

Leon 16: Unit Review Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions in this unit.Oral words and expreions in this unit.Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to use the Internet and other tools to search more information.2.Know more about cloning.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreion of ability and inability.2.The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Difficult Points: The use of coordinating conjunction.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: review leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Group work Talk about the question in groups.“What do you like to clone the most? Why?” Let the students write their opinions down on a piece of paper.Then exchange their opinions.At last, one of the members sums the opinions and gives a report in front of the cla.Step2.Finish the exercises in this leon.Find out the problems and write them down on the blackboard.

Discu the problem together and find out the correct way to solve the problems.Step3.Do with “Grammar in Use”.

Let the students finish the exercises.Then ask the students to make some sentences with neither…nor…, not only…but also….

Not only he but also his father is handsome.Neither my mother nor my father likes this kind of fruit.Step4.Come to “Speaking the Language”.

Complete the dialogue.Then ask the students to make a similar dialogue with his partner.Then present it in front of the cla. Step5.Play the game “Stop-Go”

Play the game in front of the cla.Start the game with 10 volunteers from the cla.Play the game to practice the “ability and inability” expreions on this page.Change the students to play the game if the time is enough.Step6.Group work Divide the cla into several groups.Ask them to introduce themselves in the group.Then choose two best ones to present in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Find out more information about cloning on the Internet.Summary:

This unit is designed to review the main language points in this unit.It is used to build the vocabulary of the unit.Practice the grammars and spoken English in this unit.All those are put in a situation of cloning.Cloning is a new subject for the students.It is very interesting to discu.

Leon 17: Do Mistakes Matter?

Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: pardon, mention, pocket, double, mistake, make a mistake, depend, common Oral words and expreions: Bruce, confused, confusing, depend on, bargaining Teaching aims: 1.Know the cultural differences between China and western countries.2.Improve the students’ abilities of speaking English.Teaching Important Points:

1.Target language: I made a mistake.He looks confused.Buying things in China is confusing.2.Train the students’ focus abilities and cooperation spirit.

Teaching Difficult Points: the difficult cultures of different countries Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching procedures: Step1.Lead in The teacher shows some pictures to the students with the Multi-media computer.The pictures show the differences between China and Western countries.

From the people’s appearance and the colour of the skin，We can tell the differences.The others show cultural differences.We use chopsticks but they use the fork and knives.Divide the cla into several groups and finish the task.Encourage the students to speak more.They can use their own pictures to help them. Step2.Listening task

Listen to the text and answer the following question: 1.Where is Bruce from? 2.What does Bruce’s father do?

3.How much does Li Ming pay for the two pops? 4.How much did Bruce pay for one pop?

Ask the students to listen carefully and answer the questions.We can arrange the students to listen to the part that is connected with the two questions.Step3.Read and find the new words: He looks confused.

Buying things in China is confusing. I made a mistake.

Let the students try to make sentences with the new words. Step4.Reading task:

Read the text again and answer the questions: What are Bruce and Li Ming doing? Is Bruce confusing?

Where don’t people try to change the price, in China or in North America? Encourage the students to ask more questions by themselves. Step5.Fill in the blanks with the right forms of the words given. 1.My brother is _______(迷惑的). 2.It is so ______(迷惑的) a thing. 3.Does he often ______(犯错误)?

This part is used to check if they have grasped the new words. Step6.Activity

Suppose you and Bruce are shopping, you are bargaining with the clerk.Bruce can bargain, too. Divide the cla into several groups and talks about the questions.After a while, let the students act their out in front of the cla.

Encourage the students to speak loudly in front of the cla.Choose the best group and praise them.Step7.Think about: What’s the difference between people in China and North America when they are shopping?

Use the formal group to finish the task.When the students discu, the teacher walks around the claroom to see if they need any help.

Step8.Talk about: Where would you like to buy things, in shopping center or market?

Let them debate the questions.As usual, the cla can be divided into two groups.One group thinks the shopping center is good.The other thinks the market is better.Let them debate for five minutes.Then let one student in each group to sum the opinions of his own group. Step9.Homework

Find more information about the differences between China and western countries. Summary: This interesting text is about bargaining in China.It’s based on the different cultures between Chinese and Western countries.In some countries in North America, people don’t try to bargain, so some foreign friends feel confused when they buy things in China.Try to help them when you meet foreigners.Try to find more differences between Chinese and Western countries on the Internet.

Leon 18: Wait! Don’t Eat Yet!

Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: society, politely, manner, especially, unle, polite, fork, serve, forever, act, compare, theirs Oral words and expreions: custom, tablecloth, rude, toothpick, Spaghetti, sauce Teaching Aims: 1.Find the differences between the Chinese and Western customs at table.2.Cultivate the students’ creation and cooperation spirit.Teaching Important Points: 1.The expreions of similarities and differences.2.Grasp the Past Future Tense. Teaching Difficult Points: The expreions of similarities and differences.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching Procedures: Step1.Lead in: a pair work.

The teacher asks the students the following question: Have you ever traveled to other places? Where have you been?

Show some pictures with the help of the multi-media.The pictures are from Australia, France, China, England, America and Japan.

Let the students discu for 2 or 3 minutes.Then let them say in front of the cla.When the student is speaking, the others can ask him or her questions about his subject. Step2.Listening task Listen and answer the following questions: 1.Table manners in China and Canada are quite ______.2.In China, if your guests have no food on their plates, putting food on their plates is ______.3.It’s ______ to use a toothpick at the table.Finish the task in cla in oral.

Step3.Read the text and find out the sentences with the new words.All societies have customs about how to eat politely.We call these customs “table manners”.

It’s okay to eat it, especially if it’s something dry, like a piece of bread.In Canada, if you drop something on the tablecloth, you pick it up and put it on your plate.Parents are forever telling their children: “Don’t talk with your moth full!” Step4.Reading task: Read the text and decide the statements are true or false.1.In China, if you drop something on the tablecloth, you usually pick it up and eat it.2.In Canada, to finish the food in front of the cla in rude.In China, everybody has a knife at the table.Exercises: Fill in the blanks with the right forms of the words given.1.I think______(sing) loudly at table is not polite.

2.It’s rude ______ (point) to the others when you eat at table.

3.His mother said he ______ (return) the fork to the restaurant tomorrow.4.Nobody ______(know) the secret except me.Step6.Activity:

Project: What’s the story? 1.Find pictures in magazines.

2.Make up a quick story about your picture.

3.Trade your picture with the students from another group.Practice:

Show some pictures to the students.Let the students picture them.Show some different pictures in different situations.Let them give vivid description.When they finish one picture, try to show them the whole story.If we don’t have enough time, show them the main idea. Step8.Consolidation

Suppose you have a foreign friend.He will come to China.Make a chart.Write down his/her name, his nationality, his language and his aims.Show it to your partner, then finish it in cla.

Leon 19：Sayings

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: culture, several, action, fly, as soon as Oral words and expreions: saying, penny, earn, boil, hatch, judge, prevention, cure, worm, fence, spoil, broth, honey, vinegar, Nick, giggle Teaching Aims: 1.Know more about the differences between the Chinese and Western table manners.2.Train the students focus abilities.3.Cultivate the students’ cooperation abilities.Teaching Important Points:

1.Understanding the English saying.2.The expreions of similarities and differences. 3.The past future tense.Teaching Difficult Points: Learn the expreions of similarities and differences between Chinese and Western countries on table manners and sayings.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of Leon: new leon Teaching Procedures: Step1.Lead in: The teacher begins the cla by discuing the question.It is a group activity.Ask the students to tell the manners at the table. In the activity, the students will think of many funny stories.Give them chance to speak in front of the cla.Praise the groups that act well.Step2.Listening task: Listen and answer the following questions: 1.Who does Nick sit beside? 2.Is Nick full at last? Listening is neceary for training the students listening abilities.Remember to give them a few easy questions to answer. Step3.Reading task:

Read and find the new words:

But as soon as his bowl was empty, the grandmother put more in it. Wu Yang’s little sister giggled.

Let the students make sentences with the new words.

S1: The students stop talking as soon as the teacher comes in. S2: My mother came in as soon as I watched TV.

S3: While I am speaking, Wang Yan giggles all the time. Step4.Read and find the difficult language points: 1.Nick ate it all up.

2.The grandmother kept giving him more.3.Wu Yang was trying not to smile.Let the students try using the phrases in English.

S5: I’m so hungry that I eat up all the food on the table.

S6: He was not good at English, but he kept trying his best.We all admire him. S7: Try to pa the exam, please.

Step5.Divide the cla into several groups in three or four.Gue the meanings of the English sayings.

First let them exchange the meanings of the sayings in the group first.Then exchange the meanings in groups.

Let the students decide which are the correct answers to the English sayings.Step6.Exercises:

1.I will call you __________(一„„就)I come back.2.You must _________(解释) it to your parents.3.Although he failed, he kept _________(努力).4.What _______(其他的) can I do for you? If the teacher wants to know if they have grasped the language points of this leon, he can give them some exercises to see the result. Step7.Project: It is a group activity.Divide the cla into several groups to finish the task.

The people in the story have a problem.They don’t understand each other very well.

Write an ending for the story.Explain why you choose you ending.Search more information about the differences between China and western countries at the table.Leon 20: Where I Come From Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: greeting Oral words and expreions: forgive Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about the cultural differences among different countries.2.Cultivate the students’ cooperation spirit.Teaching Important Points: 1.The different greeting ways in different country.2.The Past Future Tense.Teaching Difficult Points: The similarities and differences.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure:

Step1.Lead in by discuing in groups.Finish the task with the help of the flashcards.Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Let each group discu the following questions with the help of the pictures.He /she will come to your home for dinner next Sunday.

What will you prepare for him/her? Try to finish the task in five minutes.Step2.Listen to the tape and let the students sing after it for several times.Step3.Show a globe to the foreign students.Let’s see where we are.Ask some students come to the front and point up where we are on the globe.

A game.Ask two students to the front.Let’s who can find more places in limited time.The one who finds more is the winner.

Step4.Read the text as a poem and find the new words.Then make sentences with in greeting, forgive

Where I come from we shake hands in greeting and ask, “How are you?” During a meeting and forgive a mistake or two. Step5.Group work.Ask the students to say some special customs of the foreign countries.For example, the schools are different in China and other countries.Divide the cla into groups of three or four to finish the task.Step6.Activity

Work in groups.Think about your culture.List some special Chinese customs that aren\'t found in other cultures. Step7.Homework

1.Finish off the exercises in activity book. 2.Go on the next reading in the student book. Summary:

English songs sometimes are the same as the Chinese songs.They also describe a subject and the content is all about it.Because of the English songs, the students know more about the foreign customs and culture.

Leon 21: What’s in a Name? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: given name, family name, sir Oral words and expreions: formal Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about the foreign culture.2.Cultivate the students’ learning abilities.Teaching Important Points: 1.The structure of English names.2.The differences between English and Chinese names.Teaching Difficult Points: The structure of English names.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by discuing: How much do you know about the differences between Chinese and Western names? Work in groups.Then one of the members of the groups gives a report to the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the information you hear. 1.In Western countries, people have ______names.2._______ is Li Ming’s first name.Finish the task in cla in oral. Step3.Read and find the new words in the text. 1.My given names are “Brian” and “James”.2.My family name is “Smith”.3.That’ formal in English.Practice the new words in cla.Stp4.The language points: I’m a little confused.

But in China it comes last! What do they say when they meet on a formal occasion? Make sentences with the language points.Step5.Practice: Tell us why Danny is confused.If you understand, give us an example.Let some students say give some examples to show the differences between Chinese and English names.Step6.Work with a partner.Write a dialogue in which Brian and Wang Mei meet and introduce themselves.What do they say when they meet on a formal occasion. Step7.Homework

Give English names to each of your family members. Summary:

English names are so different from Chinese names that some Chinese students are confused about them.Let the students choose English names themselves.Then they can choose English names for their family members.I believe practice makes perfect.

Leon 22: Do Manners Matter? Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: praise Oral words and expreions: Joe Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about the foreign culture.2.Cultivate the students’ abilities about learning English.Teaching Important Points:

1.Good manners in China and North America.2.Apologies, similarities and differences.3.Past Future Tense.Teaching Difficult Tense: Past Future Tense.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by a group work.Ask the students to tell the differences about the manners when you receive the presents.

Work in groups of three or four.Everyone writes his or her answers down on a piece of paper.Then exchange their ideas.Next sum the main ideas and present them to the cla. Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words.1.Wu Zhou has lived in Canada for ______ years.2.Good manners in North America are ______ from good manners in China.3.When people give you gifts in Canada, you ______ them with many words.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and decide the following statements are true or false.1.In North America, there are no words for being polite.2.When people give you gifts in Canada, you might say, “I don’t want your gift.” 3.Wu Zhou is a teacher in a university in Canada.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again.Tell the main idea of the text and encourage the students to ask more questions about the text.They can ask questions like these: S1: Wu Zhou calls himself Joe Wu, why? S2: Because “Joe” is an English name that sounds like “Zhou”.

S3: If you don’t say “please” or “thank you”, what will people think of you? S4: They will think you are rude.Step5.Act

Work with your partner.Suppose you receive a present from your friends, what will you say if you are Chinese and what will you say if you are Canadian? Act your dialogue out in front of the cla.Let the students get the differences by their acting.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”

Before we do this, the teacher can show the students more about the differences between Chinese and Canadian culture on the Internet.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four to finish the task.Everyone write his or her ideas down then exchange the ideas in the group.Make up a dialogue or give a report.Then present it in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The culture differences show in different ways.Let the students think of more situations and let’s find out how to do on the Internet.Teach the students how to learn is more important than what to learn.So give the students more time to practice in cla.Leon 23: Supper with the Bradshaws

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: trouble Oral words and expreions: peppermint, tradition Teaching Aims: 1.Know about the similarities and differences between China and Western countries.2.Cultivate the students’ abilities.Teaching Important Points: 1.Apologies.2.Similarities and differences.3.Past Future Tense.Teaching Difficult Points: Past Future Tense Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by discuing what you will do when your friends say goodbye to you.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Everyone writes their ideas down then exchange them in groups.Sum the ideas then give a report in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.We just came home from the ______.2.Bruce and his father had trouble with Chinese ______ and culture.3.Last night, we eat in the ______.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Scan the text and answer 1.Did Bruce and his father make mistakes in China? 2.Western people never eat duck’s feet, do they? 3.Does Li Ming like peppermints? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again.Find the sentences with the new words.But he and his father sometimes had trouble with Chinese customs and culture.At the end of the meal, Mr.Bradshaw opened a box of peppermint candies.In good Chinese tradition, I told him that I enjoyed it.Show some pictures to help the students remember the new words.Step5.Act it out.Divide the cla into several groups.Ask each group to act one part of the text out.Before doing this, let them read the text fluently and decide which part to act it out.If they don’t have real peppermints or something they must use, they can use something else to replace them.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Divide the cla into groups.Ask them to discu what makes them embarraed when they are guests at a dinner.Everyone writes his ideas down.Then exchange them in groups.At last, one of the groups sums the group’s ideas and presents it in front of the cla.They can write a diary entry, an e-mail or a letter about the dinner.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

It is not easy to make friends with foreigners.It is helpful to know more about the differences between Chinese and western customs and culture.Acting the text out is interesting.The teacher can ask the students to bring something useful into the cla.If they don’t have real ones, they can use something to replace it.

Leon 24: Unit Review

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions from Leon17 to Leon23.Oral words and expreions from Leon17 to Leon23.Teaching Aims: 1.Know about the differences between Chinese and western customs and culture.2.Cultivate the students’ learning abilities and cooperation spirit.Teaching Important Points: 1.Apologies.2.Similarities and differences.3.The past future tense.Teaching Difficult Points: The past future tense.Teaching Preparation: pictures

Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Teaching Procedure: Step1.Show some pictures about different table manners to the students.Encourage the students to act out a dialogue to show the differences.Give them five minutes.Let the students act in front of the cla.Step2.Ask the students to talk about the different customs and culture between China and western countries.Show some pictures to remind the students.They can show them in all kinds of styles.They can make a dialogue or write a paage.Step3.Finish the exercises in cla in oral.Write some problems down on the blackboard.Discu in the cla.Then choose the correct answer.Step4.Come to “Grammar in Use”.

Let the students make more sentences with the past future tense.It is often used in the object clause, when the subject is past tense, the object clause is often used the past future tense.Encourage them to give more examples to practice it.Step5.Come to “Speaking the Language”.

Ask volunteers to act the dialogue out in front of the cla.Encourage the students to make other dialogues and act them out.Step6.Come to “Written work”.

Let the students write it as homework if we can’t finish it in cla.It’s practice of the main ideas of this unit.It can also build the students’ vocabulary.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The students practice their reading, speaking and written English in this text.It is used to build the students’ vocabulary.The teacher must make full use of this part.At the same time, encourage them to remind the main ideas of this unit.Give them more time to use what we learn in this unit.

Think over after cla :

Leon 25: Talk! Don’t fight!

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: fight, spend Oral words and expreions: fought, spent Teaching Aims: 1.Let the students know the importance of peace.2.Create the students’ spirit of cooperation.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about the agreement and disagreement.2.Grasp the object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: Talk about the agreement and disagreement.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Discu the following questions: What would you do if you found some money on the street? Give the students five minutes to finish the task.Pay attention to all the students’ feelings.Let all of them take part in the discuion.Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the words you hear: 1.Jenny and Brian see Danny ______ on the street, _______ a bag.2.The money that Danny found was on the _______.Step3.Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Who did Danny buy the shirt for? 2.How much money did Brian lose? Step4.Read the text and tell the main idea of the text in the students’ own words.

Let the students speak in front of the cla.Encourage them not to be shy when they stand there.Give the students chances to speak loudly in front of the cla.Step5.Encourage the students to ask more questions about this part.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four to finish the task.Ask all of the students to take part in the discuion.They can ask questions like this: S1: When you are Jenny, what should you do to stop the fight? S2: Do you think the ten dollars is Brian’s?

S3: Do you think Danny should spend the ten dollars that he found on the street? Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four, talk about what Danny should do.Everyone writes his or her opinion on a piece of paper.Everyone must write his or her reasons down.Choose the best from their opinions.Then report it to the cla. Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in the activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Activities are the main style of the cla.The students learn their knowledge in the games and role-plays.It’s a good way to make the English cla interesting.Always remember to improve the students’ cooperation spirit.Let everyone in the group to have the chance to speak.This is very important for the English teaching.Think over after cla :

Leon 26: Good Friends Shouldn’t Fight

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: enemy, behave, gentleman, honest Oral words and expreions: thief, unhappy, agreed Teaching Aims: 1.Let the student’s grasp the four basic skills of English: listening, speaking, reading and writing.2.Know about the importance of peace in the world.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about the agreement and disagreement.2.Grasp the object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The agreement and disagreement Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Talk about the following questions: Have you ever had a fight with a friend? What happened? If you had a fight with your friends, how do you make up after the fight? Everyone writes their opinions down on a piece of paper, then show it to the others of the group.Remember to demonstrate their reasons.The group chooses the best to present in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.1.Brian thinks Danny is a ______.2.Jenny thinks Danny and Brian should stop _______.3.They will have a ______ at Jenny’s house.

Step3.Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Has Brian found his lost money? 2.Did Danny feel sorry to Brian? 3.Is Brian still angry with Danny? Step4.Read the text and act the role-play in front of the cla.Encourage them to make up a role-play by themselves.If they like, they can add any ending for the story.After they act, the others can say where they should improve and how they should improve it.Step5.Group work Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Discu the following questions:

Talk about your fight with your members of the groups.Tell them: what happened to you? How long did the fight last? Who helped you to solve it? After one student finishes his speech, the others can tell him or her whether his actions are right or wrong.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT’.

Finish the task in pairs.Ask the students to think about the fight between Danny and Brian.Is Brian right to be angry with Danny? Why? The key is to describe the reasons.Is Danny right to say that he doesn’t want to be Brian’s friend anymore? With a partner, debate which character is right, Danny or Brian? Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Activities give the students chances to practice their spoken English.During the activities, some students may have trouble in expreing themselves.The teacher should help them if neceary.Provide them pictures to help them remind the stories or experience in their life.Show them some English words that are about their topics Think over after cla :

Leon 27: The Dove and the Olive Branch

Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: flood, peaceful, raise, symbol Oral words and expreions: dove, olive, Adam, Eve, Eden, God, Noah Teaching Aims: 1.Stimulate the students’ ideas of loving our country.2.Improve the students’ spoken English.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about the agreement and disagreement.2.Grasp the object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: the object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure:

Step1.Lead in by discuing “Do you know the story of the dove and the olive branch?”

Divide the cla into group of three or four.Discu the question.At the same time, show the students the picture of the dove and the olive branch with the help of the audiotape.Everyone in the group writes their answers down.Then discu it in the group.Choose the best to show in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and decide the following statements are true or false.1.Noah is a good man.2.Noah and his family in the Great Flood for a hundred days.3.Since then, people use a picture of a dove with an olive branch in its mouth to show their love for peace.After listening to the tape, ask the students to finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Scan the text and tell the main idea of it.Remember to say with their own words.Not one word by one word from the text.

Step4.Read the text carefully and answer the following questions: 1.Did God think there are too many bad people in the world? 2.What did Noah do to escape the Great Flood? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step5.Group work Discu the following questions in groups of three or four.

What do you think breaks the peace in our life? What can you do to prevent this happen?

Make a list of it.Then exchange the ideas in groups.Choose the best to present in front of the cla.

Before the students finish the task, the teacher had better show some new words to them on the blackboard.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Ask the students to finish the task in formal groups.

First, discu whether or not you think the story of Noah is real.Why or why not? What do they think of the God’s idea?

Second, tell other famous stories about making peace.Many students may know some Chinese stories about making peace.

Show some pictures to help them remind the old stories.Many people died in order to get a peaceful world for us. Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Write down your story in the exercise book.Summary:

Remind the students to respect the dead men who died in the anti-Japanese wars.Many stories also write down some great men who devoted themselves to the peace of China.Let’s remember them forever.Without them, we haven’t the peaceful world and the happy life.

Think over after cla :

Leon 28: Please Let There Be Peace Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: army, prepare, gun, agree, agree to, imagine Oral words and expreions: obey, battle, rage, suffering Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading and writing.2.Learn to love and care for the people around us.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about agreement and disagreement.2.The object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Show a picture of a dove and the olive branch to the cla.Let them show their opinions about the peace of the world.If you are a member in the U.N, what should you do to stop fighting? Peace and development are the main topics now.

Make a list of the plan that you make.Then present it to the cla.

Step2.Listen to the tape for two times.Let them know the rhythm of the song.Can someone sing in front of the cla? If anyone can, the teacher let them have a try.Step3.Read the song as a poem line by line.Translate it into Chinese.If neceary, help them.There are some new words in it.Some words are difficult to understand.

Step4.Play the song again for several times again.Let the students sing after it.Step5.Practice Divide the cla into two groups to read the song.Then sing the song together.If neceary, play the tape again.If they can’t sing it well, the teacher teaches them line by line.Step6.Come to “PROJECT”.

Finish the task in groups of three or four.

Wars bring suffering to people.We all love peace and hate war.We have an organization called the U.N.which is to stop fight and keep peace in the world. It is made up of six main countries in the world.

When there is a fight on the earth, we may think it’s time for the U.N.to play an important part.Now imagine you are representing China at the U.N.Make a speech about how the U.N.should work to stop war.Present your speech to a small group of clamates and listen to their speeches.As a group, talk about your speeches.Ask each other questions about your opinions and information. After five minutes, ask several groups to present their result to the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book Summary:

We all hate wars because we see what wars bring us on TV, in newspapers and on Internet.We must do something to stop them.Give the students chances to open their minds.Maybe it is they that can save the earth someday. Think over after cla :

Leon 29: Jenny’s Good Advice

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: agree with, probably, belong, belong to Oral words and expreions: opinion, have a talk Teaching Aims: 1.Cultivate the students’ abilities of learning English.2.Know about the importance of peace.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about the agreement and disagreement.2.The object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”

Lead in by discuing the following questions: Why do you sometimes fight with others? How do you feel after the fight? Finish the task in groups.After discuing it for a while, make the best one to show it in the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Where do Danny and Brian meet? 2.Do Danny and Brian stop fight in this leon? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and tell the main idea of the text.Pay attention to Danny’s and Brian’s opinions about this.Step4.Read the text and decide the statements are true or false.1.Danny and Brian both think Jenny’s cookies are good.

2.Brain didn’t think the money that Danny’s picked up was his.3.Danny can’t agree with Brian’s opinion.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step5.Pair work Work with your partner.If you were Jenny, what would you do to stop them from fighting? Do you have any other good ideas? Work in pairs.Then discu it for a while.

Let some volunteers come to the front to give their advice.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.Finish the task in group work.Ask them to make up a dialogue or a role-play.

First, they must make a plan for the play.What happened to you? Who are fighting? Why? Give them five minutes to finish the task.If they don’t have enough people to play, they can ask the teacher to take part in it.Step7.Homework 1.Have you had a fight with your friend? Write it down.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

The teacher can take part in the students’ activities.They can help the students make a plan to play it better.The teacher can provide them some new words if neceary.Praise them after they act a dialogue out.

Think over after cla :

Leon30: Let’s Work for Peace

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: provide, disagree, trust Oral words and expreions: religion Teaching Aims: 1.Learn about the importance of peace.2.Know more about the foreign culture.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know about a student council in Canada.2.Talk about the agreement and disagreement.3.The object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Lead in by discuing the following questions: How many clubs are there in your school? What are they?

If there aren’t any clubs in the school, we can think about who works for the peace of your school.What do they often do when someone fights in school? Discu it in groups.Then choose the best to present it in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.What grade is Danielle in? 2.What does the student council do? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and decide the statements are true or false.1.Student councils work to make schools better places.2.All the students in Danielle’s school wear the same clothes.

3.We need to learn about different cultures and make friends with people from other cultures.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Tell the main idea of this text.Remember to answer the questions: 1.What does the student council do? 2.What is Danielle’s school like?

3.What do we do in order to make our school a better place? Step5.Group work Work in groups of four or three to discu the following questions: If you are a member of the student council, make a plan about how to make the school a better place.Make a list of the things that you think must be done according to the situation of the school.Discu the question in groups.Then show it to the others in cla.Discu the plan in cla.At last, give the advice to school.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Work in groups.Plan a debate about this topic: countries should never go to war to solve disputes.Are there any wars today? Where are they? Are wars good or bad? Are there better ways to solve problems? Give them enough time to debate the interesting topic.Let them open their minds to create good ideas.Then present their ideas group by group in front of the cla.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Students are old enough to think about these questions.They watch TV to pay attention to the development of the world.They have much to say in this part.Show some pictures about the disaster that wars bring to the people in the world.Call on the students to study hard to create a more peaceful world for the people.Think over after cla :

Leon 31: Peace at Last Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: at last, pity, angry, decision, fair, conversation, regret There are no oral words and expreions in this leon.Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to love and care for the others.2.Practice the students’ written English.Teaching Important Points: 1.Talk about agreement and disagreement.2.The object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in the text by discuing the following question: What should you do if you have trouble with your friend? Finish the task in groups of three or more.Let’s see how they solve their problems.Many students may write a diary.Others tell his or her trouble to his friend or teacher.

Tell the students: when you meet trouble, find some effective and fast ways to help yourselves out.Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Who has trouble with the basketball game, Li Ming or Danny? 2.Did Li Ming go to the basketball game at last? 2.What is Danny going to deal with the money problem? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and then tell the others what Li Ming’s trouble is.Do you think how to solve it? Is Li Ming right or wrong? Tell the cla the reasons.

Step4.Read the text and decide the statements are true or false.1.Li Ming has been invited to a party on Friday evening.2.Li Ming’s friend was angry because Li Ming mied the game.

3.Brian wrote a letter to Danny and told him he didn’t want the ten dollars any more.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step5.Find out the sentences with the news and practice them in cla.After I mied the game, my friend was very angry.What a pity.She said that the decision was mine.It wouldn’t be fair for me to go to the game.Jenny said we should have a conversation.I regret what I did.Let the students make up sentences with the words and expreions that we learn in this leon.Show some flashcards to help them. S1.Don’t be angry with me.

S2: It is neceary for us to have a conversation with my mother.S3: His sister regrets doing that.Step6.Group work Divide the cla into groups of three or four.Write experience that you have had.Then share it with your members.Tell who is right in the story.What should we do to solve the problem correctly? Step7.Come to “LET’S DO IT’.

Finish the task in groups.Write a diary entry, an e-mail or a letter about the topic below. Have you or anyone in your family experienced war before? What is war like? If they have no experience, they can describe a war that they have heard before.After they write their experience down, share them in the group.Then choose a special to give a report in front of the cla.Step8.Homework

1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

We all have a fight with our friends.Write your experience down and share with your clamates.You may think it’s funny for to do such a thing at that time.It will help you to analyze yourself.Think over after cla :

Leon 32: Unit Review Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions from Leon25 to Leon31.Oral words and expreions from Leon25 to Leon31. Teaching Aim: 1.Learn to love and care for others.2.Know about how important the peace is for us.Teaching Important Points:

1.Talk about agreement and disagreement.2.The object clause.Teaching Difficult Points: The object clause Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: flashcards, audiotape, pictures Type of leon: review leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by discuing the importance of peace for us in the world.Finish the task in groups of three or four.Show some pictures to the students.Analyze the disadvantages that wars bring us.Make a list of it and show it to the cla.Step2.Do with the exercises the leon.Write down some difficulties on the blackboard.Then discu the use of them.Practice them again. Step3.Come to Grammar in Use.The object clause is the main part.Let some student make similar sentences in front of the cla.The others listen and find if they are right.Step4.Come to “Speaking the Language”.

Fill in the blanks with correct words.Make up similar dialogues in front of the cla.

Step5.Do with the comprehension part.Can the students answer the question fluently? If they have any difficulties, help them. Step6.Come to “Take This Quiz”.

Search on the Internet to find more information.Ask the students what they want to know.Let them search on the Internet before the cla.Then give a report to the cla the next day.Step7.Do with written part.If we have time in cla, finish it in cla in groups.If we don’t have enough time to do with it, we can have it done after cla.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

This is the summary of the unit.It includes the main points in this unit.Arranging it carefully before the cla, we can have a good review in the cla.We can do with the language points, the main grammar and practice the spoken English.Think over after cla :

Leon 33: Welcome, Guest!

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: shape, perhaps, though Teaching Aims:

1.Know more about the foreign culture.2.Good manners at table.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn different cultures.2.Practice the object complements and attributive clauses.Teaching Difficult Points: The object complements.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Lead in by discuing the following questions: What do you know about dinosaurs? List the names of some types of dinosaurs you know of.Discu the questions in groups.Every member writes his or her answers down.Then discu it in groups.Make a complete answer.Then present it in the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and answer the following questions: 1.Where was Danny yesterday afternoon? He was at Dinosaur School.2.Did Danny learn Dinosaur song at school? Yes, he did.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task Read the text and encourage the students to ask more questions about this part.S1: What did Danny learn at Dinosaur school? S2: He learned dinosaur culture.S3: When will they have dinner together? S4: On Saturday.Step4.Practice Do with the main grammar: the object complements.Point out the sentences with object complements: I find other cultures interesting.Make examples by the students: We must keep the claroom clean every day.Step5.Activity Invite your friend to your home.What do you do? Make up a dialogue with your partner.Then let them present it in front of the cla.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

What do you think dinosaur food is like? Do you think Brian and Jenny will like the food? Write down your ideas.Then share it with your partner.After a while, let some students show their answers in front of the cla.Remind them to tell the students why they think so.Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercise book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Students are strange to hear of the Dinosaur culture.We all want to know what real Dinosaur culture is, including their food, songs, clothes and so on.Give the students time to say some other countries’ culture in front of the cla.Let them search on the Internet for more information.Think over after cla :

Leon 34: Danny’s Dinosaur Dinner

Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: knock, hang, hang up, offer Oral words and expreions: hung, hanged Teaching Aims: 1.Know about the Dinosaur culture.2.Cultivate the students’ cooperation ability.Teaching Important Points: 1.Learn something about having a meal.2.The object complement and the attributive clause. Teaching Difficult Points: Have a meal.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Lead in by discuing the following questions:

Have you ever invited a guest to your home? Have you ever been a guest? What’s the worst food you’ve ever had?

Discu the following questions in groups.Then present it in front of the cla. Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the correct words you hear.1.When Jenny and Brian come to Danny’s home, he is in the _____.2.Danny gives Brian and Jenny some _____ to eat.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Reading task Read the text and decide the following statements are true or false.1.Jenny and Brian come to Danny’s home on Sunday.2.Jenny and Brian drink some milk in Danny’s home.3.Dinosaur food is certainly different.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again and retell the story in their own words.Correct their grammar mistakes after he finish telling the story. Ste5.Do with the language points: Make sentences with the useful phrases: Would like to…? Help yourself to… S1: Would you like some dumplings? S2: Yes, I’d love to.

S3: Would you like to have an apple? S4: No, thank you.Step6.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Divide the cla into several groups to finish the activity.Every member writes his ideas on a piece of paper.

Are guests important in your home? What do you do to make guests feel comfortable? Let the students show their dialogues out in front of the cla. Step7.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in cla.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

It is important for you to make your guests feel comfortable.At first, you must be polite.Then you can provide them with different drinks and fruits.Ask them what their favourite food is.Of course, as a guest, you must be polite enough, too Think over after cla :

Leon 35: Keeping Culture Alive Teaching Content:

Mastery words and expreions: hand in, strange, mind, share Oral words and expreions: Chinatown Teaching Aims:

1.Learn more about foreign cultures.2.Cultivate the students’ abilities.3.Grasp the important grammars.Teaching Important Points: 1.Know more about the Chinatown.2.Having meals.3.Object complements.Teaching Difficult Points: Object complements Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by discuing the following questions: Have you ever heard of Chinatown? What do you think of it?

Work in groups.Everyone writes his or her answers down.Then discu for five minutes.Present it in front of the cla.Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks.This is the _____ time for Danny to Chinatown.Would Chinese students visit _____ _____ _____.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Did Brian enjoy the school trip?

2.Is there an area called Little North America in Beijing? Finish the task in cla in oral.Step4.Read the text again.Then ask the students to retell the story in their own words.They can practice with her partner first.Step5.Do with the language points: Let the students read the text again.Sum the new words and language points in this leon.Make up sentences with the new words and the language points.S1: Must I hand in the paper now? S2: Let’s share the experience in the summer holiday.S3: I shall share the fruit with the little girls.S4: Will it rain tomorrow? S5: I don’t think so.Step6.Activity Group work.If there were Little North America in Beijing, what will it be like?

Divide the cla into groups to finish the task.Every member writes his or her answers down.Then change it with the others.Then choose the complete one to present in front of the cla.Step7.Come to “LET’S DO IT”.

Finish this part in groups of three or four.One student sums his group’s advice.Then present it in front of the cla.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Chinatown is used for Chinese in America.They can speak Chinese.It if convenient for those people who can’t speak English live there.They are all kinds of shops there.Think over after cla :

Leon 36: So We Can Be Friends Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: difference Oral words and expreions: Peru, Scotland, bagpipe Teaching Aims:

1.Learn more about the foreign culture.2.Learn to sing English songs.Teaching Important Points: 1.Keep one country’s culture.2.Grasp the object complement.3.How to use keep.Teaching Difficult Points: Keep one culture’s culture.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Show some pictures about the foreign culture.Pointing to the pictures, ask the students to gue where they are and what special culture they have.Step2.Listen to the tape for two times.While they are listening, let the students sing after it in a low voice.Step3.Read the song as a poem.Let them find if it has rhythms.

Step4.Ask the students to know the meaning of the song with the help of the pictures.Step5.Listen to the tape again and sing after if for several times. Step6.Let the volunteers sing in front of the cla.Step7.Come to PROJECT.1.List the differences between the Chinese and Chinese cultures.Finish it in work group.Talk about the different ways in China and Canada.What are the differences between the two countries?

2.Ask the students to act short plays out in front of the cla.Show what would happen in Canada and what will happen in China.Step8.Homework 1.Finish off the exercises in activity book.2.Go on the next reading in the student book.Summary:

Different countries have different culture.We must keep it.Students should know more about it.It can help them when they go abroad to study further.Ask the students to search more after the cla.Then present it in the next leon Think over after cla :

Leon 37: The Fox and the Stock

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: fox, flat, hardly, fetch, thin, stick, regard, realize, promise Oral words and expreions: stork, Aesop, rudely, beak Teaching Aims: 1.Learn about more about the foreign culture.2.The importance of cooperation in the world.3.Improve the student’s creation ability.Teaching Important Points: 1.The leons we learn from the story.2.The object complement and the attributive clauses.Teaching Different Points: Practice object complement and the attributive clauses.Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Lead in by discuing the following questions: Tell a story about the animals.What can we learn from the story? Finish the task in groups.Let some students come to the front and tell his cla his wonderful story.Step2.Listening task Listening to the tape and find the correct answers to the following questions.1.There is a _____ and a _____ in the story.2.The fox brought the soup in large flat _____.Finish the task in cla in oral.Step3.Read the text and answer the following questions: 1.Is the fox polite to the stork? 2.What are the stock’s noodles in? 3.Were they still friends? Finish the task in cla in oral.

Step4.Read and tell the stories by their own words.Step5.Do with the new language points in this text.1.“Certainly” said the stork, who was doing her best to be polite.Do one’s best

S1: I am doing my best to learn well.2.The stork fetched two tall, thin jars.Fetch=go and come back S2: Can you fetch me two bottles of water, please? Step6.Work in groups.Divide the cla into groups.Then one member of the group tells a story which are with animals about characters.Then let the others sum the leons that we learn from the story.Step7.Homework Find the most wonderful story after cla.Prepare to tell the cla in the next leon.Summary:

All of the students know many interesting stories about animals.We can learn important leons from the story.They must respect others in their life, or they might have a fight.This is the same as man.We must respect others in our life.Then we can have a peaceful world. Think over after cla :

Leon 38: One Country, Many Cultures

Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: central, although, respect Oral words and expreions: immigrant, tolerant, dancer Teaching Aims:

1.Know about the culture in the world.2.Keep one country’s culture.

3.Create the students’ basic abilities.Teaching Important Points: 1.The details about Canadian cultures.2.Different cultures have different features.1.Practice the object complement and the attributive clauses.Teaching Difficult Points: The object complement and the attributive clauses Teaching Preparation: pictures Teaching Aids: audiotape, flashcards, pictures Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step1.Come to “THINK ABOUT IT”.

Lead in by discuing the following questions: How many cultures does China have? How many can you name? What are some of the interesting things in your culture? Discu the questions above in groups.Then every group answers the questions one by one.Step2.Listen to the tape and fill in the blanks with the words you hear: 1.Only _____ percent of all Canadians are from First Nations.2.Canada has _____ official languages.Finish the task in cla in oral.

第19篇：冀教版九年级英语21课教案

Leon 21: Cookies, Please!

Teacher: Cao Juan Teaching Content: Mastery words and expreions: bill, purse, any other, afraid, safe, afford, coin Oral words and expreions: come up to, go over to, That’s too much expensive.I’m afraid I can’t afford it.Teaching Aims: Learn and review some words and expreions in interesting information about real and attempted products.

Talk about shopping.Teaching Important Points: The adverbial clause and articles.How to introduce your products to the customers.Teaching Difficult Points: Talk about shopping.Teaching Preparation: pictures and some objiects Teaching Aid: audiotape, flashcards, pictures vedio Type of leon: new leon Teaching Procedure: Step 1.Greeting

Step2.Lead in .Show something interesting to the students and then ask them : What are they?Do you want them ? Now ,let\'s go shopping with Danny and Brian.

Step3.Listen and choose true or false .1.On Thursday, Brian and Danny are making their products.2.You can buy four cookies for 1 dollar.3.Danny’s products have bags and paper.4.The girl thinks Danny’s products are safe. Step4Read and answer the following questions: When are Brian and Danny selling their products? Who buy cookies from Brian? Does anybody buy Danny’s product?

Step5.Read the text again and find ind a few useful“shopping”sentences from the reading .Step6.Explain the language points.Analyze the text in details.Encourage them to ask more questions about the text.Such as:

What do you think of Danny’s product? What do you think Brian’s cookies made of? Do you want to make some cookies by yourself/ Step 7.Listen to the tape and let the students imitate after it.At the same time, they must keep silent.Step 8.Do some exercises

Step9.Make a new dialogue about going shopping then let the students act out their new dialogue in the cla.

Ask the students take out something interesting and sell them in the cla.What do they want to sell? Who wants to buy? Do they have a deal? Observe if they have any difficulties.Help them in time.

Write some new words and phrases on the blackboard in order to build their vocabulary.Step10.Homework Finish off the activity book.Go on the next reading in the student book.Preview Leon 24.

第20篇：冀教版六年级英语下册教案

Leon 1.Ping-pong and Basketball 教学目标：

1． 知识目标：能四会单词sport，ping-pong，badminton，basketball，soccer，T-shirt，shorts，runners；能灵活使用句子What’s your favourite sport? My favoutite sport is ____./ I like ____ best.What do you wear? I wear ____ ,____ and____ to play ____.2． 能力目标：能运用所学的英语词汇和句式解决体育运动中所遇到的问题。 3． 情感目标：培养学生热爱运动的思想品质，提高对运动项目的认识。 教学重、难点：

要求四会的单词和要求掌握的句式。 教具、学具准备：

1． 单词卡片，要求四会单词的实物，课后习题卡（每人一份）。 2． 录音机或课件。 教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review 1.

Let’s gue.If you want to make supper/take a bath/watch TV/read books/buy things/play ping-pong.Where do you go? I go to the kitchen/the bathroom/the livingroom/the library/the store/the gym. 有必要的话，拿出这些词的卡片，进行复习一下。

(设计意图：这个环节的设置既复习了一些动词性词组，又引出了今天课文中提到的地点体育馆和商店。) 2.

利用单词卡片What’s your favourite clothes? My favourite clothes is ____.也可以直接提问学生：Today is warm/cool,what are you wearing? What’s your favourite clothes? (设计意图：这个环节的设置用来复习服装的词汇，同时复习What’s your favourite ____?这个句式，用这些词汇和句式引出新的服装词汇和新句式。) New Concepts 1． 利用复习二中的句式引出What’s your favourite sport?学习单词sport， 出示单词卡片，联系朗读，拼读。

并让学生模仿回答My favourite sport is ping-pong/badminton.2． 学生熟悉句式后，再利用实物和单词卡片学习单词 basketball，soccer.3． 带入句式进行练习。可以是连接式练习，也可以小组练习。

4． 告诉学生回答这个问题还可以使用一个更简单的句式I like ____ best.5． 两人一组做问答练习。

6． 让学生根据已有知识说出踢足球，打篮球都用play.(设计意图：利用已有知识引出新知识，减小教学的难度，同时可以放手让学生自己说出新句式，教师加以指导就可以了，通过练习巩固新知。) 7． If you want to play basketball, what do you wear?学习服装词汇I wear shorts，T-shirt.并引出runners,出示单词卡片，拼读单词，并让学生练习用这些词说一个句子。 8． 两人一组练习这组句式。

9． 听录音两遍，注意any和some,either 和too的读音和用法。 10.完成课后习题并两人一组自编对话。 11.利用实物汇报演出。

（设计意图：学习第二部分内容时,要把either 和too的用法提一下, any和some的用法留到第二课去解决。编对话的内容可根据完成习题的内容进行，并利用实物表演出来，运用于实际生活中。） Cla Cloing

Activity book Homework

Draw your favourite sport and write your favourite sport.板书设计：

Leon 1.Ping-pong and Basketball What’s your favourite sport? My favoutite sport is ____.I like ____ best.What do you wear?

I wear ____ ,____ and____ to play ____.课后习题：

一． 填单词并连线：

b__dm__nt__n

篮球

T-sh__ __t

运动鞋 p__ng-p__ng

羽毛球

sh__ __ts

T恤衫 s__cc__ __

乒乓球

r__nn__ __s

短裤 b__sk__tb__ll

足球 二． 填空：

1．What’s your favourite sport? My favoutite sport is ____.I like ____ best.

2．What do you wear?

I wear ____ ,____ and____ to play ____.课后反思：

Leon2.At the Sports Store 教学目标：

1.知识目标：能四会单词need,any,or；理解any，some的用法；能灵活使用句子We need some ping-pong balls.Do you have any balls? Do you like this T-shirt or that T-shirt? I like this one.Do you like these runners or those runners? I want these runners.

2.能力目标：能利用所学的词汇和句子到商店买东西，提高综合语言运用能力,解决实际生活中的问题。

3.情感目标：让学生学会独立买东西，学会看价钱和计算价格。教学重、难点：要求四会的单词和要求掌握的句式。 教具、学具准备：

1.

单词卡片,运动服装,乒乓球,纸币，课后习题卡（每人一张）。 2.

录音机或课件。 教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review

1． 分给学生不同的球，让学生自己说出I like to play ____.My favourite sport is ____./ I like ____ best.2． T: What’s this/that? S: It’s a T-shirt? T: Do you like this T-shirt or that T-shirt? S: I like this one.T: What are these/those? S: They are runners.T: Do you like these runners or those runners? S: I like/want these runners.(设计意图：利用已有知识引出新知识，减小教学的难度，or在以前的教学中已多次用到，学生都已掌握，不必再多费时间，加深学生对this，that， these，those用法的印象为下面的学习做铺垫。) New Concepts 1.

If I want to play ping-pong，we need some ping-pong balls.Say “need”,please.让学生利用 need 造句。

2.

Do you have any balls? Say “any”,please.讲清some和any的用法，都跟可数名词的复数或不可数名词，如：some/any shorts；some/any soup；some用在肯定句中，any用在否定和问句中，举例说明。 3.

完成课后习题。 4.

听录音两至三遍。同时讲解美元和元的区别。如：one dollar，two dollars；one yuan，two yuan.练习一下如何问多少钱How much is it? How much are they? 5.

布置商店的环境，让学生根据课文编短剧，

三、四人一组。6.

汇报演出。

（设计意图：本课是对话形式的课文教学，主要是环境的设置，要让学生在实际的生活环境中学习本文，首先要解决课文中的重难点，也就是新单词和一些主要句式，理清脉络。突破了重难点，理清了脉络，学生在表演对话时就没有很大的困难了。） Cla Cloing Activity book Homework 亲自到体育用品商店买一次东西并运用所学语言。 板书设计：

Leon2.At the Sports Store We need some ping-pong balls.Do you have any balls? 课后习题： 一． 改错：

these book

this runners

some ball those pencil

that T-shirts

any soups 二． 选词填空：

1． Do you like ______T-shirt or ______T-shirt? 2． Do you like ______shorts or ______shorts? 3． We need ______ ping-pong balls.Do you have ______ balls? (any, some, these, those, this, that) 课后反思：

Leon 3.At the Gym 教学目标：

1．知识目标：能四会单词light,heavy,throw,catch,hit；能灵活使用句子The basketball is heavy.The ping-pong ball is light.I’m throwing/catching the basketball.I’m hitting the ping-pong ball.

2．能力目标：能利用所学的词汇和句子表演本课对话并运用于打篮球和乒乓球的活动中。

3.情感目标：培养学生对两种球类运动的喜爱之情。教学重、难点：要求四会的单词和要求掌握的句式。 教具、学具准备：

1.

单词卡片,石头,羽毛等轻重对比的物体,篮球,篮筐,乒乓球,乒乓球拍,球网，有条件可带学生去操场上这节课，课后习题卡（每人一张）。 2.

录音机或课件。 教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review

1.

T:Hello, cla! What’s your favourite sports? S:My favourite sport is ____.

2.

T:I want to learn basketball/ping-pong ball.Can you teach me? S:Yes.

(设计意图：开头直接提出老师想学打篮球和乒乓球，让学生做小老师教，激发了学生的学习兴趣，增强了学生的自信心。) New Concepts 1．

教师右手拿篮球并说The basketball is heavy.左手拿乒乓球并说The ping-pong ball is light.让学生模仿练习。

2．

利用准备的实物练习heavy 和light.

3．

教师告诉学生篮筐是net,拿着篮球投篮，边投边说I’m throwing the basketball.Say “throw,throwing”,please.学生模仿练习。

4．

教师没投中就说This is too hard.The basketball is too heavy.学生模仿练习。 5．

教师拿着乒乓球投篮，一下就投中了就说This is too easy.The ping-pong ball is light.学生模仿练习。

6．

然后把篮球传给别的学生并说I’m throwing the basketball.He’s catching the basketball.Say “catch,catching”,please.学生模仿练习。

7．

教师又拿起乒乓球拍并告诉学生This is a paddle.I’m hitting the ping-pong ball.Say “paddle,hit,hitting”,please.学生模仿练习。 8．

听录音两至三遍，完成课后习题。 9．

学生分组编对话。 10.汇报演出。

(设计意图：这节课的教学可在教室布置环境也可以到操场去上，让学生真正体会篮球和乒乓球运动，激发学习兴趣。在句子中学习单词，做到词不离句，最后过度到对话练习，形成篇章，对学生的综合语言运用能力有了很大的提升。) Cla Cloing Activity book Homework 课下打篮球和乒乓球并把所学语言运用进去。 板书设计：

Leon 3.At the Gym The basketball is heavy. The ping-pong ball is light.I’m throwing/catching the basketball.I’m hitting the ping-pong ball.课后习题：

一． 根据要求写单词：

写出现在分词形式

写出反义词 hit---

heavy---

throw---

hard--- catch---

this--- learn---

these--- teach--- 二． 填空：

1．I want to ____ basketball.Can you ____ me? 2.The basketball is ____.The ping-pong ball is ____.

3.

I’m ____ing the basketball.He’s ____ing the basketball. 4.

I’m ____ting the ping-pong ball.课后反思：

Leon4 Where did you go? 教学目标：知识目标：1.bought, taught and thought 2.the story 3.a song 能力目标：1.past tense 2.where did you do? 3.What did you do？

情感目标：When you play things, you must get good corporation with your players.教学重点、难点：1.I am throwing the basketball.2.hitting and throwing 教具、学具：some balls and story a tape and pictures 教学过程：

一.

Cla opening and review

Review “ past tense” and “ future tense” verbs with a game.Write three columns of words on the blackboard and ask for volunteers to match them correctly.As each student makes a match, he or she says “Yesterday I___de.Today I___.Tomorrow I am going to__.Introduce Add “buy” “teach” and “think” to your “today” column.Ask the students to give you the future tense for each verb and write them under your “tomorrow” column.Then write “taught” “thought” “bought” in a different order than the other two columns, and ask the students to gue how they match with the present-tense verbs.Point out the similarities in spelling “bought” “taught” “thought” Use the student book

Pause after Number 1 in the student book.Review the story so far.Today Jenny and Li Ming went to the store buy some clothes for Li Ming to the pictures in the student book.Who are they talking to?

Note the word “player” in the leon.A “players” plays something, such as a sport.Practice

Play “What’s wrong?” to practice the new past tense verbs, and other tenses and verbs.Play “spelling Bee” to practice spelling any vocabulary in this unit.Tech “Oh, what did you do?” in Number 3 of the student book.Use the activity book

Number 2 in the activity book is a listening exercise.The students listen to each sentence on the audiotape and change it into the past—tense.Here’s how the audiotape goes: 板书：

Leon4 Where did you go? bought taught thought Where did you do? What did you do？习题：

l

写出buy teach think 的过去式。 l

用Where did you do?练习说话。 l

用What did you do？练习说话。 课后反思：

Leon5 A basketball game

教学目标：知识目标：1.player and team, game 2．win and lost

能力目标：1.Demonstrate “win” and “lose” after the game is done 2.play a game of “spelling Bee”

情感目标：When you get lose, you don’t lose your heart.Try it again and again.You will win at last.

教学重点、难点：1.words about the game 2.win and lose

教具、学具：A big picture of this leon and a tape 教学过程：

Cla opening and review

Play “Charades” to review occupations the students mastered in Levels 1, 2 and 7: teacher, clerk, cashier, waitre and bus driver.After the students have gueed these occupations, add “doctor” and “police officer”.The students mastered these words orally in Level 1, but they haven’t seen them for a long time.Whisper the translation for these occupations to the students acting them out, and help the cla gue the occupations with lots of prompts and encouragement.You can, for example, draw blanks on the blackboard and slowly write in the letters as you sound out more and more of each occupation.Introduce

Demonstrate “player” “team” “game” with six volunteers and a game of “spelling bee” divide the volunteers into two teams of three.Give player a sheet of coloured paper to hold, the same colour for each team.Demonstrate “win” and “lose” after the game is done.Point to the teams and as you say “You win/lose”

Use the student book Pause after Number 1 in the student book.Review the story so far.Li Ming and Jenny have been learning about sports.Look at the pictures in the student book.What are they doing now?

Note some of the idiom in this leon: Bob plays basketball “for fun” Jenny and Li Ming “jump up and down” Li Ming asks Jenny “What’s the score?” What do the students think these phrases mean? Practice Divide the cla into small groups.In each group.Some students pretend that they want to learn a game that the other students know how to learn a game that you play in cla.Do the activity book Cla closing 板书：

Leon5 A basketball game player team game win

lost习题：

l

用win和lost练习说话。 l

连线：player

队

team

游戏

game

运动员 课后反思：

Leon 6 Who won? 教学目标：

1、正确理解、区分win—won, lose—lost

2、练习并准确应答What did you do？

教学重、难点：

1、学会探究学习时态的方法，理解过去时与现在时的不同用法；

2、能够理解和运用What did you do? 教具、学具：磁带、单词卡片。 教学过程：

一、

探究性学习准备

（1）

师生问候打招呼，并进行口语对话。

（2）

用What’s wrong?游戏来复习已学过动词的过去时、现在时和将来时结构。 （设计思路：以学生喜爱的游戏方式进行复习，使这课一开始大家就有个好兴致。）

二、

探究性学习的展开

Teaching key concepts 教师开门见山询问：What did you do yesterday?学生回答完毕，紧追问What did Jenny and Li Ming do this evening?让学生回忆上节课学习的内容并谈论一下比赛实况。 让学生听录音，回答问题。 探究问题一

1.

Did Bob’s team play a game? 2.

Who won? 3.

Who lost?

4.

What snacks did they buy?

学生小组合作，根据教师提供的录音内容，回答问题。 探究问题二

认真听录音，复述Bob’s basketball game

小结：通过提示词Yesterday—Bob’s team played—good game--played hard—won—lost—yelled--bought帮助学生复述故事。

最后，请学生小组内进行比赛，巩固记忆动词的过去式。

三、探究练习训练

利用动词卡片向学生展示yesterday\today\tomorrow不同时间的区别，对What did you do? What are you doing? What are you going to do?三组句子进行词汇替换。

小组内就关于从某地回到家中，向父母讲述去过哪里、做过什么等内容组织对话。

四、探究学习补充

活动手册有时间在课上做，没时间可说明要求，作为家庭作业。 （设计思路：活动手册是很重要的一个内容，可利用它检查学生对所学知识的掌握情况） 板书设计：

Yesterday—Bob’s team played—good game--played hard —won—lost—yelled--bought习题

一、

仿照例句写句子

Eg. Yesterday we worked.Today we work.Tomorrow we are going to work.

1、

Yesterday we______.Today we win.Tomorrow we are going to________.

2、

Yesterday we _________.Today we __________.Tomorrow we are going to buy something.

3、

Yesterday we lost.Today we________.Tomorrow we _______________.

二、

找出下列答句所对应的问句 1.(

) I am playing basketball.2.(

) I am going to jump.3.(

) I bought runners.4.(

) I walk to school.A.What did you do yesterday? B.What are you going to do tomorrow? C.What are you doing now? D.What do you do from Monday to Friday？ 课后反思：

Leon7: Are you ready for a quiz ?

一、教学目标

1、知识目标

带领学生复习本单元的重点内容： ①重点词汇： any, heavy, light or bought, taught, thought sport, basketball, ping-pong, runners, shorts, T-shirt, game, player, team catch, throw, hit, need, win, lose ②重点句型：

—What did you do? —I/We ____.③过去时的应用。

2、能力目标

要求学生能够灵活运用所学知识谈论与运动相关的话题。

3、情感目标

使学生明白体育运动的好处和重要性，鼓励学生积极参加体育运动。

二、教学重点、难点：

1、教学重点

英语故事

2、教学难点 any, heavy, light or bought, taught, thought sport, basketball, ping-pong, runners, shorts, T-shirt, game, player, team catch, throw, hit, need, win, lose —What did you do? —I/We ____.过去时的应用。

三、教具准备：磁带、英语故事书

四、教学过程

一、

Cla opening and review Play a game “What’s miing?”

（规则：把词汇卡片竖放在教室前面，告诉学生看1分钟的卡片后闭上眼睛,然后教师移开一张卡片。让学生睁开眼睛，设法指出教师移走了哪张卡片。提问每个学生让其说出移走的卡片的名称，直到猜对正确答案为止。让学生重新看到那张移走的卡片，并把它放回原处。那名猜对正确答案的学生可以在移走另一张卡片，让大家接着猜。）

二、

1.

讨论leon 7: 的这几幅图片。（这几幅图片和问题都是本单元的重点知识，让学生讨论根据图片来描述不仅锻炼了孩子的口语表达能力，同时也复习了前面的知识。） 2.

听课文录音。

因为听力对于学生来说也很重要，安排这样一个练习，不仅强化了学生的知识，同时听力也得到了锻炼。

三、

New concept1.利用《活动手册》、《故事书》和录音带带领学生复习。

1、

讨论故事

a、

oes anyone know any characters in this story？ b、Does anyone rember what the Diffos like to do ？ c、What does David do differently in this story ？ d、Is his friend happy or mad ？ （本故事共分了三个情节，fly a kite , play egg ping-pong , play melon basketball .在讨论的时候也把这个故事分成三个部分来进行）

2、

听录音

1）

先整体听一边。 2）

在分成三部分来听。

3、

练习

第一部分练习

填空。

One day , Dvied Difo was () with his fiend jeff .they were () kites .it was a hot day .there was no () .the diffos () flew () in the wind .

第二部分练习

判断

1.

They donot need eggs .

2.

Jff taught Dvied to play egg ping-pong .

3.

Can David hit the ping-pong balls ? No, he cannot. 4.

Jeff is not a good player .

5.

David teaches Jeff to play egg ping-pong .

Cla closing。 Student book：Leon 7Homework：《Activity Book》

五、板书设计

Leon 7：Are you ready for a quiz ?

a.Does anyone know any characters in this story？ b.Does anyone rember what the Diffos like to do？ c.What does David do differently in this story ？

六、练习题

（一）选择题：

1 What sport do you like best ? I like to

best .a , play the badminton

b , play badminton

c, play the guitar

d, play the ping-pong 2 would like to learn to play ping-pong ?

a ,yes ,I do

b, no , I donot c ,yes , I would . d , yes , I can

3.Jenny and Li Ming________ something at the store yesterday morning.

A.bought

B.thought

C.buy

（二）写出相对应的过去式：

play

have

go

teach

hit

hurt

want

think

buy

课后反思：

Leon8 Again, please.

一、教学目标： 1.知识目标 ①重点词汇： any, heavy, light or bought, taught, thought sport, basketball, ping-pong, runners, shorts, T-shirt, game, player, team catch, throw, hit, need, win, lose ②重点句型：

—What did you do? —I/We ____.③过去时的应用。 2.能力目标

要求学生能够灵活运用所学知识谈论与运动相关的话题。

3.情感态度，价值观：使学生明白体育运动的好处和重要性，鼓励学生积极参加体育运动。运用游戏激发学生学习英语的兴趣，小组、同桌合作学习，形成师生互动、生生互动培养学生合作精神，并对其他学生所说的话给予适当的回应，让每个孩子感知英语的特有的魅力，通过努力，体验成功！

二、教学重、难点： any, heavy, light or bought, taught, thought sport, basketball, ping-pong, runners, shorts, T-shirt, game, player, team catch, throw, hit, need, win, lose —What did you do? —I/We ____.过去时的应用。

三、教具准备

课件、六年级配套光盘、单词卡

四、教学过程：

Step1 Warming-up and revision 1．学生互相问候，建立氛围。

2．利用节奏轻快的Chant复习几类sports ，为下面的授课营造良好的气氛。 3.展示课件大标题，让同学们谈论“Your favourite sport.” 找几名自告奋勇的学生谈论。

4.看幻灯片中的表格，小组合作完成。

在这一环节中，学生间介绍自己通过调查得出的结果，把单词揉合于句型中，进行语言交流，使整个教学源于生活，又用于生活，让学生学得有趣，学得有用，体验成功。 Step2 Practise

1.Play a game “What’s miing?”

（规则：把词汇卡片竖放在教室前面，告诉学生看1分钟的卡片后闭上眼睛,然后教师移开一张卡片。让学生睁开眼睛，设法指出教师移走了哪张卡片。提问每个学生让其说出移走的卡片的名称，直到猜对正确答案为止。让学生重新看到那张移走的卡片，并把它放回原处。那名猜对正确答案的学生可以在移走另一张卡片，让大家接着猜。） 2.Practice

规则：教师出示几个一般现在时的句子，学生把它们变成一般过去时。 3.Text

Step3 Cla closing Let’s chant.

五、板书：

Leon8:Again , Please! sport

六、练习题

快乐过去式你来填

buy __________teach _________ think ___________ win __________ lose ___________ play ___________

watch ___________

写反义词。

win ________ lost ___________ light ___________

catch _________ 选择填空。

(

)1.Ping-pong is my favourite sport.I like ping-pong________.

A.better

B.best

C.good

(

)2.This ball is_______, I can throw it easily.

A.light

B.heavy

C.hard

(

)3.Jenny and Li Ming________ something at the store yesterday morning.

A.bought

B.thought

C.buy

(

)4.Do you like this T-shirt________ that T-shirt?

A.and

B.as

C.or

(

)5.I buy a________ of runners and a hat________ Kim.

A.pairs……for

B.pair……to

C.pair……for (

)6.You must hit the ball________ the paddle.

A.with

B.in

C.at (

)7.Do you have any_________ ?

A.shoes

B.coat

C.jacket

(

)8.Jenny and Li Ming arrive _________ the gym at 7:00.

A.in

B.on

C.at

(

)9.Danny thought he _________ hit the ball, but he hurt his hand.

A.can

B.could

C.can’t

(

)10.What snacks did you buy?

I bought a_________ and pop.

A.snack

B.hot dog

C.rice 按要求完成句子。（8分）

1. has, team, a, many, players(连词成句)

2. What did you do yesterday?(回答问题)

3. I fly kites in the park.(变一般将来时)

4。What is Jenny doing now?(用打篮球回答)

七、课后反思：

Leon 9 Always eat breakfast!

一、教学目标：

（一）知识： 1.巩固内容：

always, sometimes, usually, never等表示频度的词汇。 2.掌握四会词汇和句型： ①healthy, strong, weak, week ②—How often do you ____? —____ times a ____.

（二）能力：

学生能用所学词汇句型说出有关健康的句子。

（三）情感：

帮助学生明白早餐的重要性，培养学生关注健康、关心他人的品质。

二、教学重点、难点： 重点：四会词汇和句型

难点：—How often do you ____? —____ times a ____.句型的理解和运用。

三、教具、学具： 图片、录音机、

四、教学过程：

Cla Opening and Review

Greeting.Play a game: Never, Never Key Concepts ①healthy, strong, weak, week ②—How often do you ____? —____ times a ____.Introduce

Use puppets to role-play “healthy”, “strong”,” weak”and “sick”.P1: (Sad, coughing.) I feel sick.Sick.Say it, please, cla.C: Sick.P2: (Happy, energetic.) I don’t feel sick.I feel healthy! Healthy.Say it, please.C: Healthy.

P1: I am weak.Look! ( Try to carry a chair, but can’t.) This chair is too heavy.I am weak.Weak.Say it, please.C: Weak.

P2: Not me.I am strong.(To Puppet 1.) May I help you with that chair? ( Carry it.) There! The chair is heavy, but I am strong.Strong.Say it, please.C: Strong.

Show the pictures and introduce these words.

Write “healthy”, “strong”,” weak”and “sick”on the blackboard.Ask the students try to translate them.Drill

Ask the students to say who is strong/ healthy/ weak/ sick.Student book No.1 Introduce

T: Everyone wants to be strong and healthy.Do you? Let’s learn what to do.First, always eat breakfast.Because it’s good for you! Do you always eat breakfast? Let’s look.Here is a chart.This is a week.There are seven days in a week.What are they? (Say Monday, Tuesday……) T: When did you eat breakfast last week?

Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Student 1

Student 2

„„

Introduce How often did you eat breakfast last week? Once/ Twice/ Three times/…… a week.Student book and audiotape

Play the audiotape and answer the questions:

How often did Danny/ Kim/ Li Ming eat breakfast last week? Practice

T: We can say other things.For example: How often do you play ping-pong? Ask the students to say some sentences.

Ask the students to make up appropriate sentences about how often and make up a chart. Ask the students to introduce their charts.

Activity book.

Cla closing.

五、板书设计

Leon 9: Always eat breakfast!

图片

Strong and healthy

图片

Weak and sick

—How often do you ____? —____ times a ____.

(Once a week;

Twice a week.)

六、练习： (一)填空：

1.I always eat breakfast.I am ______ and _______ .2.Liu Hong never eats breakfast.She is _______ and ______ .(二)写句子：

Write three sentences with How often ________ ?

七、课后反思：

Leon 10 Always Brush Your Teeth !

一、

教学目标 A.知识目标

1．

Review and use the keywords : before and after .2．

Students can read ,listen , say and write the vocabulary: teeth ,brush your teeth ,face ,wash your face , comb( your hair ).3.Important sentence :What do you do before / after ____? B.能力目标

1、学生能够正确运用短语brush„teeth , wash„face ,comb„hair ,并知道人称的变化。 2.能够掌握before ,after 的用法。 C.情感目标

通过学习，学生能对本课内容产生兴趣，主动参与教学活动，认真理解短文内容，并养成讲究卫生的好习惯。

二、重难点

after , before , teeth ,face , brush , comb

三、教学准备

Objects (toothbrush , comb …) word-cards , clock

四、学具准备

paper , clock , marker

五、教学过程

(一)Cla Opening and Review

1.Greeting :Good morning ,cla !How are you ?How’s the weather today ? 2.Review ：Look at some pictures and actions ,ask several questions How often do you ____?

What do you do ___? 设计意图：在游戏中复习已经学过的单词，避免枯燥乏味的单纯记忆，让学生自己主动的记忆。

3.Sing a song :In the Bathroom .(Review the names about body ) (二)New concepts Step 1: Introduce : Show the cards to remember “teeth , face ”

T: Do actions to introduce “brush your teeth ” and “comb your hair”

设计意图：用实际动作演练介绍单词，学生既爱学，又学的快，理解的容易。 T: Look , it’s 6:30 , I often brush my teeth .Then , I wash my face .

T: What do you do ?

What are you doing ? Step 2 : Play a game : Gue

Review the phrases such as “eat breakfast , get up , wash …hands , wash …face , brush …teeth , comb …hair ”

Step3 : Demonstrate: Draw three clocks to show : 6:45

7:00

7:15 7:00

I want to eat breakfast at 7：00.

6:45

Before I eat breakfast , I brush my teeth .7:15

After I eat breakfast , I go to school .

设计意图：通过出示图片，创设情境，让学生在意义的、生动有趣的情景中接触所学的新内容。

T : Let’s repeat ,before and after .

Can you say some sentences with these two words ? Practice in groups .Show

设计意图：通过小组中的互相练说，克服学生一个人怕说错的思想，在集思广义中说出自己能想到的句子，同时不限定于一个句型，培养学生的发散思维。在小组练习中，提高了学生发言的积极性，说的机会也增多了，加上教师或基础好的学生的及时指导，学生的表达能力也会有所提高。

Play the audiotape and read the dialogue , check up understanding .Show the exercises : Listen and order ( ) Jenny wakes up .

( ) Jenny brushes her teeth .( ) Jenny eats breakfast .

( ) Jenny washes her face and hands .( ) Jenny combs her hair .( ) Jenny goes to school .

设计意图： 在听的过程中为孩子预留了任务，符合英语课标中提倡的任务型教学，并且能引导学生注意听得重点内容，为他的学习提供了方向。 (三)Cla closing

Activity Book : No 2 Listen .Answer the questions .Exercise

写出下列单词的反义词

1、weak----

2.sick---

3.this---

4.that--- 5.near---

6.quiet---

7.fast---

8.before--- 回答问题

1．

How often do you go to school ? 2．

How often do you wash your face ?

3、

What do you do before you eat breakfast ?

4、

What do you do after you eat supper ? 写出下列短语

1．洗脸

2、刷牙

3、梳头

4、吃早饭 课后反思：

Leon 11：This Is Good for You

一、

教学目标：

1、

知识技能：（1）学生能够听、说、读、写单词：bones, muscles ,skin 并能用英语进行表达。

（2）

学生能复习掌握并实际做对话：What`s your favourite fruit？ My favourite fruit is

。

（3）

学生能够联系旧知结合新知掌握课文中的重点单词和句子。

2、

过程与方法：通过师生、生生间的问答练习、游戏等活动，使学生在轻松、活跃的课堂中获得知识。

3、

情感态度：通过学习本单元的前三篇课文，学生知道什么是对身体健康有好处的，培养学生养成良好的卫生习惯。

二、

教学重点：

（1）学生能掌握四会单词：bones, muscles ,skin。

（2）

并且能够运用句型 What`s your favourite fruit？ My favourite fruit is

。 做对话。

三、

教学难点：

学生能够理解运用身体健康的句子。

四、

教具准备：

实物水果、食物卡片、CAI课件等。

五、教学过程：

教

学

设

计 设 计 意 图 （1）Cla Opening and Review a．Greeting :

Good morning ,everyone ! „„.b． Review words ：apple , banana , grapes , orange , melon , strawberry with real objects and make dialogue : What`s your favourite fruit？ My favourite fruit is

。 c .game : do the activity

eg.Wash face ,wash hand ,comb hair ,get up ,eat breakfast …… （2）New concepts a．Demonstrate : bones, muscles ,skin with some pictures on the computer .Ask the Ss to pay more attention to “s” .Lead the Ss to read these new words several times .b .Introduce the sentences of part 1 on the computer too.Play the audiotape part 1 as the Ss follow.Then ask the Ss to discribe the pictures .

c .Practice : listen to the radio and fill in the blank : ★

These are

.For strong

, you need to eat foods that are good for you 。

★

This is a

.For strong

, you need exercise .★

This is

.Healthy

is clean

.d ．game : Show some pictures of food and let the Ss to divide them : which one is good for you or bad for you .And this food good for you is good food .just like : fish ,fruit ,meat ……

e .Discuion : Ask Ss to make a discu of what good for your health is .Then show the sentence :A healthy body has healthy bones ,muscles and skin .

Blackboard design：

Leon 11：This Is Good for You bones

muscles

skin What`s your favourite fruit？ My favourite fruit is

。 Exercise ：

1 ．写出下列短语：

洗脸

刷牙

梳头

吃早饭 2 ．写单词：

These are

.（骨头） This is

.（皮肤）

This is a

.For strong

, you need exercise .（肌肉） A healthy body has healthy

and

.

3 .回答问题：

What`s your favourite fruit？

用游戏作为教学开头，活跃课堂气氛。复习了以前学过的单词，为后半部分教学做好铺垫。

用CAI课件上的图片和身体的肢体去表达骨骼、肌肉、皮肤等单词的含义。

使教学内容更简单、更直观，学生更容易理解和接受。活跃了学生的脑思维，将身体部位和英语单词有机结合起来，学生学起来比较感兴趣。

听音做事是英语课堂教学中一种很有效的途径，也是练习听力的一种有效的方法，做到了听和写的结合。

利用游戏使学生认识到什么食物是对身体有好处的，什么食物是对身体有害的。给学生创造一个快乐的学习环境。

小组合作并讨论，在复习旧知的基础上总结巩固新知。 课后反思：

Leon12: Eat Your Vegetables! Teaching content Student book 8 Unit2 Leon12: Eat Your Vegetables!

Grade Grade Six Teaching time 40 minutes Teaching objectives 1.

使学生能听、说、读和写词汇： cabbage, onions, month。 2.

使学生能够描述自己日常的饮食。 3.

能完成有关饮食的调查表。 Teaching material analyses Teaching focal points

1、使学生能听、说、读和写词汇： cabbage, onions, month。

2、使学生能够描述自己日常的饮食。

Teaching difficulty points

1、能完成有关饮食的调查表。

2、能够在日常生活中，恰当的使用How often„?句型。 Teaching aids tape recorder and tape, vegetables, CAI.Teaching steps

Warming-up and revision:

一、Greeting.

二、利用词汇卡片复习：beverage、meat、fruit。New concepts:

一、

学习cabbage、peas、onions.

1、

利用谜语学习peas。 They are small.They are green.They live in the house.What are they?

2、

使用实物学习cabbage、onions。

⑴

Put the cabbage in the box.Let student touch and gue.What is it? ⑵

The students talk about the cabbage.For example: What colour is it? Heave or light? Do you like cabbage? ⑶

Put the onion in the box.Let student touch and gue.What is it? ⑷

The students talk about the onion.

二、练习对话。

1、

T：How often do you eat peas? S: Once a week.T: How often do you eat cabbage? S: …

2、

小组练习对话。

3、

听录音并完成下表。（不看书） How often does Danny eat

day week month year donuts?

cabbage?

peas?

onions?

4、

订正上表，并让学生描述内容。

三、

小组练习，用调查表的形式调查一位同学的饮食习惯。 a)

小组调查并填表。 b)

展示各组表格。

c)

描述并评论同学饮食是否健康。

四、

出示健康饮食表。

a)

出示一张小学生健康饮食表。 b)

谈论饮食表。

c)

对照饮食表说说自己饮食有哪些不好的习惯？

五、

Homework。

制作一张适合自己的健康饮食表。

六、Cla closing.板书：

Leon 12 : Eat Your Vegetables ! How often does Danny eat

day week month year donuts?

cabbage?

peas?

onions?

Exercises :

一、Choose the right answers to the questions .

1.

What colour is cabbage ?

( ) 2.

When do you wake up everyday ?

( ) 3.

Do you like peas ?

( ) 4.

How often does Danny eat donuts ?

( ) 5.

What do you do before supper ?

( ) A.

I wake up at 7:00 in the morning .B.

Danny eats donuts about twice a day .C.

It’s green .

D.

I often do my homework .E.

Yes , I do .

二、Write the words in the correct order .1.do , how , eat , often , you , onions

_________________________________

2.like , would , some , you , cabbage

_________________________________

1.

eat , I , month , a , about , peas , twice 课后反思：

Leon 13 ：Exercise 教学目标：

1、Students can read，write，say and aurally understand the vocabulary：minutes，hours，exercise

2、教授歌谣“Everyone, Everyone, Reach up High”

使学生能跟着节拍边做动作边说歌词。

3、通过本课教学，使学生了解健康的生活方式应加强体育锻炼。教学重、难点：

1、掌握本课四会单词: minutes, hours, exercise 是重点。

2、如何在实际中灵活运用 How much/How many/How often 是难点。 教具、学具：

一个带有分针的钟表、录音机、课文录音带。 教学过程：

一、Cla Opening and Review：

1、Play“

What Time Is It” to review how to say times.

2、Play“Simon Says” to review actions and phrases such as：ride a bike, walk, run, jump,play ping-pong等。

二、Key Concepts：

1、Introduce：

(1) Demonstrate“minute, hour”with a big clock.

(2) Demonstrate“exercise” with five volunteers.Ask each volunteer (in a whisper ) to perform an action(use the actions recommended for “Simon Says” above.) Ask the cla to gue what he or she is doing.Then ask all the volunteers to perform their actions at the same time and lead a dialogue：

T: Look! They are exercising!(Point to each volunteer) Riding a bike is exercise.Playing ping-pong is exercise.Walking is exercise.What else is exercise?(Point to the next volunteer.) __ing is ...

C: …exercise.

T: Right! (Point to the final volunteer.) And __ing is …

C: …exercise.T: Very good!

2、Use the Student Book and Audiotape: (1)《教科书》第一部分 T：Exercise helps make your body healthy and strong.出示问题：What is exercise? How much exercise do you need? 学生边看书边听课文录音，同桌讨论后回答。回答第一题引出动名词短语作主语这一知识点，板书：Riding a bike/Walking to school/Running/Playing ping-pong is exercise.回答第二题时引出How much 与 How many 的区别，并利用钟表演示使学生能回答: How many minutes are there in an hour?/How many minutes make an hour? (2)《教科书》第二部分 出示问题：How many minutes dose Danny exercise? How often dose Danny exercise? How many minutes dose Danny walk to school? 听课文录音小组讨论后

得出结论：Danny needs to get more exercise.采取多种方式操练：同桌对话、小记者采访的形式询问同学们的锻炼情况，在活动中复习并巩固句式的运用，深刻领悟锻炼的重要性。

3、Practice: Teach “Everyone, Everyone, Reach up High” in Number 3 of the student book.

(1) Play the audiotape, the students follow words and pictures in their books.(2) Teach line by line, students to repeat.

(3) Finally play the audiotape again, students chant along and do the actions.(4) 各组选派一名台前表演。

三、Cla Closing:

Homework:(1) 画出一些动作或尽量用动作表演出来来练说:___ing is exercise.

(2) 课余将所学chant 带动作表演给家人或朋友。

(3) Make a chart : 了解身边人的锻炼情况。

板书 ：

Leon 13

Exercise

Sixty minutes make an hour!

Riding a bike

Walking to school

is exercise

Running

Playing ping-pong习题：

一、Fill in the blanks.

1、_____ helps make your body healthy and strong.

2、Sixty m_____make an h____.

二、根据答句补全问句：

1、_________exercise do you need a day?

I need about twenty minutes of exercise a day.

2、__________minutes do you need to walk to school?

I need about five minutes to walk to school

3、___________do you play ping-pong?

I play ping-pong three times a week.课后反思：

Leon 14 Work Hard 教学设计

教学目标：

1.知识方面：能听、说、读、写和正确运用high、low和homework等单词。2.能力方面：能够在日常生活中灵活运用所学的词汇和句型。 How often do you

?

_______ times a

.

How many minutes do you _____ ____? About ____ minutes.3.情感态度，价值观：通过分组练习、游戏培养学生合作互助精神、通过本课主题培养学生健康的生活观念。 教学重难点：

1.使学生听写词汇 homework、high、low、等单词 2.使学生能灵活、运用并练习句型 。

How

often

do you ___ ___?

About ____minutes.教学过程：

Step1 Warming-up and revision

一、Greeting.

二、Chant.（内容） Everyone，everyone.

reach up high，high、high、high.everyone, everyone.bend low, low、low、low.Step2 New Concepts

一、出示单词卡high、low把high贴在黑板的高处low贴在低处。让学生在手里随意拿一样东西，听教师的口令练习high、low.然后同桌练习。

二、观看幻灯，出示李明写作业的图片，放在屏幕的上方。提问：Is

it

low?

What is he doing?引出homework,进一步提问家庭作业还有那些形式。陆续出示所有图片，问What do they do ?

Do they work hard ?引出work hard 让学生说出自己最喜欢的事。问学生How

How many minutes do you___?

三、1.Play

a

game 将全班学生分成几个组，教师设置三个场景分别为学校、体育场、家中。要求学生用本单元所学的知识来编对话。最后用Work hard

at (in)____.来概括。然后学生来教室前表演。 2.（一）、教师鼓舞学生说：Let's

work hard ! Does kim work hard ?出示问题，让学生带着问题听磁带，然后做出回答。

（二）、Play

a

game

把全班分成若干小组，每组选出一名调查员，利用教师提前制作好的表格进行调查，评选出健康之星。 Step3

Cla

closing

Homework 画出一幅有关Work

hard

的图画，并写出几句话加以说明。 四 布置作业

板书设计:

Leon 14 Work Hard How

often

do you ___ ___?

homework About ____minutes.

high

Low 课后反思：

Leon : 15 Are You Ready For a Quiz ?

一、教学目标

1.使学生能够理解并运用本单元所学的词汇及句子。2．理解故事内容，完成活动手册。

3．运用所学内容在实际情境中进行会话练习

二、教学重、难点

1.

教学重点：掌握本单元的词汇，理解故事内容。 2.

教学难点：

用“How often do you ____? ___times a_____.进行情境会话练习。

三、教具准备

Tape recorder and tape pictures CAI

四、教学过程

一、Greeting

[教师用 Hello ,How do you feel now ? Are you happy?等表达与学生问候 ，让师生在轻松的交流中走进本课]

一．

Warming-up

用Chant :“Everyone ,Everyone ,reach up high”作为热身的环节，既复习了以前所学内容，又将学生带到课堂上来，调动了学生的积极性。 二．

Review

1.

利用卡片，用问答的方式帮助学生复习本单元需要掌握的单词，也可以让一名学生扮演小老师来提问。

[在复习词汇的同时，也满足了孩子们的表现欲，让复习课不在枯燥] 2．用本单元学过的反义词，自编 Chant

strong strong strong and weak

high

high

high and low

before before after and before

[利用 chant 熟记本单元的反义词 ，学生可以更快捷的记忆所学内容，同时也增加了他们的学习兴趣]

三、Story Story :

“A Healthy Monster’ Prepare to read :

T: Do you remember Maddy the Monster ? Who is her friend?

Discu the pictures.What do the students think is happening in the story? Read the story

Play the audiotape ,then check up the understanding .Discu the story

Do you like this story? Why or why not?

[利用小问题引起学生对故事的兴趣；在阅读故事中，尽量发挥学生的作用，让学生说一说他们读懂了什么，必要时教师给予帮助。让学生体验自己会读、会理解故事的过程。] Use the activity book

[最后，利用活动手册来检验学生对故事的理解情况。]

四、Cla closing 板书设计

Leon 15: Are You Ready For a Quiz ?

strong strong strong and weak

high

high

high and low before before after and before

选择正确答案的序号填空。

1．I always dry the dishes ______ super.A.after B.before C.at

2.______minutes do you watch TV everyday ? A.How much B .How many C.How often 3.Is this heavy _____ light? It is heavy.A.and B.or C.do

4.Danny _____breakfast five times last week.A.eat

B.ate

C.eated

练习：

在故事中找出第二单元的重点词汇，勾画出来。 课后反思：

Leon 16 :Again，Please！

一、教学目标

1、知识目标：复习本单元的重点单词：介词：after before 名词：bones cabbage day exercise face homework hours minutes months muscles onions peas skin teeth weeks动词：brush comb 形容词：healthy high low strong weak

2、能力目标：通过情景创设，让学生能够理解并会书写这些单词，并在情景中运用单词，培养自主学习的能力，获得与同学交流的方法。

3、情感目标：通过本单元的学习，让学生知道如何强健身体？并学会在生活中如何与他人合作。

二、

教学重难点：

能听懂、会说、会读和会写本单元四会单词并能根据本单元的内容完成小作文训练：How do you do make your body strong and healthy？

三、教学准备：

本单元中使用的图片如：肌肉、骨骼、牙齿及各种蔬菜

四、教学过程

一、Cla opening and review

1、师生问候：

How are you today?

I’m fine thanks and you ?

I’m fine too.

二、Review：

1、根据以下问题来复习本单元中的单词 Do you want to be strong and healthy？

How do you make your body strong and healthy？

学完本单元学生基本上能总结出以下几点；教师紧接着板书学生能够说出的内容：Always eat breakfast！Always brush your teeth！Always eat vegetables！Exercise！Work hard！说出这些以后并让学生再详细说出每一项如何去做？这样就能把本单元中要复习的单词展示出来了，并写在黑板上。

2、根据上面内容复习本单元中的句型：How often------？

这个练习可根据图表来复习：就拿Eat breakfast来说，教师可问班××上某一个学生，让他说出一周中他都是哪天吃早饭？然后填表。 How often did you eat breakfast last week？

Name Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday ××

√

×× √ √ √ √ √ √

填完此表后教师可根据学生的情况进行问答练习。回答时注意一次用“Once”，两次用“ Twice ”，三次及三次以上用“----times”。可根据时间安排其它组练习。

3、根据黑板上的板书练习说话；How do you make your body strong and healthy？ 分组进行练习。几分钟后小组表演。

三、

Cla closing 作业：把说的小短文写出来。

四、

板书设计 Leon 16 :Again，Please！

Name Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday ××

√

×× √ √ √ √ √ √

五、

练习题

1、

写出下列单词的反义词：

Strong---

weak---

before---

high---

2、

选择正确的单词填空： （

）How often do you eat breakfast？------- A．Once

B Three time

C Four times Sixty minutes make-------hour！ A．a

B．an

C．/

3、写作（至少4句）

How to make your body strong and healthy？

课后反思：

Leon 17 Summer is coming! Teaching objectives：

4.

使学生能听、说、读和写词汇：leaves ,gra ,flowers ,sandals 5.

使学生能够用英文描述每个季节的特征并说出自己喜爱的季节。 Teaching focal points：

使学生能听、说、读和写词汇：leaves ,gra ,flowers ,sandals Teaching difficulty points：

使学生能够用英文描述每个季节的特征并说出自己喜爱的季节。 Teaching aims：

tape recorder and tape, CAI Teaching steps： 一.师生互动

1.游戏：Simon Says.复习动作短语：swim, skip, play sports , fly a kite, look at flowers

2.绘画：复习tree , leaves , flowers, gra, clouds.

（先让学生画4棵树，然后分别在不同的树上画上四季的特征，即新叶，黄叶，白雪等，完成后让学生在树旁写上四季的名称。）

3.看图说话（引导学生自学第一部分内容）

二.自由对话：What's your favourite season?

引导学生用My favourite season is ...或I like ....best.回答。在多次练习的基础上，拓展对话内容，谈谈喜欢这个季节的理由。 （引导学生用上课文中的句子：I like to ,I like flowers.....）

三、自学课文

1.提出问题：What's Jenny and Li Ming's favourite season? Why ?

2.学生自学，小组合作，找出答案。

3.小组赛读（分层次竞赛，小组内分工读单词或句子，并进行相应的加分） Blackboard show:

Leon 17 Summer is coming! leaves

gra

flowers

sandals Exercises: 一 补全单词：

l_ _ves

gr_

fl_ _ers

s_nd_ls 二 根据句意补全句子：

1 In summer , I like ____swim.2 Sometimes ,I play sports ____ my friends.3 I like ___look____the flowers.4 I lie ___the gra and look at the clouds.课后反思：

Leon 18 Let's Go Swimming! Teaching objectives：

1.使学生能听、说、读和写词汇：swim ,swimsuit ,swimming pool 2.教育学生要养成热爱运动的好习惯

3.学生会用英语表达有关游泳的一些简单常识 Teaching focal points：

使学生能听、说、读和写词汇：swim ,swimsuit ,swimming pool Teaching difficulty points：

学生会用英语表达有关游泳的一些简单常识 Teaching aims：

tape recorder and tape, CAI Teaching steps：

一.游戏“你做我猜”复习swim ,duck ,fish ,river ,sandals ,lake等在课堂中将要用到的单词。

二.播放课件，学习第一部分

1，提出问题：What's Jenny doing?引导学生回答：She's swimming.

T: Can you swim?

s: I can swim ./I can't swim.

T:(show cards) Can chicken swim?

What else can swim?

2, 学习swimsuit

a,猜卡片游戏复习衣物类单词。引出swimsuit.

b,提问：What do you wear to swim?

What else ?

3,学习swimming pool

Do you want to swim? OK, let's go to the swimming pool? 引出swimming pool.

Do you know , where is the swimming pool? 引导学生回答哪些地方有游泳池。

引导学生运用句型：Let's go to the swimming pool to swim！邀请好朋友去游泳

Where else can you swim?化用句型：Let's go to the lake/river to swim.

三、学习短文

提出问题：Do you like swimming? Does Danny like to swim? Can Danny swim?

小组合作学习课文。

分层选择学习：

A.能流利朗读课文

B.能流利朗读文中对话

C。能读出大部分单词

回答问题：1.Can Jenny swim?

2.What does Danny wear to swim?

3.What does Jenny wear to swim?

4.Can Danny swim? Why? Blackboard show:

Leon 18 Let's Go Swimming!

Swim

swimsuit

swimming pool Exercises:

一 将下列动词转换成名词：

例 skip skipping rope

swim __________

play _________ run________ 二 回答问题：

1 Can you swim?

2 What do you wear to swim?

3 Where can you swim? 课后反思：

Here’s some gra.

Now I am lying on the gra.Now I can see the sky! Practice

Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about lying on the gra and looking at clouds in the sky.Please read about making up dialogues in “Teaching Techniques”

Play “Go Fish” or “Memory Card” with the students’ flashcards for the following words: cloud, sky, flowers, leaves, gra, snow, ice, rain, sun and wind.Use the activity book

Number 2 in the activity book is a listening exercise on the audiotape as follows:

Leon19:Let’s go to the park Teaching objectives： 1.

It looks like ____.2.

cloud , sky 3.

lie .Danny goes to the park, we should clear about its meaning.It’s fun and happy, if you have time you can go out to play after you have finished your words.The nature is clear and vivid, clean air, green trees and leaves, white clouds, beautiful flowers.We can go out share it.Teaching focal points：

1.

how to use “look like” 2．lie Teaching difficulty points： 1． how to use “look like” 2． lie

Teaching aims： A tape A big picture of the dialogue Teaching steps：

Cla opening and review

Review “flowers” “leaves” “gra” with a drill.Choose a drill from “Teaching Techniques” Introduce Demonstrate “cloud” and “sky” with your poster, or by pointing out the window of your claroom.Draw quick pictures of clouds on the blackboard.

Make the clouds look like something.Say phrases such as: Use a puppet to introduce the word “lie” For example, draw quick pictures of a bed and some gra on the blackboard.Make the puppet “lie” on these as you say phrases for it such as: I am tired.I want to sleep.Where can I sleep? Here’s a bed.I am going to lie on the bed.Now I am lying on the bed.I don’t want to sleep here! Listen, draw the shapes and write the words. a triangle b.line c.circle d.square

Blackboard show:

Leon19:Let’s go to the park

lie on

cloud

sky

It looks like _________ .

Exercises:

一 补全单词并写出汉语意思：

cl_ _d ( ) sk_ ( )

c_ _ cle ( )

gr_ ( ) 二 写出下列动词过去式的原形：

ran ( ) lay ( ) liked ( ) did ( ) made ( ) went ( ) was ( ) thought ( 三 补全句子：

1 What does the kite look like? __ ___ ____ a bird.

2 What does the cloud look like? __ ___ ____ an airplane.

3 Iam going to ____ ____ the gra.

4 I want to ____ _____ at the sky.课后反思：

Leon 20 Tomorrow We Will Work and Play

一、教学目标：

知识目标：will, skip, fly, very, park...

能力目标：学会在将来时态中使用 “will” 情感目标：培养学生保护花草树木的思想感情

)

二、教学重难点：“will”在将来时态中的使用

三、教具学具：单词卡片，表示处所的图画和动作单词，课件等

四、教学过程：

1、Greeting：

2、用表示处所的图片和相应的动作单词卡片练习句型Let＇s go to the _____（场所）to ____ （动词） _____（名词）。

Eg: Let’s go to the bathroom to wash our hands.

Let’s go to the living room to watch TV.Let’s go to the gym to play ping -pong.

Let’s go to the park to fly kite.

3、做游戏“Memory Card”来复习动词的三种时态：

挑选10个左右动词，分别写出他们的三种时态。教师把单词卡片分成 “过去，现在，将来”三种时态放在黑板前，首先让学生记忆单词一分钟，然后让他们挑出相应单词三种形式组合在一起，并贴在黑板相应的位置上。看那组记得准。

4、介绍will是be going to的另一种表达方法，然后在黑板上将来时态的部分加出第四栏，给出一个will的例子，学生试着填充其他动词的这一部分。

5、小组活动：

将学生分成若干小组，告诉学生我们明天要去公园，请小组合作制作一项计划，围绕 “What will you do in the park?”展开讨论，并把商议结果以对话的形式汇报。

6、听录音，回答问题：

Question: A.what will LiMing, Jenny and Danny do?

B.What will Danny do in the park?

7、Reading following the tape.

8、练习： A: 仿写句子：

Eg: pencil

Tomorrow I will write a story.1.book

__________________________ 2.kite

__________________________ 3.skipping rope

__________________________ 4.park

__________________________ 5.gra

__________________________ B:用所给词适当形式填空：

1.Yesterday I _______(go) to the park with my parents.

2.LiMing always _______(go) to school by bus.

3.Tomorrow I ________(go) to library to read a book.

4.I ______(go) to beijing next holiday.

5.Last holiday I _______(help) my mother with housework.

五、Blackboard：

Leon 20 Tomorrow We Will Work and Play Yesterday Today Tomorrow Ate Eat going to eat Will eat

六、课后反思：

Leon21: Summer Holiday

一、教学目标 知识目标

1. 复习本单元与海滩相关的词汇。

2. 围绕What will you do tomorrow ?利用I will___.句型展开话题。 能力目标

①

通过复习熟练掌握运用到I will_____.句型。 ②

引导学生描述自己暑假将要做的事。

③

能够熟练掌握两种一般将来时的表达方法。

二、

教学重、难点 重点： ocean, beach, sand

难点： Learn and use these words.

Verbs form about change.Teaching steps:

Warming-up and revision:

一、Greeting.T: Hello,everyone! Ss: Hi.

二、Review

1、复习动词的过去式和将来时

yesterday

today

tomorrow

go

watch

play

2、师生、生生问答

T: What do you like to do in the summer? S: I like to swim.

S: I like to play badminton.S: …

T: What did you do last year? S: I went to Chengde.S: I went to the park.

S:(师替学生答) I went to a lake to swim in the lake and played on the beach.(出示beach 卡片引出新单词) New concepts:

一、

学习新单词。

1、

教师出示ocean, beach, sand三个新单词（让学生自己试读教师指导）。

2、

让学生试着自己由词组成短语、由词短语组成句子(给出一些适当的词)。 ocean,

beach,

sand on the beach,

I like playing on the beach . I will play on the beach this summer .In the ocean I like playing in the ocean.I will swim in the ocean this summer .Play with sand I like playing with sand.I will play with sand this summer. 回答问题(师问本班学生)：

What will you do this summer? I will …

二、

练习话题

1、

小组讨论：What will you do this summer?

2、

小组汇报：

S: I will go to Hai nan.I like playing on the beach .I like playing with sand. I will play in the ocean I like that place.That is nice.S: I want to play with my friends.That is fun.

三、

跟读课文，回答问题。 Questions: 1, Where did Jenny go last summer? 2, What did Jenny do last summer? 3, What will Li Ming do this summer?

四、

学生做一个旅行计划表。

Who? Where? When? How do you go? What will you do?

五、

谈论你自己的旅行。

六、

作业。 活动手册

3、4题 本课练习

一、

根据中文信息，选择正确的选项, 完成单词。 （

）1， s_ _mer

A.an

B.am

C.um

D.un （

）2， air_ _ane

A.al

B.pl

C.ch

D.ph （

）3， _ _ip

A.cr

B.dr

C.tr

D.ty （

）4， mi_ _

A.ee

B.rr

C.tt

D. （

）5， c_ _sin

A.ou

B.oa

C.oe

D.oo

二、

用所给词的正确形式填空。

My family like to _______(go) on trips for our holiday.Last summer we _______(go) to Beidaihe for our holiday.We ______(stay)on the beach most of the time.(大部分时间)There we ________(make)thins with the sand.I _______(can not) swim.So my father _______(teach) me to shenyang for our winter holiday.My aunt and uncle ________(live) there.So we _______(visit) them.Also we ____(go) skiing and skating.

三、连词成句。

1、like, beach, playing, I, the, on

2、will, and, aunt, I, uncle, visit, my

3、in, play, summer, to, sports, like, I, the

4、Danny, too, I, mi, and, will, you

5、ill, again, happy, feel, we, see, to, China

课后反思：

Leon22:What will you do at the beach? 教学目标:

1.知识目标:本课复习与海滩相关的词汇内容。e.g.ocean, beach, sand, lie on the beach, swim in the ocean„„

2.

能力目标：能够准确流利地描述自己的海滩经历，恰当地运用相关语句。

３情感目标：培养学生热爱大自然的情感以及保护环境的意识。

教学重点：关于海滩的一些词汇。e.g.ocean, beach, sand等。

教学难点：正确应用句式表达自己的经历和感受。 教具准备：pictures, water, radio.教学方法：启发式，谈话式。

教学过程 备注

一．

Cla opening and greeting.二．

Warm-up.T:What do you like to do? Ss:I like to fly a kite.

I like to sing a song.

I like to draw a picture.…… 三．New concepts.

T: Look, please! This is me at a beach.What am I doing? Sa:You’are wearing swimsuit.T:What am I going to do? Sb:You are going to swim.T:Where can I swim in? Sc:You can swim in the ocean.T:Yes.You’re clever.Now listen to me to introduce this picture again.This is me at the beach.Beaches have sand.I can make a sand animal.I can lie on the beach.I am wearing swimsuit.I am going to swim in the ocean.Did you go to the ocean? Ss:Yes/No.

T: What did you do there? (提给那些去过海边的学生) Ss:…..

T: If you are going to the ocean on this summer holiday, what will you do there?(此问题提给那些没去过海边的学生) Ss:…...

T: Ok now I have two glaes of water, one is our drink water, the other one is ocean water.Who can tell us which one is the ocean water? Ss: Teacher, me! Let me try! (叫一名学生到前边来,他用品尝的方法告诉我们答案.) Sd: 咸的这杯是海水.T: Yes, clever! We know the ocean water is salty.“Salty” means “咸”.四.Listen and read.五.Try to retell.What will Jenny do at the beach? Ss: She will lie on the beach.She will wear shorts and sandals.She will make a sand animal.She will put on her swimsuit.She will swim in the ocean…… 六.Learn to sing a song.1.Play the song.2.Explain the meaning.3.Learn to sing.七.Cla closing.八.Homework: Write a short paage about your ocean trip.九.板书设计:

Leon22:What will you do at the beach? beach

sand

ocean ↓

↓

↓

lie on the beach make sand animals swim in the ocean 由学生感兴趣的问题导入，激发他们的学习欲望。

展示教师自己的生活照片，拉近与学生的距离，更直观生动地呈现本课的新授内容。 教师启发引导学生回答问题，在此过程中强化训练了学生的口语表达能力。 教师的看图描述给学生做了很好的示范，不仅锻炼了学生的听力还培养了他们叙述事情的逻辑思维和组织能力。

对学生能力的提升,让他们自己去想去说,训练他们的句式结构的组织及表达的综合能力。

这是本课的一个小游戏，能激发学生的兴趣和探究欲望，并考查了学生的一些生活常识。

复述是体现学生对已知内容的理解、运用和表达。

学唱歌曲能培养学生的韵律感,也能舒缓紧张的学习情绪,更能帮助学生识记更多的语句。

Exercises:

1.

补全单词：

b_ _ch

s_ _d

oc_ _n 2.

英汉互译：

lie on the beach(

) swim in the ocean(

) 穿短裤和凉鞋（

） 穿游泳衣（

） 3． 小练笔：What will you do at the beach? 课后反思：

Leon 23: Are You Ready for a Quiz?

一、教学目标：

知识目标：学习故事“Baby Becky’s Summer”

能力目标：能听懂故事内容并回答简单的问题，较好完成课本上的测试。 情感目标：培养学生发现问题，自己解决问题的能力。

二、教学重、难点：通过本单元的学习，能过运用所学知识去解决问题。

三、教具、学具准备：录音机、磁带、故事书

四、教学过程：

1、Cla Opening and Review ①Sing “Summer’s Coming”

②Review: Do some exercises on student book

Listen carefully! Swim for the right answer.Fly for the wrong answer.⑴What do you wear to go swimming? ⑵What does this cloud look like? ⑶What are they doing? ⑷Where will Jenny go for the summer holiday? ⑸What is on the tree? What is under the tree?

2、Story ①Prepare to read Look at the pictures on the story book.Questions: What’s her name? Can she fly a kite? Can she skip? Does Baby Becky cry in this story? ②Read

Listen to the audiotape and read.③Discu the story

Divide the students into small groups (

Questions: When is next summer? Can Baby Becky fly a kite in this story? When will she fly a kite? Can she skip? When will she skip? Does Baby Becky like next summer better than this summer? Do you like this story? Why or why not?

T: Do you have any other questions? (让学生提出更多的问题，大家共同解决，培养学生发现问题，自己解决问题的能力。)

3、Activity Book: N2

4、Cla Closing

五、板书：

Leon 23: Are You Ready for a Quiz? Baby Becky’s Summer

put on her swimsuit Baby Becky

fly a kite

next summer

skip

六、课后反思：

Leon 24: Again,Please! 教学目标：1，复习巩固本单元所学词语，句子。 2，进行简单测试。

3，使学生具有成就感，学习信心增强。

教学重难点：从词语入手，逐步培养学生的综合语言运用能力。

教具：投影片 （书中的几幅图和提示词语）无条件的话可用小黑板出示几组词语 学具：活动手册和彩笔 教学过程：

一.Cla opening and review 1.

听上节课故事，做Secret Word 游戏，将重点词语板书。

Beach sand swimsuit sandals swim swimming pool ocean park flowers leaves gra look like will lie clouds sky fly skip

2.

看图和提示词语，说一段话来描述图片，也可只给提示词语来说话。 beach cloud ocean sand sandals

swim swimming pool swimsuit sandals

park flowers leaves gra lie sky clouds skip fly look like 3.

回答问题：

How’s the weather in summer? What about plants in summer?

What clothes will you wear in summer? What sports do you like to do in summer?

What will you do this summer? Will you go on a trip? Will you play some sports? Will you go swimming?...二.Test (Activity book)

1.

Find the words and write them.2.

Write the correct words.

3.

Listen，Write and draw what you hear.a.

I lie on the gra.

b.

The flowers under the tree are red.c.

The leaves on the tree are green.

d.

The cloud in the sky looks like a donut.e.

A boy is skipping.

f.

A girl is wearing a swimsuit and sandals.g.

She is flying a kite.三.Cla closing

1．Homework：根据提示，写一段关于今年夏天的短文。

Weather, clothes, sports, plants…

Will you go on a trip? Will you play some sports? Will you go swimming?.What will you do this summer?

2.

Sing a song：Summer’s coming 板书：Leon 24: Again,Please!

1.beach cloud ocean sand sandals

swim swimming pool swimsuit sandals

park flowers leaves gra lie sky clouds skip fly look like

2.What will you do this summer? 练习：

一．听句子，根据描述写出正确答案。

1.

It is in the sky.It’s white.Sometimes it looks like an airplane or a donut.2.

It’s very big and blue.You can swim in it.There is a beach, too.

3.

They have many colours.They are beautiful.Many girls like them very much.Usually they bloom in spring.

4.

A fish can’t do it, but a bird can.

5.In summer, they’re green.In fall, they’re yellow, they are on the tree.二．选择正确答案。 1.What is jenny doing?

( ) 2.Will you go to the park? ( ) 3.Waht are you going to do? ( ) 4.How’s the tree in winter? ( ) 5.What are they doing?

( )

A.

watching flowers.B.

They loose their leaves.C.

No, I will lie on the sand.D.

She is flying a kite.E.

I will run very fast.课后反思：

Leon 25 Buying Gift 教学目标：

1、知识与技能： （1）、学生可以读、写、说出并且听懂下列词汇：形容词：every名词：flag标准问句：How many______? ______.（2）、学生可以说出并且听懂下列标准问句：How far is it? ___ kilometres. How much is it ? It is ___ dollars.

2、过程与方法：在教学中运用游戏、歌谣、情景表演等多种形式，增强学习的趣味性，培养学生课前预习的能力及语言交际能力。

3、情感态度与价值观：关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的氛围，用多种形式的教学手段和丰富多彩的教学活动吸引学生参与其中，继续激发和保持学生对英语的持久兴趣，促进学生的口语交际能力。教学重点：

1、形容词：every

名词：flag.

2、标准问句：How many______? ______.教学难点：

用How many______? ______.进行口语交际。 教具：录音机

单词卡片

学生用的小卡片 教学过程：

一、回忆故事，引入课题。李明到加拿大上学，现在他要回国了。

He want to buy some souvenirs of Canada.复习句子结构： “Let’s go to the shop to buy ___.” 将这个句子写在黑板上，用卡片进行替换练习。最后出示加拿大国旗flag，向学生介绍：This is a souvenirs of Canada.

二、通过对话，介绍重要概念every，flag，句子How many„„ Ask five boys and five girls to come to the front of the cla.Give each girl a flag.Lead a dialogue such as: Teacher: Look! How many people are there? Cla : Ten ! Teacher: How many girls are there? Cla : Five !

Teacher : Right!(point to each girl, one at a time )Look ! Dose she have a flag? Cla: Yes.

Teacher:Good!

(point to each boy , one at a time) Dose he have a flag? Cla: No!

Teacher: Right! Every girl has a flag.She has a flag and She has a flag and She has a flag ……Every girl has a flag. Say it ,please.

Cla: Every girl has a flag.

Teacher: (Give a flag to each boy.) Now every boy has a flag. Say it ,please.

Cla: Every boy has a flag.

Teacher:How many flags are there? Cla:Ten! These flags are my gifts. What gifts dose Li Ming buy?

How many gifts dose Li Ming need? 让学生先猜猜看，然后听录音。

三、听录音，理解课文内容，回答问题。

1. 先听课文第一部分并回答：a.Why will Li Ming buy gifts?b.How far is it to the store ? 2.听课文第二部分并回答：a.How many gifts dose Li Ming need? b.What gifts does he buy ?3.课前为每一位同学准备一张卡片如下： a book

1 dollar

a flag

10 dollors

a T-shirt

50 dollar

再听一遍第二部分，然后连线。在小组讨论结果时，让学生用How much_____?提问并做答。

4、当学生做完之后，教师指着1 dollar 说：This is cheap.The flag is cheap.指着50 dollars 说:This is expensive.The book is expensive.

四、结束课堂教学，布置作业。

李明为家人选了合适的礼物，还要给Jenny一个surprise，什么是surprise？小组讨论，怎样给一Jenny个惊喜。请你们每个小组编一个对话，能用上How many ____? How much ______? How far____? 板书：

Leon 25 Buying Gift

How far is it?

___kilometres.

How much is it ?

It is ___ dollars.练习：

1、看表格填空，并照样子写句子：

A B C D E

How many 7 pencils 3 umbrellas 10 apples 6 flags 6 T-shirts How much 1 dollar

for one 15 dollars for one 2 dollars for one 4 dollars

for one 10 dollars for one

A.How many pencils do you need? I need ________.B. How many _______ do you need? I need _________.C. _____ ______ ______ do you need? I need ____________.D.___ ____ _____ do you need? I need _____________.E. ____ _____ ____ do you need? I need ____________.

二、根据上表，买东西。

A. How much is a pencil? It is _____ ______.1×7=__________ .B.How much is an u________? _____________.15×3=________ . C._____ _____ is a_______?_______________.2×10=___________ . D.______ ______ ___ a ________? _________4×6=__________ . E.______ _____ ___ a ______?___________.10×6=________ .课后反思：

Leon 26

Looking at Picture 教学目标：

1、学生能正确说、读、写、用forget、remember

2、学生能用下列句子进行会话：

Do you remember this? Yes, it is a

. (No, I forget.) 教学重点：

1、学生能正确说、读、写、用forget、remember

2、学生能熟练运用下列句子进行会话：

Do you remember this? Yes, it is a

. (No, I forget.) 教学难点：学生能用下列句子进行会话：

Do you remember this? Yes, it is a

. (No, I forget.) 教

具：词卡、录音机 课

时：1课时 教学过程：

一、问侯：

二、唱歌：

三、操练：复习25课单词

四、教授forget、remember

1、示范：

教师装作忘记然后又想起某物体的英语名称，如：装作忘记怎样说bag 和 book，教师用手势和面部表情让学生看明白意思，指关物体进行下列对话： 师：What is this? I forget how to say it in English.I forget.Say it, please, cla.生：I forget.

师：Oh, I remember.It’s a bag.I remember.Say it, please,cla.生：I remember.然后，师再指另一件物品，

师：I forget what this is.What’s this? Do you remember? 生：It’s a book.师：Oh, yes, you remember.Now I remember, too.

2、跟读课文录音：

3、练习：用游戏“Go Fish”的变化形式做游戏。在游戏中，一生向另一生展示一张卡片并问：Do you remember this? 如对方有这张卡片，便回答：Yes, it is a

.如对方没有这张卡片，则回答No, I forget.

4、角色扮演：

5、《活动手册》 No.1

6、游戏：

五、结束本课教学： 作业：

1、熟练本课对话

2、做《活动手册》 板书：

Leon 26

Looking at Picture remember

forget Do you remember this? Yes, it is a

.(No, I forget.) Exercises:

一、Match the word and write Chinese in the blanks:

for

member

(

) um

brella

(

) re

get

(

)

二、Write the correct words: ----What is this?

----I

(忘记) how to say it

English.(用英语) ----Do your

(记得)？ ----It’s a book.

----Oh, yes, I

(记得).----It’s a book.课后反思：

Leon27 I Remember

教学目标：Review regular and irregular past-tense verbs.

教学重难点：Ask the students to remember regular and irregular past-tense verbs.They can say sentences with them.教学过程：

一、

Review

Play “Santa” to review vocabulary from unit 4 of level 7.

二、

Key Concepts

1、Practice verb tenses with a chart.Write “yesterday”，“today”，“tomorrow”

acro the top of the blackboard.Ask the students to call out words from the leon in the student book.Write these under “yesterday”.Then write “buy”，“think”, “teach”, “go”, “see” and “eat” under “today”.Ask the students to call out the corresponding words in the leon for me to write under “yesterday”.Then ask for volunteers to complete the chart.

2、Divide the cla into pairs.Each student draws a picture of something that happened during Li Ming’s visit to Canada.They label as much of their pictures as they can in English.They then take turns describing their pictures to their partners.

3、Teach “Red river Valley” in Number2 of the student book.

三、

Activity book

四、

Homework Writing on the blackboard: Leon27 I Remember

Yesterday

today

tomorrow

Cleaned

clean

Washed

wash

Talked

talk

Wanted

want

Laughed

laugh 课后反思：

Leon28 A party of Li Ming 教学目标：Teach the students some words: “early” “late” “begin” and “after”.They can say sentences with them.教学重难点：介绍一组反义词early和late, 让学生融入到李明的party中，通过情境让学生了解surprise这个词。 教学过程：

一、

Review Play “Before” and “After” to review “before” and “after”.

二、

Key Concepts early, late, begin party, surprise

1、

Demonstrate “early”, “late” and “begin” together.Draw a big clock on the blackboard that shows the time.Facing the clock, write “before” on the left and “after” on the right.Draw a clock under “before” that shows a few minutes before cla time and a clock under “after” that shows a few minutes after.

2、

T: We are learning English now.This is English

cla.When does English cla begin? S: At _______.T: Right! Look! Here’s ________.

3、

Demonstrate “party” with the large vocabulary card.

4、

Role-play to demonstrate “surprise”.Ask a volunteer to leave the claroom.Hide a surprise in the volunteer’s desk.Then ask the volunteer to return to the room.T: I put something in your desk.Dose ____ know what’s in his/her desk, cla? S: No.T: _____ doesn’t know what I put in her desk.It’s a surprise! S: Surprise.

T: Yes! There’s a surprise in your desk.Can you find it? S: Yes!

T: What is it? S: A flag.

三、

Practise

Divide the cla into small groups.Ask each group to make up a dialogue about organizing a surprise party for a friend.

四、

Activity book

五、

Homework Writing on the blackboard: Leon28 A party of Li Ming before-------- after

early-------late

begin

课后反思：

Leon 29: Surprise !

一、教学目标： 知识目标：

1.Four skills: cake, cookies, sugar, someone, ice cream 2.Three skills: flour, oil, salt, bowl

3.学生能听懂并会运用句型How long is

?

.

能力目标：通过课本剧表演，培养学生在真实情境中运用语言的能力。

情感目标：通过本课的学习，培养学生热爱生活，关心他人，产生积极的情感体验。

二、教学重、难点： 1．掌握新授单词。

2．掌握制作饼干所需要的原材料。 3．学习课文后进行课本剧的表演。.

三、教具学具：电话，鸡蛋，面粉，油，盐，糖，碗，多媒体课件。

四、教学过程：

(一)、Cla Opening and Review 1.Greetings:

T: Hello, boys and girls.How are you? S: Fine, thank you.And you?

T: I’m fine, too.What day is today? What’s the date today? How’s the weather?

2.Students answer these questions together. 3.Sing an English song. 4.Act out dialogues.T: Do you like a party? S: Yes.T: Li Ming has lived in Canada for ten months.Let’s have a party for him. I think we can invite some friends for the party.Who do you want to invite? Please call them.(教师出示一部电话提示学生编一个电话会话) Show their telephone conversations.

(由于是复习旧知识，学生们可提前准备好道具，教师要提醒学生正确使用“打电话”用语。如：Who’s that speaking? This is „Is that„speaking? Yes, it is.等。) (二)、Key Concepts 1.

Presentation.T: Today is Li Ming’s party.Yesterday I bought some things for the party.What are they?（出示课件，学生边看边回答。）

S: Watermelon, pop, pizza, apples, banana…

T: But I think we need some more things.What do we need? S: We need„（学生也许会给出很多不同的答案，如“蛋糕，饼干，牛奶，水果等”）

T: （出示课件：一块蛋糕，一些饼干） Yes, we need a cake, some cookies.（出示实物“cookies” ）They are cookies,and this is a cookie.（教师区别单复数，并将图片出示给学生）

Students read and spell the new words T: Can you make a cake? What do we need to make a cake? （学生也许会给出不同的答案如：鸡蛋，牛奶等，教师可拿出准备好的物品帮助他们回答）

T : We must have these things to make cookies..What are they? You can taste it and gue.(学生通过品尝得出结论，是油，盐，糖，面粉。但要学生注意面粉和花的发音一样，做cookies需要面粉而不是花) Then teach and read these new words.T+S: We need flour, oil, salt, sugar to make cookies.

2.Listen and Say T: Now, Li Ming’s friends Jenny, Danny make some cookies.But, when they begin making cookies, there’s someone at the door.Who’s that? (教师走到门口敲门，用身势语解释there’s someone at the door.的意思。) They make some cookies, what does every cookie have? Kim bought a gift for the party.What did she buy?（教师一边提问，一边出示幻灯，打出问题，） Please listen to the tape and answer the questions.

（放录音，学生听后回答问题。此环节培养学生在短时间内捕捉英语信息的能力以及锻炼他们的听说能力。）

Then show the picture of “ice-cream”, read and spell.3.Read and say Play the tape again, students listen and repeat.Then read the text together.（朗读课文时可采取多种形式：先自由读---分角色读---齐读。）

4.Act.T: Boys and girls, Li Ming is leaving soon.Let’s have a party for him.How do you prepare the party and how to have the party for him, now I give you some sentences, you can accord to the sentences and the text, make a dialogue with your friends. （教师根据课本提炼出主要句型出示给学生：1.What do you need for the party? 2.How do you make cookies? 3.Who comes to the party? 4.How do you have the party?学生根据句型及课文，编排一个课本剧。教师提示学生要联系生活实际，想想如何开聚会。） Students show their play.(三)、Cla Closing Sing a song.

T: Let’s sing a song for Li Ming.Let’s wish he and his friends “Auld Lang Syne”.Play the tape, students listen to the music and sing the song.五：板书：

Leon 29: Surprise ! cake

make sugar

su + gar

cookies

cook + ie + s someone

some + one ice cream

ice + cream 六：课后反思：

Leon30 Good-bye !

一、教学目标：

知识目标：学生能听懂并会运用句型How long is -----?-----

能力目标：在活动中培养学生积极参与的精神和与他人团结协作的精神。 情感目标：培养学生学英语的态度，并通过活动调动学生学习英语的积极性

通过学习语言，培养珍视友谊、关爱他人的情感。

二、教学重、难点：学生能听懂并会运用句型How long is -----?----- 三教具准备：钟表，红色的龙，录音机

四、教学过程：

一、Cla Opening 1.Greeting.

(T: Hello !Ss.S: Hello! T.T: How’s the weather today? S: It’s sunny.2．Review

用“How many?”提问下列单词：minutes,hours,days,weeks,months,years。 （1）

向学生展示一只大钟表并且提示学生 a minutes与an hour的概念 （2）

引导学生进行对话

T: How many minutes in an hour? S: Sixty.

T: (在minutes 与hours之间话一个箭头，旁边写上数字60) How many hours in a day?(以此类推)

二、New Concepts 1.

Introduce 1.(Show a big clock) T: When does the English cla begin ? S: At 10:10.2.Practice T: How long is English cla? (做出数时针的动作)。 S: Forty minutes.2.(出示许多地点名称，并在两地之间标出距离和行程的长短) Ask Ss to make a drill, 3.Free Talk such as : How far is it from Canada to Bei jing .? It’s ------kilometers.How long is it? ------minutes \hours.Ask for volunteers to present. (播放书中第二部分歌曲，告诉学生李明将要离开加拿大，并让他们讨论下面的问题) When they are at the airport what will they talk about ? 4.Use the Ss Book and Audiotape

Play the audiotape as the student follow it and find out “What’re the surprises for Li Ming and Jenny” ? 5.Role-Play 让学生分角色朗诵课文。 6。Sing the Song Ask Ss to sing this song after the tape.7.Homework Ask Ss to write a postcard for Li Ming or Jenny .

三、Cla Closing

四、课后小练笔

1、选择填空。

1） A: _______is it from school to the library ? B: Two hours.A.How

B.how much

C.how long

D: How often 2) A: _______is it from school to your home ? B: Three kilometers .A.How

B.how much

C.how long

D: How often 3). A: ______ are they ? B: Five dollars .A.How

B.how much

C.how long

D: How often 4). A: ______do you go to school ? B :by bike.A.How

B.how much

C.how long

D: How often 课后反思：

Leon31：

Are You Ready for a Quiz？

一、教学目标：

通过故事的教学，使学生对本单元的单词、词汇掌握得更扎实。

通过多种方法和手段，为学生营造语言环境，使学生在模拟真实的情景中进行交际，增加信息量激发学生学习英语的兴趣，提高学生听、说、读、写及知识自学的综合能力。

能在活动中互相合作，体验合作的愉快，发展合作精神，培养自己的创造力与想象力。

二、重点与难点：

重点：时态、本单元的词汇

难点：时态的灵活应用。

三、教、学具

录音机 课本 活动手册

四、教学过程：

(一)Cla opening and review 1.Greeting.2.Sing a song

通过这一步骤既可让学生有一个适应教师语言（包括语音、语速等）的过程，消除紧张气氛，又可为进一步扩展学习个人信息交流作好复习铺垫。为了激发学生的学习兴趣，引起注意，拉近师生距离，首先以歌曲的形式导入正课。 (二)Revision

1.T: Who can remember: What did Jenny Danny and the others do before Li Ming go home? Ss：学生根据本单元的学习，回答老师提出的问题 T: What did Li Ming do？

Ss：学生根据本单元的学习，回答老师提出的问题

(在学生的回答中引出第31课小册中的问题，以旧引新，过渡自然。) 2.T: Now let’s do a quiz.

T: Play the audiotape.Smile for the right answer.Frown for the wrong answer.Don’t worry.It’s not hard!

Ss：Listen and do.

1) What does Jenny have in her hand? A flag.

2) Can you name these foods? Cake, ice cream and sugar.

3) How many cookies have letters? Every cookie has letters! I’m hungry now! 4) Li Ming’s party begins at 4:00.Is Steven early or late? He’s late! 5) How much are the socks? Fifteen dollars.

鼓励学生积极参与、大胆表达，使学生在宽松、愉快的氛围中学习，在活动中有成功的体验。培养学生的自信心，让学生在参与活动中学会学习、学会合作。 (三)Story

（为了调动学生的积极性，利用Work in pairs, ,in group等多种不同方式操练巩固。使学生处于积极思维的状态之中，全方位、多角度培养学生运用英语的能力。让学生进行分组自由对话。这一步既是展示本节课的语言学习成果，也是一个口语方面的反馈矫正机会与过程。）

1)

Prepare to read:

Here are some questions I can use to prepare the students for the story.Use as much English as poible, but allow the discuion to take place in Chinese where neceary.a.

What is Danny making? b.

What does his cake look like? c.

What do the cookies look like? d.

What is in Li Ming’s box? 2)

Read and discu.Let’s do questions and answer.Let’s talk in groups.

(Here are some questions I can use to reinforce the main idea of the story.) a.

What did Danny put in his cake for a surprise? b.

What did Danny forget to put in his cake？ c.

Was that a surprise? d.

What did Mr.Wood’s cla send to Li Ming? e.

What did Li Ming find in his cake? f.

Do you like this story? Why or why not? 3) Answer the questions.pair/ group work是培养学生的合作意识，增加交际氛围，引导学生结合语境，促进学生的实践能力，为学生提供自主学习和相互交流的机会以及充分表现的空间。在活动中注意创设各种合作学习的活动，促进学生相互学习，互相帮助，体验集体荣誉感和成就感，发展合作精神。 4）Fill in the blanks.

Danny wakes up _______in the morning.His cla is going to have a ________.Danny is going to make a s______ c______.He b________s working on his cake.______do you make a cake? Does Danny _______? No, he ________s! He puts flours, eggs, oil, milk and salt in the cake, but he forgets the ________.Danny carries his cake to school.He walks slowly and he is _____for school.Mr.Wood brings __________ for the party.Jenny brings _________._________cookie looks like _____in the cla.Danny’s cake looks like Canada’s_______.5）Do No.2.分层次设计问题：使学生的学习有坡度，从而能够学的轻松，在学生熟练掌握本课重点,使学生的交际向前发展。学生通过思考、讨论、交流的合作的方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

（四）Cla closing

Homework:李明收到蛋糕后想要做什么或说什么写下来。试着做一个蛋糕。

五、板书

Leon31：

Are You Ready for a Quiz？ a.What is Danny making? b.

What does his cake look like? c.

What do the cookies look like? d.

What is in Li Ming’s box?

e.

What did Danny put in his cake for a surprise? f.

What did Danny forget to put in his cake？ g.

Was that a surprise? h.

What did Mr.Wood’s cla send to Li Ming? i.

What did Li Ming find in his cake? j.

Do you like this story? Why or why not?

六、练习

一、补全单词并连线

s__ __ pr_se

早地 c__ __ kies

有人 __ __ rly

冰淇淋 s__me__ne

饼干

__ce cr__ __m

意外的惊喜

二、按要求改写句子.

1.

Rice is my favourite food.（改为同一句） I_________ rice _____________.

2.

He has breakfast at 6:00 every morning.（改为过去时） He ________ breakfast at 6:00 yesterday morning.

3.

They walk to school five days a week.（改为现在进行时） They ___________ to school now.

三、写出下列单词的相应形式

put（过去时）______________ happy（反义词）_______________ sheep（复数形式）_________forget（反义词）______________ 课后反思：

Leon32: Again , Please!

This is the revision of this unit.So there are two parts in this leon.One part is the revision , the other part is the test.[教学目标]

1．能听懂、会说、会读、会写下列单词和句子。

early every late party flag surprise cake cookies ice cream sugar someone begin forget remember

2.能正确理解、运用下列重点句型，并能运用下列句子开展实践性的活动。How many_________? ______________.How far is it? ________ kilometres.How long is _______? __________.How much is it? ________ dollars.[教学重点]

单词、句子的正确书写及其在语言环境中的正确运用。 [教学难点]

重点句型在语言环境中的灵活运用。

[教学准备]卡片 录音机 课本 活动手册等 [教学过程]

(一)Cla opening and review 1.Greeting.2.Free talk.

通过这一步骤既可让学生有一个适应教师语言（包括语音、语速等）的过程，消除紧张气氛，又可为进一步扩展学习个人信息交流作好复习铺垫。 (二)Revision 1.T: Who can tell me : What will Li Ming do after he got the cake?（有的说写信、打电话等） Ss: He will „„（复习将来时）

T: How far is from Shijiazhuang to Canada? Ss:……

T: How many sentences do you remember beginning with “how”? Ss: ……

T:汇总学生的回答并板书：How (much many far long old tall often„)___________? 使学生处于积极思维的状态之中，全方位、多角度培养学生运用英语的能力。让学生进一步展示本单元的语言学习成果，也是一个知识系统化的过程。）

T: Last leon I asked you to make a cake.How many minutes do you need to make a cake? Ss: ……

T: We learned to make the cake from the story :Danny’s Surprise Cake.Who can tell me how to do? （复习过去时）

Ss: „„（学生边回答，边让他把自己需要的材料写在黑板上）

T: Did you forget the sugar? Don’t forget the sugar.Remember it.Did your cake has a flag? What did your cake look like? Did your cake look like someone? Is it surprise? …… Ss: „„（学生边回答，边让他把本单元所要掌握的单词写在黑板上）

T: You were happy when you made the cake.I think you have a wonderful time from your childhood.Please tell your friends about it and write it.2.T: Now let’s do a quiz.1) Listen.Write what you hear.a.Let’s have a surprise a surprise party for Li Ming.b.When does the party begin? c.Do you remember what we ate the restaurant? d.What’s your name? I forget.

e.Cake, cookies and ice cream are very good! f.The cake looks like Canada’s flag.g.She will be late.h.Please come early in the morning.i.Every coolie looks like someone in the cla.j.How many eggs do you need? 2) Draw clocks and answer the questions.3) Listen.Write the words.Then make a sentence.a.cookies b.how c.need d.many e.you f.will g.cake h.I i.sugar j.like k.in

l.my

（三）Cla closing

Homework:.Please tell your friends about a wonderful time from your childhood and write it.

板书：

Leon32: Again , Please!

How (much many far long old tall often…)___________?

flag surprise cake cookies ice cream sugar someone early every late party begin forget remember 练习

一、选择

1._________is the trip? It’s eleven hours to Tianjin.

A.How long B.How often C.How much D. How many 2.__________ do you play basketball?---Once a week.

A.How long B.How often C.How much D. How many 3.________ are these shoes?---Fifty dollars.

A.How long B.How often C.How much D. How many 4.__________ books do you have?---I have four books in my hand.A.What

B.Where

C.How much D. How many

三、写出下列单词的正确形式 go

see

teach

flew

bought

Will go

Will swim

Will teach 课后反思：

《七年级英语冀教版教案模板.doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便编辑。

推荐度：

点击下载文档